Museum of Human Evolution and Research Center, Dhaka.: Technical Specifications Material, Page No. 1

Technical Specifications Material, Page No.
GOVERNMENT OF THE PEOPLES REPUBLIC OF BANGLADESH OFFICE OF THE EXECUTIVE ENGINEER PWD DIVISION, DHAKA Museum of Human evolution and Research Center, Dhaka. Ref no-2/664/699 INVITATION FOR TENDERS Sealed tenders are hereby invited from the eligible tenderers as defined in the tender document for the under listed works as per terms & conditions stated below Dated: 20 September 2011
1.
Project name
Museum of Human evolution and Research Center, Dhaka.
2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 7.
Source of funds Ministry Division Name of Agency Tender name Location of site Time for completion of the work Tendering Method Eligibility of tenderers
Government of Bangladesh (BOG) Ministry of Science & Technology Public works department Construction of the Museum building Agargaon, Dhaka. 24 (twenty four) Months Open Tendering Method(OTM) Contractors firm with eligibility stated in tender document as per CPTU regulation-2003, having experience of implementing R.C.C building or similar type of work within the past 3 years. TK. 2500.00 (two thousand) only TK. 2,50,000.00 (two lac fifty thousand) Office of the executive engineer, Dhaka.
9. 10. 11.
Price of tender document Amount of tender security Name & address of the office(s) selling tender document Name & address of the office(s) receiving tenders Name & address of the office(s) opening tenders Last date & time for selling tender document Last date & time for submission of tender
12.
Office of the executive engineer, Dhaka.
13.
Office of the executive engineer, Dhaka.
14. 15.
30-Jan.-2012 during office hours on all working days 31-Jan.-2012 up to 12.30 p.m.
Technical Specifications Material, Page No. 2
document 16. 17. Date & time for opening tenders Special instructions 31-Jan.-2012 at 3.00 p.m. The procuring Entity reserves the right to reject all tenders prior to acceptance.
Md. Mamunur Rahman Executive Engineer,
Table of Contents
Section 1.
A.
Instructions to BIDDERS ................................................................6

General ......................................................................................................... 6
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Scope of Tender ........................................................................................................... 6 Source of Funds ........................................................................................................... 6 Corrupt, Fraudulent, Collusive or Coercive Practices ................................................... 6 Eligible Tenderers ........................................................................................................ 7 Eligible Materials, Equipment and Services .................................................................. 8 Site Visit ...................................................................................................................... 8 Tender Document: Sections .......................................................................................... 8 Tender Document: Clarification ................................................................................... 9 Tender Document: Pre-Tender Meeting........................................................................ 9 Tender Document: Amendment .................................................................................... 9 Evaluation Criteria ...................................................................................................... 9 Experience Criteria .................................................................................................... 10 Financial Criteria ....................................................................................................... 10 Personnel Capacity ..................................................................................................... 10 Equipment Capacity ................................................................................................... 10 Joint Venture, Consortium or Association (JVCA) ...................................................... 10 Tender: Only one ..................................................................................................... 11 Tender: Preparation Costs ......................................................................................... 11 Tender: Language ...................................................................................................... 11 Tender: Contents of Tender........................................................................................ 11 Tender: Submission Sheet and Bill of Quantities ......................................................... 11 Tender: Alternatives .................................................................................................. 11 Tender: Prices and Discounts ..................................................................................... 12 Tender: Currency ...................................................................................................... 12 Documents Establishing Eligibility of the Tenderer ..................................................... 12 Documents Establishing the Eligibility and Conformity of Materials, Equipment and Services 13 Documents Establishing the Conformity of the Technical Specification ...................... 13 Documents Establishing the Tenderers Qualifications ................................................ 13 Tenderer: Disqualification .......................................................................................... 14 Tender: Validity ......................................................................................................... 14 Tender: Security ........................................................................................................ 14 Tender: Format and Signing....................................................................................... 15 Tender: Sealing and Marking ..................................................................................... 15 Tender: Submission Deadline ..................................................................................... 15 Tender: Submitted Late ............................................................................................. 15 Tender: Modification, Substitution or Withdrawal ..................................................... 16 Tender: Opening ........................................................................................................ 16 Tender: Confidentiality .............................................................................................. 16 Tender: Clarification .................................................................................................. 17 Tenderer: Contacting the Employer ........................................................................... 17 Tender: Responsive ness ............................................................................................. 17 Tender: Non-conformities,Errors, and Omissions ...................................................... 17 Tender: Correction of Arithmetical Errors ................................................................. 18 Tender: Preliminary Examination .............................................................................. 18 Tender: Technical Evaluation ..................................................................................... 18 Tender: Financial Evaluation ..................................................................................... 18 Tender: No Negotiation .............................................................................................. 19 Tender: Comparison .................................................................................................. 20 Tenderer: Post-qualification ....................................................................................... 20 Tenders: Employers Right to Accept or to Reject Any or All ...................................... 20
B.
Tender Document ........................................................................................... 8

7. 8. 9. 10.
C.
Evaluation and Qualification Criteria .............................................................. 9

11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16.
D.
Tender Preparation ...................................................................................... 11

17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31. 32.
E.
Tender Submission ....................................................................................... 15

33. 34. 35. 36.
F.
Tender Opening and Evaluation .................................................................... 16

37. 38. 39. 40. 41. 42. 43. 44. 45. 46. 47. 48. 49. 50.
G.
Contract Award............................................................................................ 20
51. 52. 53. 54. 55. 56. 57.
Award Criteria........................................................................................................... 20 Notification of Award ................................................................................................. 20 Performance Security ................................................................................................. 20 Contract Signing ........................................................................................................ 21 Advising Unsuccessful Tenderers ................................................................................ 21 Adjudicator ................................................................................................................ 21 Tenderers Right to Complain .................................................................................... 21
Section 2. Section 4.
A.
Tender Data Sheet ........................................................................22 General Conditions of Contract ...................................................28

General ........................................................................................................ 28
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31. 32. 33. 34. 35. 36. 37. 38. 39. 40. 41. Definitions .................................................................................................................. 28 Contract Documents ................................................................................................... 30 Corrupt, Fraudulent, Collusive or Coercive Practices ................................................. 30 Interpretation ............................................................................................................ 30 Documents Forming the Contract and Priority of Documents ..................................... 31 Eligibility ................................................................................................................... 31 Governing Language .................................................................................................. 32 Governing Law ......................................................................................................... 32 Gratuties / Agency fees ............................................................................................... 32 Joint Venture, Consortium or Association (JVCA) ...................................................... 32 Confidential Information ............................................................................................ 32 Communications and Notices ...................................................................................... 33 Copyright ................................................................................................................... 33 Assignment ................................................................................................................ 33 Sub-Contracting ......................................................................................................... 33 Other Contractors ...................................................................................................... 33 Contractors Responsibilities ...................................................................................... 33 Employers Responsibil- ities ...................................................................................... 33 Scope of Works .......................................................................................................... 33 Contract Price ............................................................................................................ 33 Engineers Decisions ................................................................................................... 34 Queries about the Contract conditions ........................................................................ 34 Delegation .................................................................................................................. 34 Contractors Personnel ............................................................................................... 34 Approval of the Contractors Temporary Works ........................................................ 34 Instructions ................................................................................................................ 34 Site Investigation Reports ........................................................................................... 34 Possession of the Site .................................................................................................. 35 Access to the Site ........................................................................................................ 35 Safety, Security and Protection of the Environment .................................................... 35 Discoveries ................................................................................................................. 35 Welfare of Labour ...................................................................................................... 35 Child Labour ............................................................................................................. 35 No Night and Friday Work ......................................................................................... 35 Employers and Contractors Risks ............................................................................ 35 Employers Risks ....................................................................................................... 36 Contractors Risks ..................................................................................................... 36 Insurance ................................................................................................................... 36 Taxes and Duties ........................................................................................................ 37 Limitation of Liability ................................................................................................ 37 Force Majeure............................................................................................................ 37 The Works to Be Completed by the Intended Completion Date ................................... 37 Programme of Works ................................................................................................. 37 Pro Rata Progress ...................................................................................................... 38 Early Warning ........................................................................................................... 38 Extension of the Intended Completion Date ................................................................ 38 Acceleration ............................................................................................................... 39 Delays Ordered by the Engineer ................................................................................. 39 Management Meetings ............................................................................................... 39 Contractor to Construct the Works ............................................................................ 39
Section 3. Project Brief .....................................................................................27
B.
Time Control ................................................................................................ 37

42. 43. 44. 45. 46. 47. 48. 49.
C.
Quality Control ............................................................................................ 39

50.
51. 52. 53. 54. 55. 56.
Works open to Inspection ........................................................................................... 39 Identifying Defects ..................................................................................................... 39 Tests .......................................................................................................................... 39 Examination of Work before covering up.................................................................... 39 Correction of Defects .................................................................................................. 39 Uncorrected Defects ................................................................................................... 39 Bill of Quantities ........................................................................................................ 40 Changes in the Quantities ........................................................................................... 40 Variations .................................................................................................................. 40 Payments for Variations ............................................................................................. 40 Cash Flow Forecasts ................................................................................................... 40 Payment Certificates .................................................................................................. 40 Payments ................................................................................................................... 41 Compensation Events ................................................................................................. 42 Change in Laws and Regulations ................................................................................ 43 Price Adjustment ....................................................................................................... 43 Retention ................................................................................................................... 43 Liquidated Damages ................................................................................................... 43 Bonus ......................................................................................................................... 44 Advance Payment ....................................................................................................... 44 Performance Security ................................................................................................. 44 Day works .................................................................................................................. 44 Cost of Repairs ........................................................................................................... 45 Completion ................................................................................................................ 45 Taking Over ............................................................................................................... 45 Final Account ............................................................................................................. 45 As-built Drawings and Manuals .................................................................................. 45 Termination ............................................................................................................... 45 46 Payment upon Termination ........................................................................................ 46 Property ..................................................................................................................... 47 Frustration ................................................................................................................. 47 Settlement of Disputes ................................................................................................ 48
D.
Cost Control ................................................................................................. 40

57. 58. 59. 60. 61. 62. 63. 64. 65. 66. 67. 68. 69. 70. 71. 72. 73.
E.
Completion of the Contract ........................................................................... 45

74. 75. 76. 77.
F.
Termination and Settlement of Disputes ........................................................ 45

78. 1. 79. 80. 81. 82.
Section 5. Section 6.
Particular Conditions of Contract ..............................................50 Bill of Quantities ..........................................................................54
Section 7. General Specification ......................................................................67

B. PLUMBING WORKS ............................................................................................ 33
4 GRADIENTS .............................................................................................................. 34
SECTION 8: PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS ...................................................2 Section 9. Drawings .........................................................................................116
Section 1.
A. 1. General Scope of Tender
Instructions to BIDDERS
1.1
The Employer, as indicated in the Tender Data Sheet (TDS) issues this Tender Document for the procurement of Works and Related Services incidental thereto as specified in the TDS and as detailed in Section 6: Bill of Quantities. The name of the Tender and the number and identification of its constituent lot(s) are stated in the TDS. The successful Tenderer will be required to complete the Works by the Intended Completion Date specified in the Particular Conditions of Contract (PCC).7 Throughout this Tender Document:
1.2 1.3
(a) (b) (c)

2. Source of Funds
the term in writing means communicated in written form with proof of receipt; if the context so requires, singular means plural and vice versa; and day means calendar day.
2.1
The Employer has been allocated public funds as indicated in the TDS and intends to apply a portion of the funds to eligible payments under the Contract for which this Tender Document is issued. For the purpose of this provision, public funds means any monetary resources appropriated to procuring entities under Government budget, or revenues generated by statutory bodies and corporations, or aid grants and credits put at the disposal of procuring entities by the development partners through the Government. Payments by the development partner, if so indicated in the TDS, will be made only at the request of the Government and upon approval by the development partner in accordance with the applicable Loan / Credit / Grant Agreement, and will be subject in all respects to the terms and conditions of that Agreement. The Government requires that Employers, as well as Tenderers and Contractors, shall observe the highest standard of ethics during the implementation of procurement proceedings and the execution of Contracts under public funds.
2.2
2.3
3.
Corrupt, Fraudulent, Collusive or Coercive Practices
3.1
3.2
In pursuance of this requirement, the Employer shall :
(a) (b)
exclude the Tenderer from participation in the procurement proceedings concerned or reject a proposal for award; and declare a Tenderer ineligible, either indefinitely or for a stated period of time, from participation in procurement proceedings under public funds;
if it, at any time, determines that the Tenderer has engaged in corrupt, fraudulent, collusive or coercive practices in competing for, or in executing, a Contract under public funds.
3.3
Should any corrupt, fraudulent, collusive or coercive practice of any kind come to the knowledge of the Employer, it shall, in the first place, allow the Tenderer to provide an explanation and shall, take actions only when a satisfactory explanation is not received. Such exclusion and the reasons thereof, shall be recorded in the record of the procurement proceedings and promptly communicated to the Tenderer concerned. Any communications between the Tenderer and the Employer related to matters of alleged fraud or corruption shall be in writing.
3.4
The Government defines, for the purposes of this provision, the terms set forth below as follows:
(a)
corrupt practice means offering, giving, or promising to give, directly or indirectly, to any officer or employee of a Procuring Entity or other governmental/private authority or individual a gratuity in any form, an employment or any other thing or service of value, as an inducement with respect to an act or decision of, or method followed by, a Procuring Entity in connection with the procurement proceeding; fraudulent practice means a misrepresentation or omission of facts in order to influence a procurement proceeding or the execution of a Contract to the detriment of the Employer; collusive practice means a scheme or arrangement among two and more Tenderers with or without the knowledge of the Employer (prior to or after Tender submission) designed to establish Tender prices at artificial, non-competitive levels and to deprive the Employer of the benefits of free, open and genuine competition; and coercive practice means harming or threatening to harm, directly or indirectly, persons or their property to influence the procurement proceedings, or affect the execution of a Contract.
(b)
(c)
(d)
3.5
The Government requires that the Employers personnel have an equal obligation not to solicit, ask for and/or use coercive methods to obtain personal benefits in connection with the said proceedings.
4.
Eligible Tenderers
4.1 4.2
This Invitation for Tenders is open to eligible Tenderers from all countries, except for any specified in the TDS. A Tenderer may be a physical or juridical individual or body of individuals, or company, association or any combination of them under agreement in the form of an intended or existing joint venture, consortium or association (JVCA), invited to take part in public procurement or seeking to be so invited or submitting a Tender in response to an Invitation for Tenders. All members of the JVCA shall be jointly and severally liable to the Employer. JVCA is distinct from Contractor Subcontractor arrangement where the entire responsibility for contract execution rests with the Contractor.
4.3
A Government-owned enterprise in Bangladesh may also participate in the Tender if it is legally and financially autonomous, it operates under commercial law, and it is not a dependent agency of the Employer. The Tender shall provide in Section 5: Tender and Contract Forms, a statement that the Tenderer (including all members of a JVCA) is not associated, nor has been associated in the past, directly or indirectly, with a consultant or any other entity that has prepared the design, specifications and other documents for this Invitation for Tenders.
4.4
4.5 4.6 4.7 4.8
The Tenderer shall not be under a declaration of ineligibility for corrupt, fraudulent, collusive or coercive practices in accordance with Sub-Clause 3.2. The Tenderer with a consistent history of litigation or a number of arbitration awards against it, shall not be eligible to Tender. The Tenderer shall have the legal capacity to enter into the Contract. The Tenderer shall not be insolvent, be in receivership, be bankrupt or being wound up, its business activities shall not be suspended, and it shall not be the subject of legal proceedings for any of the foregoing. The Tenderer shall have fulfilled its obligations to pay taxes and social security contributions under the relevant national laws and regulations.
4.9
5.
Eligible Materials, Equipment and Services
5.1
All materials, equipment and services to be supplied under the Contract are eligible, unless their origin is from a country specified in the TDS.
5.2
For purposes of this clause, origin means the place where the materials and equipment are mined, grown, produced or manufactured, or the place from which the related services are supplied. The origin of materials and equipment and services is distinct from the nationality of the Tenderer.
5.3
6.
Site Visit
6.1
The Tenderer, at the Tenderers own responsibility and risk, is encouraged to visit and examine the Site and obtain all information that may be necessary for preparing the Tender and entering into a Contract for performance of the Works. The Tenderer should ensure that the Employer is informed of the visit in adequate time to allow it to make appropriate arrangements. The costs of visiting the Site shall be at the Tenderers own expense
6.2
6.3
B. 7.
Tender Document Tender Document: Sections
7.1
The Sections comprising the Tender Document are listed below. Section 1 Instructions to Tenderers (ITT) Section 2 Tender Data Sheet (TDS) Section 3 General Conditions of Contract (GCC) Section 4 Particular Conditions of Contract (PCC) Section 5 Tender and Contract Forms Section 6 Bill of Quantities (BOQ)
Section 7 General Specifications Section 8 Particular Specifications Section 9 Drawings
7.2 7.3
The Employer will reject any tender submission if the Tender Document was not purchased directly from the Employer, or through its agent as stated in the TDS. The Tenderer is expected to examine all instructions, forms, terms, and specifications in the Tender Document as well as in Tender Amendments, if any. Failure to furnish all information or documentation required by the Tender Document may result in the rejection of the Tender. A prospective Tenderer requiring any clarification of the Tender Document shall contact the Employer in writing at the Employers address indicated in the TDS. The Employer will respond in writing to any request for clarification received no later than seven (7) days prior to the deadline for submission of Tenders. The Employer shall forward copies of its response to all those who have purchased the Tender Document, including a description of the enquiry but without identifying its source. To clarify issues and to answer questions on any matter arising in the Tender Document, the Employer may, if stated in the TDS, invite prospective Tenderers to attend a Pre-Tender Meeting at the place, date and time as specified in the TDS. Tenderers are encouraged to attend the meeting, if it is held. The Tenderer is requested to submit any questions in writing so as to reach the Employer not later than five (5) days prior to the date of the meeting. Minutes of the pre-Tender meeting, including the text of the questions raised and the responses given, together with any responses prepared after the meeting, will be transmitted within seven (7) days to all those who purchased the Tender document. Non-attendance at the pre-Tender meeting will not be a cause for disqualification of a Tenderer
8.
Tender Document: Clarification
8.1
8.2
9.
Tender Document: PreTender Meeting
9.1
9.2 9.3
9.4
10. Tender Document: Amendment
10.1 At any time prior to the deadline for submission of Tenders, the Employer, for any
reason, on its own initiative or in response to a clarification request in writing from a Tenderer, having purchased the Tender Document, may amend the Tender Document by issuing an amendment.
10.2 Any amendment issued shall become an integral part of the Tender Document and
shall be communicated in writing to all those who have purchased the Tender Document.
10.3 To give a prospective Tenderer reasonable time in which to take an amendment into
account in preparing its Tender, the Employer may, at its discretion, extend the deadline for the submission of Tenders. In the event that an amendment is issued with a period of only one third or less of the Tendering period remaining, then the deadline for the submission of Tenders may be extended by the Employer, if so requested by a substantial number of Tenderers.
C.
Evaluation and Qualification Criteria
11. Evaluation Criteria
11.1 The following evaluation criteria will be applicable, unless otherwise indicated in
the TDS:
(a) (b) 12. Experience Criteria
completion time; and adjustments for minor deviations on substantially responsive tenders.
12.1 The Tenderer shall possess the necessary professional and technical qualifications
and competence, financial resources, equipment and other physical facilities, managerial capability, specific experience, reputation, and the personnel, to perform the Contract.
12.2 To qualify for a multiple number of lots in a package for which Tenders are invited
in the Invitation for Tenders, the Tenderer shall demonstrate having resources and experience sufficient to meet the aggregate of the qualifying criteria for the individual lots.
12.3 The Tenderer shall have the following minimum level of construction experience
to qualify for the performance of the Works under the Contract: (a) a minimum number of years of general experience in the construction of works as specified in the TDS; and
(b) specific experience as a prime Contractor or Subcontractor in the construction of at least the number of completed Contracts stated in the TDS of a nature, complexity and construction technology similar to the proposed Works over the period stated in the TDS. 13. Financial Criteria
13.1 The Tenderer shall have the following minimum level of financial capacity to
qualify for the performance of the Works under the Contract. (a) the average annual construction turnover as specified in the TDS during the period specified in the TDS; and
(b) the minimum Tender capacity as specified in the TDS.
13.2 The Tenderer shall submit satisfactory bank references and documents
demonstrating availability of funds/liquid assets and/or credit facilities from its banker(s) to successfully complete the Contract, as specified in the TDS.
13.3 The Tenderer shall submit documentary evidence that all claims, arbitration or
other litigation case have been satisfactorily resolved, and if not, they shall have no serious negative impact on the financial capacity of the Tenderer. 14. Personnel Capacity
14.1 The Tenderer shall have the following minimum level of personnel capacity to
qualify for the performance of the Works under the Contract: (a) a Construction Project Manager with qualifications and experience as specified in the TDS;
(b) the minimum number of Engineers with qualifications and experience as specified in the TDS; and (c) 15. Equipment Capacity 16. Joint Venture, Consortium or Association (JVCA) other key staff with qualifications and experience as specified in the TDS.
15.1 The Tenderer shall own or have assured access through lease, hire, or other such
method, of the essential equipment, in full working order, as specified in the TDS.
16.1 The figures for each of the partners of a JVCA shall be added together to determine the
Tenderers compliance with the minimum qualifying criteria; however, for a JVCA to qualify, each of its partners must meet at least twenty-five (25) percent of minimum criteria for an individual Tenderer, and the partner in charge at least forty (40) percent of those minimum criteria. Failure to comply with this requirement will result in rejection of the JVCA Tender. Subcontractors experience and resources will not be taken into account in determining the Tenderers compliance with the qualifying criteria.
D.
Tender Preparation Only
17. Tender: one
17.1 A Tenderer shall submit only one (1) Tender for each lot, either individually or as a
partner in a JVCA. A Tenderer who submits or participates in more than one (1) Tender will cause all the Tenders with that Tenderers participation to be rejected.
18. Tender: Preparation Costs 19. Tender: Language
18.1 The Tenderer shall bear all costs associated with the preparation and submission
of its Tender, and the Employer shall not be responsible or liable for those costs, regardless of the conduct or outcome of the Tendering process.
19.1 The Tender, as well as all correspondence and documents relating to the Tender shall
be written in the English or Bangla language, unless specified otherwise in the TDS. Supporting documents and printed literature furnished by the Tenderer that are part of the Tender may be in another language, provided they are accompanied by an accurate translation of the relevant passages in the English or Bangla language, in which case, for purposes of interpretation of the Tender, such translation shall govern.
19.2 The Tenderer shall bear all costs of translation to the governing language and all risks
of the accuracy of such translation. 20. Tender: Contents of Tender
20.1 The Tender prepared by the Tenderer shall comprise the following: (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) (h) (i)
The Tender Submission Sheet. The priced Bill of Quantities for each lot. Tender Security. Alternative tender. Written confirmation authorizing the signatory of the Tender to commit the Tenderer. Documentary evidence establishing the Tenderers eligibility to Tender, including the Tenderer Information Sheet. Documentary evidence establishing the Tenderers qualifications to perform the Contract, if its Tender is accepted; Description of work method and schedule. Any other document as specified in the TDS.
21. Tender: Submission Sheet and Bill of Quantities
21.1 The Tenderer shall submit the Tender Submission. This document shall be completed
without any alterations to its format, filling in all blank spaces with the information requested, failing which the Tender may be rejected as being incomplete.
21.2 The Tenderer shall submit the priced Bill of. If in preparing its Tender, the Tenderer
has made errors in the unit price or the total price, and wishes to correct such errors prior to submission of its Tender, it may do so, but shall ensure that each correction is suitable initialled by the authorised person of the Tenderer and that a statement shall be made as to the total number of corrections made, at the end of the priced Bill of Quantities. 22. Tender: Alternatives
22.1 Unless otherwise stated in the TDS, alternative Tenders shall not be considered. 22.2 If so allowed in the Tender Data Sheet, Tenderers wishing to offer technical
alternatives to the requirements of the Tender Documents must also submit a Tender
that complies with the requirements of the Tender Documents, including the basic technical design as indicated in the drawings and specifications. In addition to submitting the basic Tender, the Tenderer shall provide all information necessary for a complete evaluation of the alternative(s) by the Employer, including design calculations, technical specifications, breakdown of prices, proposed construction methods and other relevant details. Only the technical alternatives, if any, of the lowest evaluated Tender conforming to the basic technical requirements shall be considered by the Employer.
22.3 When alternative times for completion are explicitly invited, a statement to that effect
will be included in the TDS, as will the method of evaluating different times for completion. 23. Tender: Prices and Discounts
23.1 The prices and discounts quoted by the Tenderer in the Tender Submission Sheet and
in the Bill of Quantities shall conform to the requirements specified below.
23.2 The Tenderer shall fill in rates and prices for all items of the Works described in the
Bill of Quantities (BOQ). Items against which no rate or price is entered by the Tenderer will not be paid for by the Employer when executed and shall be deemed covered by the rates for other items and prices in the BOQ.
23.3 The price to be quoted in the Tender Submission Sheet and shall be the total price of
the Tender, excluding any discounts offered.
23.4 The Tenderer shall quote any unconditional discounts and the methodology for their
application in the Tender Submission Sheet.
23.5 Unless otherwise provided in the TDS and the PCC, the rates and prices quoted
by the Tenderer are subject to adjustment during the performance of the Contract in accordance with the provisions of GCC Clause 66. The Tenderer shall furnish the indices and weightings for the price adjustment formulae in the PCC. The Employer may require the Tenderer to justify its proposed indices and weightings.
23.6 If so indicated in the TDS, Tenders are being invited for individual lots or for any
combination of lots. Tenderers wishing to offer any price reduction for the award of more than one lot shall specify in their Tender the price reductions applicable to each lot, or alternatively, to any combination of lots within the package. Price reductions or discounts will be considered in the Tender evaluation, provided the Tenders for all lots are submitted and opened at the same time.
23.7 All duties, taxes and other levies payable by the Contractor under the Contract, or
for any other causes, as of the date twenty-eight (28) days prior to the deadline for submission of Tenders, shall be included in the rates and prices and the total Tender Price submitted by the Tenderer. 24. Tender: Currency 25. Documents Establishing Eligibility of the Tenderer
24.1 All prices shall be quoted in Bangladesh Taka. 25.1 The Tenderer shall submit documentary evidence to establish its eligibility.
(a) complete the eligibility declarations in the Tender Submission Sheet, Tender and Contract Forms; and
(b) if the Tenderer is an existing or intended JVCA, it must submit the Tenderer Information Sheet and a copy of the JVCA Agreement, or a letter of intent to enter into such an agreement. The respective document shall be signed by all legally authorised signatories of all the parties to the existing or intended JVCA, as appropriate.
26. Documents Establishing the Eligibility and Conformity of Materials, Equipment and Services
26.1 The Tenderer shall submit documentary evidence to establish the origin of all
materials, equipment and services to be supplied under the Contract.
26.2 To establish the conformity of the materials, equipment and services to be supplied
under the Contract, the Tenderer shall furnish, as part of its Tender, the documentary evidence (which may be in the form of literature, drawings or data) that these conform to the technical specifications and standards specified in Section General Specifications and Particular Specifications. The Tenderer shall furnish a Technical Specification including a statement of work methods and schedule and any other information as stipulated in TDS, in sufficient detail to demonstrate the adequacy for the Tenderers submission to meet the work requirements and the completion time.
27. Documents 27.1 Establishing the Conformity of the Technical Specification 28. Documents Establishing the Tenderers Qualifications
28.1 Tenderers shall submit documentary evidence. 28.2 Tenderers shall submit the Tenderer Information Sheet, Tender and Contract Forms. 28.3 Tenderers shall include the following information and documents with their Tenders:
(a) total monetary value of construction work performed for each of the last five (5) years;
(b) experience in works of a similar nature and size for each of, and details of work under way or Contractually committed and clients who may be contacted for further information on those Contracts; (c) major items of construction equipment proposed to carry out the Contract;
(d) qualification and experience of key site management and technical personnel proposed for the Contract;
(e) reports on the financial standing of the Tenderer, such as profit and loss
statements and corresponding auditors reports for the past five (5) years;
(f) financial reports or balance sheets or profit and loss statements or auditors
reports or bank references with documents or a combination of these demonstrating the availability of liquid assets to successfully complete the contract;
(g) evidence of adequacy of working capital for this Contract (access to line(s)
of credit and availability of other financial resources);
(h) authority to seek references from the Tenderers bankers; and (i)
information on past (5 years) litigation in which the Tenderer has been involved or in which the Tenderer is currently involved.
28.4 Tenders submitted by a JVCA shall comply with the following requirements, and any
other requirements as specified in the TDS:
(a) the Tender shall be signed so as to be legally binding on all partners; (b) all partners shall be jointly and severally liable for the execution of the
Contract in accordance with the Contract terms;
(c) one of the partners will be nominated as being in charge, authorized to incur
liabilities, and receive instructions for and on behalf of any and all partners of the joint venture; and
(d) the execution of the entire Contract, including payment, shall be done
exclusively with the partner in charge.
29. Tenderer: Disqualification
29.1 The Employer shall disqualify a Tenderer who submits a document containing
false information for purposes of qualification or misleads or makes false representations in proving its qualification requirements. If such an occurrence is proven, the Employer may declare such a Tenderer ineligible, either indefinitely or for a stated period of time, from participation in future procurement proceedings
29.2 The Employer may disqualify a Tenderer who has record of poor performance
such as abandoning the works, not properly completing the Contract, inordinate delays, litigation history or financial failures. 30. Tender: Validity
30.1 Tenders shall remain valid for the period specified in the TDS after the date of Tender
submission prescribed by the Employer. A Tender valid for a shorter period shall be rejected by the Employer as non responsive.
30.2 In exceptional circumstances, prior to the expiration of the Tender validity period, the
Employer may solicit the Tenderers consent to an extension of the period of validity of their Tenders. The request and the responses shall be made in writing. The Tender Security provided shall also be suitably extended promptly. If a Tenderer does not respond or refuses the request it shall not forfeit its Tender Security, but its Tender shall no longer be considered in the evaluation proceedings. A Tenderer agreeing to the request will not be required or permitted to modify its Tender. 31. Tender: Security
31.1 The Tenderer shall furnish as part of its Tender, a Tender Security in original form
and in the amount specified in the TDS.
31.2 The Tender Security shall: (a) at the Tenderers option, be either;
(i) (ii) in the form of a bank draft or pay order, or in the form of an irrevocable bank guarantee issued by a scheduled Bank of Bangladesh. be payable promptly upon written demand by the Employer in the case of the conditions listed in ITT Sub-Clause 31.5 being invoked; and Remain valid for a period of twenty eight (28) days beyond the original validity period of Tenders.
(b) (c)
31.3 A Tender not accompanied by a valid Tender Security in accordance with ITT SubClause 31.2 shall be rejected by the Employer as non-responsive.
31.4 Unsuccessful Tenderers Tender Security will be discharged or returned within

twenty eight (28) days of the end of the Tender validity period specified in ITT SubClause 30.1 and 30.2 The Tender Security of the successful Tenderer will be discharged upon the Tenderers furnishing of the Performance Security pursuant to ITT Clause 53 and signing the Contract Agreement.
31.5 The Tender Security may be forfeited:

(a) if a Tenderer withdraws its Tender during the period of Tender validity specified by the Tenderer on the Tender Submission Sheet, except as provided in ITT Sub-Clause 30.2; or
(b) if the successful Tenderer fails to: (i) accept the correction of its Tender Price pursuant to ITT Sub-Clause 43.2; or
(ii) (iii)
furnish a Performance Security in accordance with ITT Clause 53; or sign the Contract in accordance with ITT Clause 54.
31.6
The Tender Security of a JVCA shall be in the name of the JVCA that submits the Tender. If the JVCA has not been legally constituted at the time of tendering, the Tender Security shall be in the name of all intended JVCA partners as named in the letter of intent mentioned in ITT Sub-Clause 25.1
32. Tender: Format and Signing
32.1 The Tenderer shall prepare one (1) original of the documents comprising the Tender
as described in ITT Sub-Clause 20.1 and clearly mark it ORIGINAL. In addition, the Tenderer shall prepare the number of copies of the Tender, as specified in the TDS and clearly mark each of them COPY. In the event of any discrepancy between the original and the copies, the original shall prevail.
32.2 The original and each copy of the Tender shall be typed or written in indelible ink and
shall be signed by the person duly authorized to sign on behalf of the Tenderer. This authorization shall consist of a written authorization and shall be attached to the Tenderer Information Sheet The name and position held by each person signing the authorization must be typed or printed below the signature. All pages of the original and of each copy of the Tender, except for un-amended printed literature, shall be numbered sequentially and signed or initialled by the person signing the Tender.
32.3 Any interlineations, erasures, or overwriting shall be valid only if they are signed or
initialled by the person(s) signing the Tender E. Tender Submission
33. Tender: Sealing and Marking
33.1 The Tenderer shall enclose the original in one (1) envelope and all the copies of the
Tender in another envelope, duly marking the envelopes as ORIGINAL and COPY. These two (2) envelopes shall then be enclosed in one (1) single outer envelope.
33.2 The inner and outer envelopes shall:

(a) bear the name and address of the Tenderer; (b) be addressed to the Employer at the address specified in the TDS; (c) bear the name of the Tender and the Tender Number as specified in the TDS; and (d) bear a statement DO NOT OPEN BEFORE.... the time and date for Tender opening as specified in the TDS..
33.3 If all envelopes are not sealed and marked as required by ITT Sub-Clause 33.2, the
Employer will assume no responsibility for the misplacement or premature opening of the Tender 34. Tender: Submission Deadline
34.1 Tenders must be received by the Employer at the address specified in ITT (instruction
to tenderers) Sub Clause 33.2 no later than the date and time specified in the TDS.
34.2 The Tender may be hand delivered, posted by registered mail or sent by courier. The
Employer shall, on request, provide the Tenderer with a receipt showing the date and time when its Tender was received.
34.3 The Employer may, at its discretion, extend the deadline for the submission of Tenders
by amending the Tender Document in accordance with ITT Clause 10, in which case all rights and obligations of the Employer and Tenderers previously subject to the deadline shall thereafter be subject to the new deadline as extended. 35. Tender: Submitted Late
35.1 Any Tender received by the Employer after the deadline for submission of Tenders in
accordance with ITT Clause 34 shall be declared late, will be rejected, and returned
unopened to the Tenderer. 36. Tender: Modification, Substitution or Withdrawal
36.1 A Tenderer may modify, substitute or withdraw its Tender after it has been submitted
by sending a written notice, duly signed by the same authorized representative, and shall include a copy of the authorization in accordance with ITT Sub-Clause 32.2, (except that no copies of the withdrawal notice are required). The corresponding substitution or modification of the Tender must accompany the respective written notice. The written notice must be: (a) submitted in accordance with ITT Clauses 32 and 33 (except that withdrawal notices do not require copies), and in addition, the respective envelopes shall be clearly marked MODIFICATION, SUBSTITUTION, OR WITHDRAWAL; and
(b) received by the Employer prior to the deadline prescribed for submission of Tenders, in accordance with ITT Clause 34.
36.2 Tenders requested to be withdrawn in accordance with ITT Sub-Clause 36.1 shall be
returned unopened to the Tenderers, only after the Tender opening.
36.3 No Tender may be modified, substituted, or withdrawn after the deadline for
submission of Tenders specified in ITT Clause 34.
36.4 Tenderers may only offer discounts to, or otherwise modify the prices of their Tenders
by including Tender modifications in the original Tender submission, or by submitting Tender modifications in accordance with ITT Sub-Clause 30.1.
F.
Tender Opening and Evaluation
37. Tender: Opening
37.1 The Employer shall open the Tenders in public, including modifications or
substitutions made pursuant to ITT Clause 36, at the time, on the date, and only at the one place specified in the TDS. Tenders for which an acceptable notice of withdrawal has been submitted pursuant to ITT Clause 36 shall not be opened. Tenderers or their authorised representatives shall be allowed to attend and witness the opening of Tenders, and shall sign a register evidencing their attendance.
37.2 The name of the Tenderer, Tender modifications, substitutions or withdrawals,

total amount of each Tender, number of corrections, discounts, and the presence or absence of requisite Tender Security, any alternatives, if so permitted, and such other details as the Employer, at its discretion, may consider appropriate, shall be read out aloud and recorded. Only discounts and alternative offers read out at the Tender opening shall be considered for evaluation. All pages of the original Tender, except for un-amended printed literature, will be initialled by a minimum of three (3) members of the Employers Tender opening committee.
37.3 Minutes of the Tender opening shall be made by the Employer and furnished to
any Tenderer upon receipt of a written request. The minutes shall include, as a minimum: the name of the Tenderer and whether there is a withdrawal, substitution, or modification; the Tender Price, per lot if applicable, including any discounts and alternative offers; and the presence or absence of a Tender Security, if one was required.
37.4 Tenders not opened and read out at the Tender opening shall not be considered,
irrespective of the circumstances, and shall be returned unopened to the Tenderer.
37.5 No Tender shall be rejected at the Tender opening, except for late Tenders, which shall
be returned unopened to the Tenderer pursuant to ITT Clause 35. 38. Tender:
38.1 After the opening of Tenders, information relating to the examination, clarification, and
Confidentiality
evaluation of Tenders and recommendations for award shall not be disclosed to Tenderers or other persons not officially concerned with the evaluation process until after the award of the Contract is announced.
39. Tender: Clarification
39.1 The Employer may ask Tenderers for clarification of their Tenders in order to facilitate
the examination and evaluation of Tenders. The request for clarification and the response shall be in writing, and any changes in the prices or substance of the Tender shall not be sought, offered or permitted, except to confirm the correction of arithmetical errors discovered by the Employer in the evaluation of the Tenders, in accordance with ITT Clause 43.
40. Tenderer: Contacting the Employer
40.1 Following the opening of the Tenders and until the Contract is signed no Tenderer
shall make any unsolicited communication to the Employer or try in any way to influence the Employers examination and evaluation of the Tenders.
40.2 Any effort by a Tenderer to influence the Employer in its decisions on the
examination, evaluation, comparison, and post-qualification of the Tenders or Contract award may result in the rejection of its Tender.
40.3 Notwithstanding ITT Sub-Clause 40.1, from the time of Tender opening to the time of
Contract award, if any Tenderer wishes to contact the Employer on any matter related to the tendering process, it should do so in writing. 41. Tender: Responsive ness
41.1 The Employers determination of a Tenders responsiveness is to be based on the

contents of the Tender itself without recourse to extrinsic evidence.
41.2 A substantially responsive Tender is one that conforms in all respects to the
requirements of the Tender Document without material deviation, reservation, or omission. A material deviation, reservation, or omission is one that: (a) affects in any substantial way the scope, quality, or performance of the Works specified in the Contract; or
(b) limits in any substantial way, or is inconsistent with the Tender Document, the Employers rights or the Tenderers obligations under the Contract; or (c) if rectified would unfairly affect the competitive position of other Tenderers presenting substantially responsive Tenders.
41.3 If a Tender is not substantially responsive to the Tender Document, it shall be rejected
by the Employer and shall not subsequently be made responsive by the Tenderer by correction of the material deviation, reservation, or omission.
41.4 There shall be no requirement as to the minimum number of responsive Tenders.
42. Tender: Nonconformities,Er rors, and Omissions
42.1 The Employer may regard a Tender as responsive even if it contains minor deviations
that do not materially alter or depart from the characteristics, terms, conditions and other requirement set forth in the Tender Document or if it contains errors or oversights that are capable of being corrected without affecting the substance of the Tender.
42.2 Provided that a Tender is substantially responsive, the Employer may request that the
Tenderer submits the necessary information or documentation, within a reasonable period of time, to rectify nonmaterial nonconformities or omissions in the Tender related to documentation requirements. Such omission shall not be related to any aspect of the rates of the Tender reflected in the Priced Bill of Quantities. Failure by the Tenderer to comply with the request may result in the rejection of its Tender.
43. Tender: Correction of Arithmetical Errors
43.1 Provided that the Tender is substantially responsive, the Employer shall correct
arithmetical errors on the following basis: (a) if there is a discrepancy between the unit price and the line item total price that is obtained by multiplying the unit price and quantity, the unit price shall prevail and the line item total price shall be corrected, unless in the opinion of the Employer there is an obvious misplacement of the decimal point in the unit price, in which case the total price as quoted shall govern and the unit price shall be corrected;
(b) if there is an error in a total corresponding to the addition or subtraction of subtotals, the subtotals shall prevail and the total shall be corrected; and (c) if there is a discrepancy between words and figures, the amount in words shall prevail, unless the amount expressed in words is related to an arithmetical error, in which case the amount in figures shall prevail subject to (a) and (b) above.
43.2 Any arithmetical error or other discrepancies as stated in ITT Sub-Clause 43.1
shall be immediately notified to the concerned Tenderer.
43.3 Any Tenderer that does not accept the correction of errors, as determined by the
application of ITT Sub-Clause 43.1, shall be disqualified and its Tender Security may be forfeited. 44. Tender: Preliminary Examination
44.1 The Employer shall firstly examine the Tenders to confirm that all documentation
requested in ITT Clause 20 has been provided, and to determine the completeness of each document submitted.
44.2 The Employer shall assess whether the Tenderers Qualifications as per Section C are
substantially met. Any negative determination by the Employer will result in rejecting the Tender as non-responsive without the need for further evaluation as per ITT clauses 45 and 46. 45. Tender: Technical Evaluation
45.1 The Employer shall secondly examine the Tender to confirm that all terms and
conditions specified in the GCC and the PCC have been accepted by the Tenderer without any material deviation or reservation.
45.2 The Employer shall evaluate the technical aspects of the Tender submitted in
accordance with ITT Clauses 26 and 27, to confirm that all requirements specified General Specifications and Particular Specifications of the Tender Document have been met without any material deviation or reservation.
45.3 If, after the examination of the terms and conditions and the technical aspects of the
Tender, the Employer determines that the Tender is not substantially responsive in accordance with ITT Sub-Clause 41.3, it shall reject the Tender. 46. Tender: Financial
46.1 The Employer shall thirdly evaluate each Tender that has been determined, up to this
stage of the evaluation, to be substantially responsive.
Evaluation
46.2 To evaluate a Tender, the Employer shall consider the following:

(a) the Tender price, excluding Provisional Sums and the provision, if any, for contingencies in the Summary Bill of Quantities, but including Daywork, where priced competitively;
(b) price adjustment for correction of arithmetical errors pursuant to ITT SubClause 43.1; (c) appropriate adjustments in order to take into consideration discounts or other price modifications offered pursuant to ITT Sub-Clause 23.4;
(d) appropriate adjustments for any other acceptable variations or deviations pursuant to ITT Sub-Clause 42.1; and (e) application of all the evaluation factors indicated in ITT Clause 11.
46.3 Variations, deviations, and alternative offers and other factors which are in excess of
the requirements of the Tender Document or otherwise result in unsolicited benefits for the Employer will not be taken into account in Tender evaluation.
46.4 The estimated effect of any price adjustment provisions under GCC Clause 66, applied
over the period of execution of the Contract, shall not be taken into account in Tender evaluation.
46.5 If so indicated in the TDS (ITT Sub-Clause 23.6), the Tender Document shall allow
Tenderers to quote separate prices for one or more lots, and shall allow the Employer to award one or multiple lots to more than one Tenderer following the methodology specified in ITT Sub-Clause 46.6.
46.6 To determine the lowest-evaluated lot or combination of lots, the Employer shall take
into account: (a) The experience and resources sufficient to meet the aggregate of the qualifying criteria for the individual lot;
(b) the lowest-evaluated Tender for each lot calculated in accordance with the requirements of Evaluation Criteria; (c) the price reduction per lot or combination of lots and the methodology for their application as offered by the Tenderer in its Tender; and
(d) the Contract-award sequence that provides the optimum economic combination taking into account any limitations due to constraints in Works or execution capacity determined in accordance with the post-qualification criteria under ITT Clause 49.
46.7 If the lowest Evaluated Tender is seriously unbalanced or front loaded in the opinion of
the Employer, the Employer may require the Tenderer to produce detailed price analysis for any or all items of the BOQ, to demonstrate the internal consistency of those prices with the construction methods and schedule proposed. After evaluation of the price analysis, taking into consideration the schedule of estimated Contract payments, the Employer may require that the amount of the Performance Security set forth in ITT Clause 53 be increased at the expenses of the Tenderer to a level sufficient to protect the Employer against financial loss in the event of default by such Tenderer during Contract implementation, if awarded the contract. 47. Tender: No Negotiation
47.1 No negotiations shall be held with the lowest or any other Tenderer. 47.2 A Tenderer shall not be required, as a condition for award, to undertake responsibilities
not stipulated in the Tender documents, to change its price, or otherwise to modify its
Tender. 48. Tender: Comparison 49. Tenderer: Postqualification
48.1 The Employer shall compare all substantially responsive Tenders to determine the
lowest-evaluated Tender, in accordance with ITT Clause 46.
49.1 The Employer shall determine to its satisfaction whether the Tenderer that is selected
as having submitted the lowest evaluated and substantially responsive Tender is qualified to perform the Contract satisfactorily.
49.2 The determination shall be based upon an examination of the documentary evidence of
the Tenderers qualifications submitted by the Tenderer, pursuant to ITT Clause 28, to clarifications in accordance with ITT Clause 39 and the qualification criteria indicated in ITT Clauses 11 to 16 inclusive. Factors not included therein shall not be used in the evaluation of the Tenderers qualification.
49.3 An affirmative determination shall be a prerequisite for award of the Contract to the
Tenderer. A negative determination shall result in rejection of the Tenderers Tender, in which event the Employer shall proceed to the next lowest evaluated Tender to make a similar determination of that Tenderers capabilities to perform satisfactorily 50. Tenders: Employers Right to Accept or to Reject Any or All
50.1 The Employer reserves the right to accept any Tender, to annul the Tender
proceedings, or to reject any or all Tenders, at any time prior to Contract award, without thereby incurring any liability to Tenderers, or any obligation to inform Tenderers of the grounds for the Employers actions.
G.
Contract Award
51. Award Criteria
51.1 The Employer shall award the Contract to the Tenderer whose offer is
substantially responsive to the Tender Document and that has been determined to be the lowest evaluated Tender, provided further that the Tenderer is determined to be qualified to perform the Contract satisfactorily.
52. Notification of Award
52.1 Prior to the expiration of the period of Tender validity, the Employer shall notify the
successful Tenderer, in writing, that its Tender has been accepted.
52.2 Until a formal contract is prepared and executed, the Notification of Award shall
constitute a binding Contract.
52.3 The Notification of Award shall state the value of the proposed Contract, the amount
of the Performance Security, the time within which the Performance Security shall be submitted and the time within which the Contract shall be signed. 53. Performance Security
53.1 Within fourteen (14) days of the receipt of Notification of Award from the
Employer, the successful Tenderer shall furnish the Performance Security for the due performance of the Contract in the amount specified in the TDS using for that purpose the Performance Security Form furnished in Tender and Contract Forms.
53.2 The Performance Security shall be valid until a date twenty eight (28) days after
the date of issue of the certificate of completion.
53.3 The proceeds of the Performance Security shall be payable to the Employer
unconditionally upon first written demand as compensation for any loss resulting from the Contractors failure to complete its obligations under the Contract.
54. Contract Signing
54.1 At the same time as the Employer issues the Notification of Award, the Employer
shall send the Contract Agreement and all documents forming the Contract, to the successful Tenderer.
54.2 Within twenty-one (21) days of receipt of the Contract Agreement, the successful
Tenderer shall sign, date, and return it to the Employer.
54.3 Failure of the successful Tenderer to submit the Performance Security, pursuant to
ITT Sub-Clause 53.1, or sign the Contract, pursuant to ITT Sub-Clause 54.2, shall constitute sufficient grounds for the annulment of the award and forfeiture of the Tender Security. In that event, the Employer may award the Contract to the next lowest evaluated responsive Tenderer at their quoted price (corrected for arithmetical errors), who is assessed by the Employer to be qualified to perform the Contract satisfactorily.
54.4 Immediately upon receipt of the signed Contract Agreement and Performance
Security from the successful Tenderer, the Employer shall discharge and return the successful Tenderers Tender Security. 55. Advising Unsuccessful Tenderers
55.1 Upon the successful Tenderers furnishing of the Performance Security pursuant to
ITT Clause 53, and signing of the Contract pursuant to ITT Clause 54, the Employer shall also notify all other Tenderers that their Tenders have been unsuccessful.
55.2 The Employer shall promptly respond in writing to any unsuccessful Tenderer who,
after notification in accordance with ITT Sub-Clause 55.1, requests in writing for the Employer to communicate the grounds on which its Tender was not selected. 56. Adjudicator
56.1 The Employer proposes the person named in the TDS to be appointed as
Adjudicator under the Contract, at an hourly fee and for those reimbursable expenses specified in the TDS.
56.2 If the Tenderer disagrees with this proposal, the Tenderer should state so in its
Tender. If, in the Notification of Award, the Employer and the Tenderer has still not agreed on the appointment of the Adjudicator, the Adjudicator shall be appointed by the Appointing Authority designated in the TDS. 57. Tenderers Right to Complain 57.1 Any Tenderer has the right to complain if it has suffered or may suffer loss or damage due to a breach of a duty imposed on the Employer by the Public Procurement Regulations 2003 (PPR). The complaint shall firstly be processed through an administrative review following the procedures set out in Regulation 51 of the PPR. The place and address for the first step in the submission of complaints to the Administrative Authority is provided in the TDS. If not satisfied with the outcome of the administrative review, the Tenderer may complain to the Review Panel pursuant to Regulation 53 of the PPR.
57.2
57.3
Section 2.
Tender Data Sheet
ITT Clause
Amendments of, and Supplements to, Clauses in the Instructions to Tenderers A. General
ITT 1.1
The Employer is Civil Aviation Authority of Bangladesh (CAAB), Head Office represented by General Manager, Establishment & Engineering Division, Civil Aviation Authority The Name of the Tender is: Coxs Bazar International Airport, Coxs Bazar. The number and identification of lots comprising the Tender are: Not Applicable
ITT 2.1
The source of public funds is CAAB and Government of Bangladesh
ITT 2.3
The name of the Development Partner is: Not applicable
ITT 4.1 ITT 5.1
Tenderers from the following countries are not eligible: Israel Materials, equipment and service from the following countries are not eligible: Israel
B. Tender Document ITT 7.2 The following are authorized agents of the Employer for the purpose of issuing the Tender Document: "None" For clarification of Tenders purposes only, the Employer's address is: Attention: Superintending Engineer (Civil) Address: Establishment & Engineering Division, CAAB Head Office, Kurmitola, Dhaka Telephone: 880-3-8652426-34/ext. 5603 Facsimile number: 888-2-652426 Electronic mail address: C. Evaluation and Qualification Criteria The work is to be completed within the stipulated time as mentioned in the IFT.
ITT 8.1
ITT 11.1
ITT 12.3(a)
The minimum period of general experience of the Tenderer in the building construction works shall be 5 (five) years. The required number of similar contracts completed shall be 1 over a period of last 5 years building works: civil and electrical tk. 350.00 (three hundred fifty) lakh in a single tender.
ITT 12.3(a)
ITT 12.3(b)
The Tenderer shall have a minimum average annual Construction turnover during last 5 (five) years amounting to Tk. 71.00 (seventy one) Lac. The bidder shall submit audit reports and a certificate from an audit firm clearly mentioning the amount of annual turnover in the last five years. The minimum tender capacity shall be : 250 (two hundred fifty) lakh [the following formulae may be used to calculate the tender capacity: Assessed tender capacity = (A x N x 1.5-B) Where A = maximum value of works performed in any one year during last five years N= completion time of the proposed work in years B= value of existing commitments and works to be completed during the next N years
ITT 13.1(a)
ITT 13.1(b)
The minimum amount of free funds (Liquid Assets) and/or credit facilities not of other contractual commitments of the successful Tenderer shall be Tk. 25 (twenty five) Lac.
ITT 14.1(a)
A construction project manager shall have the following qualifications and experience: the tender shall have proposed a construction project manager (site-in-charge), graduate engineer (civil) for the project, having 7 (seven) years experience in supervision of works including not less than 5 (five) years as manager.
ITT 14.1(b)
The maximum number of engineers with qualifications and experiences shall be as follow: a) Graduate civil engineer: A senior engineer having at least 5 years professional experience including experience in structural works. b) Diploma in civil engineering at least 01 (one) number having at least 7 years field experience in similar works. c) Diploma in electrical engineering at least 01 (one) number having at least 7 years field experience in similar works.
ITT 14.1(c)
Other key staff with qualifications and experience shall be as follows : Not applicable.
D. Preparation of Tender
ITT 19.1
The tender, as well as all correspondence and documents relating to the tender shall be in the English language. The tenderer shall submit with its tender the following additional documents : List of professional and technical personnel to be deployed in the project (form w-9 in section 5) Curriculum vitae (cv) of professional and technical personnel to b e deployed in the project ( form w-10 in section 5) Tenders submitted under joint-venture arrangement must accompany the joint venture. The joint venture agreement must contain the specific responsibilities and duties of the parties for execution of the work and also designate the person empowered by the parties to sign the tender on behalf of the joint venture. A resolution in this regard duly signed by the persons signing the joint- venture agreement shall have to be submitted along with the joint venture agreement. Tenders submitted by a JV shall comply with the requirements specified in Clause 28.4 (section 1). Valid and up to date trade license CB & A category contractor and supervisory license from electrical licensing board of the govt. Article of incorporation or registration of the firm Up to date tax clearance certificate VAT registration certificate Original letter naming the person authorized to sign on behalf of the tenderer. Certificate of satisfactory completion of building construction work of minimum value as specified in TDS Statement of annual average turnover for the last three years List of equipment owned CV of technical personnel Statement from the banker confirming liquid asset/credit limit
ITT 20.1(i)
ITT 22.1 ITT 22.3 ITT 23.5
Alternative tenders will not be permitted. There shall not be alternative times for completion of the works. The prices quoted by the tenderer shall be fixed for the duration of the contract.
ITT 23.6 & ITT 46.5
Tenders are being invited for an individual lot.
ITT 27.1
The required Technical Documents shall include the following additional information:
I. II. III.
Work plan/ program (form W-11 in section 5) Statement of work method/ methodology (form W-11 in section 5) Construction plant/ machinery and equipment to be used in the project (form W-12 in section 5) Technical specification and brochures of machinery/plant to be incorporated in the work
IV.
ITT 28.4
A tender submitted by a JVCA shall also comply with the following requirements: a) In case of a successful tender the form of agreement shall be signed so as to be legally binding on all partners.
b) The authorization of one partner being nominated as in charge shall be evidenced by submitting a power of attorney signed by legally authorized signatories of all the partners. c) A relevant statement to the effect that all the partners of the joint venture shall be liable jointly and severally for the execution of the contract, shall be included in the authorization mentioned under (b) above as well as in the form of tender and the form of agreement (in case of a successful tender).
d) A copy of the agreement entered into by the joint venture partners shall be submitted with the tender. ITT 30.1 The tender validity period shall be 120days. In exceptional circumstances, prior to expiry to the original tender validity period, the employer may request the tenderer for a specification extension in the period of validity. The request and the responses thereto shall be made in writing or by cable. A tenderer may refuse the request without forfeiting his tender security. a tenderer agreeing to the request will not be required nor permitted to modify his tender, but will be required to extend the validity of his tender security discharge and forfeiture of tender security shall continue to appy during the extended period of tender validity.
ITT 31.1
The amount of the tender security shall be tk 02,50,000 (Two lakh fifty thousand) in the form of bank draft or pay order from any scheduled bank or in the form of irrevocable bank guarantee issued from other than Publc Works Department (PWD) limited in favour of the executive engineer, Cox,s Bazar District Office will have to be enclosed with the ORIGINAL tender.
ITT 32.1
In addition to the original of the tender, One copy (to be copied by the tenderer form the original copy) shall be submitted.
E. Submission of Tender ITT 33.2(c) The inner and the outer envelops shall bear the following additional identification marks: Name of work: Coxs Bazar International Airport, Coxs Bazar
For Tender submission purposes only, the employers address is: Attention: General Manager Address: Establishment & Engineering Division, Civil Aviation Authority of Bangladesh, Head Office, Kurmitola, Dhaka. The deadline for the submission of the tender is: Time & date: As mentioned in the invitation for the tender (IFT) F. Opening and Evaluation of Tender
ITT 37.1
The Tender opening shall take place at: Address: TOC & TEC Room of Engineering Department of CAAB, Head Office Building (5th Floor), Kurmitola, Dhaka-1000. G. Award of Contract
ITT 53.1
The amount of Performance Security shall be 12% (twelve percent) of the Contract Price from any scheduled bank of Bangladesh. If the time for completion of the work is extended the validity of performance security is to be extended accordingly up to a date 28 days beyond the issuance The Contractor shall be required to execute 03 (three) copies of contract agreement in nonjudicial stamp of Tk. 150/- (Taka one hundred & fifty) each. The Adjudicator proposed by the Employer is General Manager, CAAB, Establishment & Engineering Division. The hourly fee shall be Tk. 2,500/- (Two thousand five hundred) only and the reimbursable expenses shall be limited to Tk.10,000/- (Taka Ten thousand) only.
ITT 53.2
ITT 54.2
ITT 56.1
ITT 56.2
In case of disagreement between the parties, the Appointing Authority for the Adjudicator is the President of the Institution of Engineers, Bangladesh. The name and address of the office where complaints to the Procuring Entity under Regulation 51 are to be submitted is: General Manager, Establishment & Engineering Division, Engineering Department, Civil Aviation Authority of Bangladesh, Head Office, Kurmitola, Dhaka.
ITT 57.2
Section 3. Project Brief

Project Brief Name of the Project: Museum of Human Hisotory Site: Agargaon Site Area: 6.7 acre
The Museum of Human HIstory is a museum demonstrating physical as well as civilizational Evolution of Human. The project aims to be a scientific demonstrative aid to those who study anthropology in Bangladesh. It also has a purpose to help general people understand the science of Evolution. The research facilites within will help the researchers in Bangladesh who work with the subject. There will be a museum with demonstrative exhibits of Human Evolution. Resource facilities like Library and research center and a congregation hall for exhibitions will also be provided. The Museum will work in collaboration with the Authorities of the Science Museum which stands just to the south of the site.
Section 4.
A. 1. General Definitions 1.1
General Conditions of Contract
The following words and expressions shall have the meaning hereby assigned to them. Boldface type is used to identify the defined terms: (a) The Adjudicator is the person appointed jointly by the Employer and the Contractor to resolve disputes in the first instance, as provided for in GCC Sub-Clause 82.2. Bill of Quantities means the priced and completed Bill of Quantities forming part of the Tender. Compensation Events are those defined in GCC Clause 64. Completion Certificate means the Certificate issued by the Engineer as evidence that the Contractor has executed the Works in all respects as per drawing, specifications and Conditions of Contract. The Completion Date is the date of completion of the Works as certified by the Engineer, in accordance with GCC Clause 74. ContractAgreement means the Agreement entered into between the Employer and the Contractor, together with the Contract Documents referred to therein, including all attachments, appendices, and all documents incorporated by reference therein to execute, complete, and maintain the Works. Contract Documents means the documents listed in GCC Clause 5, including any amendments thereto. Contractor means the natural person, private or government enterprise, or a combination of the above, whose Tender to carry out the Works has been accepted by the Employer and is named as such in the PCC and the Contract Agreement, and includes the legal successors or permitted assigns of the Contractor. Contract Price means the price payable to the Contractor as specified in the Contract Agreement, subject to such additions and adjustments thereto or deductions therefrom, for the execution, completion and maintenance of the Works in accordance with the provisions of the Contract. The Contractors Tender is the completed Tender Document including the priced offer submitted by the Contractor to the Employer. Day means calendar day. Day works are varied work inputs subject to payment on a time basis for the Contractors employees and Equipment, in addition to payments for associated Materials and Plant. A Defect is any part of the Works not completed in accordance with the Contract. The Defects Correction Certificate is the certificate issued by Engineer upon correction of defects by the Contractor. The Defects LiabilityPeriod is the period named in the PCC and calculated from the Completion Date. Drawings include calculations and other information provided in Section 9 or approved by the Engineer for the execution and completion of the
(b) (c) (d)
(e) (f)
(g) (h)
(i)
(j) (k) (l)
(m) (n) (o) (p)
Contract. (q) (r) The Employer is the party named in the PCC who employs the Contractor to carry out the Works. The Engineer is the person named in the PCC (or any other competent person appointed by the Employer and notified to the Contractor) who is responsible for supervising the execution and completion of the Works and administering the Contract. Equipment is the Contractors machinery and vehicles brought temporarily to the Site to construct the Works. GCC mean the General Conditions of Contract. Government means the Government of the Peoples Republic of Bangladesh. The Initial Contract Price is the Contract Price listed in the Employers Notification of Award. The Intended Completion Date is the date specified in the PCC on which the Contractor shall complete the Works and may be revised if extension of time or an acceleration order is issued by the Engineer. Materials are all supplies, including consumables, used by the Contractor for incorporation in the Works. Month means calendar month. Owner means Ministry of Public works Bangladesh. PCC means the Particular Conditions of Contract. Plant is any integral part of the Works that shall have a mechanical, electrical, chemical, or biological function.. The Site is the area defined as such in the PCC. Site Investigation Reports are those that were included in the Tender Document and are factual and interpretative reports about the surface and subsurface conditions at the Site. Specification means the Specification of the Works included in the Contract and any modification or addition made or approved by the Engineer. The Start Date is the date given in the PCC and it is the latest date when the Contractor shall commence execution of the Works. It does not necessarily coincide with any of the Site Possession Dates.
(s) (t) (u) (v) (w)
(x) (y) (z) (aa) (aa) (ab) (ac)
(ad)
(ae)
(af)
Subcontractor means any natural person, private or government entity, or a combination of the above, including its legal successors or permitted assigns, who has a Contract with the Contractor to carry out a part of the work in the Contract, which includes work on the Site. Temporary Works are works designed, constructed, installed, and removed by the Contractor that are needed for construction or installation of the Works. A Variation is an instruction given by the Engineer that varies the Works. The Works are what the Contract requires the Contractor to construct, install, and hand over to the Employer, as defined in the PCC. Writing means any hand-written, type-written, or printed communication including telex, cable and facsimile transmission.
(ag)
(ah) (ai) (aj)
2.
Contract Documents
2.1
Subject to the order of precedence set forth in GCC Sub-Clause 5.1, all documents forming the Contract (and all parts thereof) are intended to be correlative, complementary, and mutually explanatory. The Government requires that Employers, as well as Contractors shall observe the highest standard of ethics during the implementation of procurement proceedings and the execution of Contracts under public funds.
3.
Corrupt, Fraudulent, Collusive or Coercive Practices
3.1
3.2
In pursuance of this requirement, the Employer shall (a) (b) exclude the Contractor from participation in the procurement proceedings concerned or reject a proposal for award; and declare a Contractor ineligible, either indefinitely or for a stated period of time, from participation in procurement proceedings under public fund;
if it at any time determines that the Contractor has engaged in corrupt, fraudulent, collusive or coercive practices in competing for, or in executing, a Contract under public fund. 3.3 Should any corrupt, fraudulent, collusive or coercive practice of any kind referred to in GCC Sub-Clause 3.4 come to the knowledge of the Employer, it shall, in the first place, allow the Contractor to provide an explanation and shall, take actions as stated in GCC Sub-Clause 3.2 only when a satisfactory explanation is not received. Such exclusion and the reasons thereof, shall be recorded in the record of the procurement proceedings and promptly communicated to the Contractor concerned. Any communications between the Contractor and the Employer related to matters of alleged corrupt, fraudulent, collusive or coercive practices shall be in writing. The Government defines, for the purposes of this provision, the terms set forth below as follows: (a) corrupt practice means offering, giving, or promising to give, directly or indirectly, to any officer or employee of a Procuring Entity or other governmental/private authority or individual a gratuity in any form, an employment or any other thing or service of value, as an inducement with respect to an act or decision of, or method followed by, a Procuring Entity in connection with the procurement proceeding; fraudulent practice means a misrepresentation or omission of facts in order to influence a procurement proceedings or the execution of a Contract to the detriment of the Employer, collusive practice means a scheme or arrangement among two or more Tenderers with or without the knowledge of the Employer (prior to or after proposal submission) designed to establish Tender prices at artificial, non-competitive levels and to deprive the Employer of the benefits of free, open and genuine competition; and coercive practice means harming or threatening to harm, directly or indirectly, persons or their property to influence the procurement proceedings, or affect the execution of a Contract.
3.4
(b)
(c)
(d)
3.5
The Government requires that the Clients personnel have an equal obligation not to solicit, ask for and/or use coercive methods to obtain personal benefits in connection with the said proceedings. In interpreting the GCC, singular also means plural, male also means female or neuter, and the other way around. Headings in the GCC shall not be deemed part
4.
Interpretation
4.1
thereof or be taken into consideration in the interpretation or construance of the Contract. Words have their normal meaning under the language of the Contract unless specifically defined.
4.2
Entire Agreement (a) The Contract constitutes the entire agreement between the Employer and the Contractor and supersedes all communications, negotiations and agreements (whether written or oral) of parties with respect thereto made prior to the date of Contract Agreement.
4.3
Non-waiver
(a)
Subject to GCC Sub-Clause 4.3(b), no relaxation, forbearance, delay, or indulgence by either party in enforcing any of the terms and conditions of the Contract or the granting of time by either party to the other shall prejudice, affect, or restrict the rights of that party under the Contract, neither shall any waiver by either party of any breach of Contract operate as waiver of any subsequent or continuing breach of Contract. Any waiver of a partys rights, powers, or remedies under the Contract must be in writing, dated, and signed by an authorized representative of the party granting such waiver, and must specify the right and the extent to which it is being waived.
(b)
4.4
Severability (a) If any provision or condition of the Contract is prohibited or rendered invalid or unenforceable, such prohibition, invalidity or unenforceability shall not affect the validity or enforceability of any other provisions and conditions of the Contract.
4.5
Sectional completion (a) If sectional completion is specified in the PCC, references in the GCC to the Works, the Completion Date, and the Intended Completion Date apply to any section of the Works (other than references to the Completion Date and Intended Completion Date for the whole of the Works).
5.
Documents Forming the Contract and Priority of Documents
5.1
The following documents forming the Contract shall be interpreted in the following order of priority:
(a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) (h) (i)
the signed Contract Agreement; the letter of Notification of Award the completed Tender Submission Sheet as submitted by the Tenderer; the priced Bill of Quantities as submitted by the Tenderer; the Particular Conditions of Contract; the General Conditions of Contract; the General and Particular Specifications; the Drawings, and; any other document listed in the PCC as forming part of the Contract.
6.
Eligibility
6.1 6.2
The Contractor and its Sub-Contractors shall have the nationality of a country other than any specified in the PCC. All materials, equipment, plant, and supplies used by the Contractor in both permanent and temporary works and services supplied under the Contract shall
have their origin in the countries except any specified in the PCC. 7. Governing Language
7.1
The Contract as well as all correspondence and documents relating to the Contract exchanged by the Contractor and the Employer, shall be written in English unless otherwise stated in the PCC. Supporting documents and printed literature that are part of the Contract may be in another language, provided they are accompanied by an accurate translation of the relevant passages in English, in which case, for purposes of interpretation of the Contract, this translation shall govern. The Contractor shall bear all costs of translation to the governing language and all risks of the accuracy of such translation. The Contract shall be governed by and interpreted in accordance with the laws of the Peoples Republic of Bangladesh. No fees, gratuities, rebates, gifts, commissions or other payments, other than those shown in the Tender or the Contract, shall be given or received in connection with the procurement process or in the Contract execution. If the Contractor is a joint venture, consortium, or association, all of the parties shall be jointly and severally liable to the Employer for the fulfilment of the provisions of the Contract and shall designate one party to act as a leader with authority to bind the joint venture, consortium, or association. The composition or the constitution of the joint venture, consortium, or association shall not be altered without the prior consent of the Employer. The Employer and the Contractor shall keep confidential and shall not, without the written consent of the other party hereto, divulge to any third party any documents, data, or other information furnished directly or indirectly by the other party hereto in connection with the Contract, whether such information has been furnished prior to, during or following completion or termination of the Contract. Notwithstanding the above, the Contractor may furnish to its Sub-Contractor such documents, data, and other information it receives from the Employer to the extent required for the Sub-Contractor to perform its work under the Contract, in which event the Contractor shall obtain from such Sub-Contractor an undertaking of confidentiality similar to that imposed on the Contractor under GCC Clause 11. The Employer shall not use such documents, data, and other information received from the Contractor for any purposes unrelated to the Contract. Similarly, the Contractor shall not use such documents, data, and other information received from the Employer for any purpose other than the design, construction, or other work and services required for the performance of the Contract. The obligation of a party under GCC Sub-Clauses 11.1 and 11.2 above, however, shall not apply to information that: a) b) c) the Employer or Contractor needs to share with institutions participating in the financing of the Contract; now or hereafter enters the public domain through no fault of that party; can be proven to have been possessed by that party at the time of disclosure and which was not previously obtained, directly or indirectly, from the other party; or otherwise lawfully becomes available to that party from a third party that has no obligation of confidentiality.
7.2
8. Governing Law Gratuties / Agency fees
8.1 9.1
9.
10. Joint Venture, Consortium or Association (JVCA)
10.1
11. Confidential Information
11.1
11.2
11.3
d)
11.4
The above provisions of GCC Clause 11 shall not in any way modify any undertaking of confidentiality given by either of the parties hereto prior to the date of the Contract in respect of the Works or any part thereof.
11.5
12. Communication 12.1 s and Notices
The provisions of GCC Clause 11 shall survive completion or termination, for whatever reason. Communications between Parties (notice, request or consent required or permitted to be given or made by one party to the other) pursuant to the Contract shall be in writing to the address specified in the PCC. A notice shall be effective when delivered or on the notices effective date, whichever is later. A Party may change its address for notice hereunder by giving the other Party notice of such change to the address. The copyright in all drawings, documents, and other materials containing data and information furnished to the Employer by the Contractor herein shall remain vested in the Contractor, or, if they are furnished to the Employer directly or through the Contractor by any third party, including Suppliers of materials, the copyright in such materials shall remain vested in such third party. The Contractor shall not assign, in whole or in part, its obligations under the Contract, except with the Employers prior written consent. The Contractor shall obtain approval of the Employer in writing of all Sub-Contracts to be awarded under the Contract if not already specified in the Tender. SubContracting shall in no event relieve the Contractor from any of its obligations, duties, responsibilities, or liability under the Contract. Sub-Contractors shall comply with the provisions of GCC Clause 3. The Contractor shall cooperate and share the Site with other Contractors, public authorities, utilities, the Engineer and the Employer between the dates given in the Schedule of Other Contractors, as referred to in the PCC. The Contractor shall also provide facilities and services for them as described in the Schedule. The Employer may modify the Schedule of Other Contractors, and shall notify the Contractor of any such modification.
12.2 12.3
13. Copyright
13.1
14. Assignment
14.1 15.1
15. SubContracting
15.2
16. Other Contractors
16.1
17. Contractors 17.1 Responsibilities 18. Employers Responsibilities
The Contractor shall execute and complete the Works and remedy any defects therein in conformity in all respects with the provisions of the Contract Agreement. The Employer shall pay the Contractor, in consideration of the execution and completion of the Works and the remedying of defects therein, the Contract Price or such other sum as may become payable under the provisions of the Contract at the times and in the manner prescribed by the Contract Agreement. The Employer shall make its best effort to assist the Contractor in obtaining, if required, any permit, licence, and approvals from local public authorities. The Works to be executed, completed and maintained shall be as specified in the Bill of Quantities, the General and Particular Specifications and Drawings. Unless otherwise stipulated in the Contract, the Works shall include all such items not specifically mentioned in the Contract, but that can be reasonably inferred from the Contract as being required for completion of the Works as if such items were expressly mentioned in the Contract. The Contract Price shall be as specified in the Contract Agreement, subject to any additions and adjustments thereto, or deductions therefrom, as may be made pursuant
18.1
18.2
19. Scope of Works 19.1
19.2
20. Contract Price
20.1
to the Contract.
20.2
Unless otherwise stipulated in the Contract, the Works shall include all such items not specifically mentioned in the Contract but that can be reasonably inferred from the Contract as being required for completion of the Works as if such items were expressly mentioned in the Contract. Except where otherwise specifically stated in the PCC, the Engineer will decide Contractual matters between the Employer and the Contractor in its role as representative of the Employer. The Engineer will clarify queries on the Conditions of Contract.
21. Engineers Decisions
21.1
22. Queries about the Contract conditions 23. Delegation
22.1
23.1
The Engineer may delegate any of his duties and responsibilities to his representative except to the Adjudicator, after notifying the Contractor, and may cancel any delegation, without retroactivity, after notifying the Contractor. Any communications to the Contractor in accordance with such delegation shall have the same effect as if it was given by the Engineer.
23.2
24. Contractors Personnel
24.1
The Contractor shall employ the key personnel named in the Schedule of Key Personnel, as referred to in the PCC, to carry out the functions stated in the Schedule or other personnel approved by the Engineer. The Engineer will approve any proposed replacement of key personnel only if their relevant qualifications and abilities are substantially equal to or better than those of the personnel listed in the Schedule. If the Engineer asks the Contractor to remove a person who is a member of the Contractors staff or work force from the Site, he shall state the reasons, and the Contractor shall ensure that the person leaves the Site within three (3) days and has no further connection with the work in the Contract.
24.2
24.3
25. Approval of the Contractors Temporary Works
25.1
The Contractor shall submit Specifications and Drawings showing the proposed Temporary Works to the Engineer, who is to approve them, if they comply with the Specifications and Drawings. The Contractor shall be responsible for design of Temporary Works. All Drawings prepared by the Contractor for the execution of the temporary or permanent Works, are subject to prior approval by the Engineer before their use. The Engineers approval shall not alter the Contractors responsibility for design of the Temporary Works. The Contractor shall obtain approval of third parties to the design of the Temporary Works, where required The Contractor shall carry out all instructions of the Engineer that comply with the applicable laws where the Site is located. The Contractor, in preparing the Tender, shall rely on any Site Investigation Reports referred to in the PCC, supplemented by any information available to the Tenderer.
25.2 25.3
25.4
25.5
26. Instructions
26.1
27. Site Investigation Reports
27.1
28. Possession of the Site
28.1
The Employer shall give possession of the Site, or parts of the Site, to the Contractor on the date(s) stated in the PCC. If possession of a part is not given by the date stated in the PCC, the Employer will be deemed to have delayed the start of the relevant activities, and this will be a Compensation Event. The Contractor shall allow the Engineer and any person authorised by the Engineer access to the Site and to any place where work in connection with the Contract is being carried out or is intended to be carried out.
29. Access to the Site
29.1
30. Safety, Security and Protection of the Environment
30.1
The Contractor shall throughout the execution and completion of the Works and the remedying of any defects therein: (a) (b) have full regard for the safety of all persons entitled to be upon the Site and keep the Site and the Works in an orderly state; provide and maintain at the Contractors own cost all lights, guards, fencing, warning signs and watching for the protection of the Works or for the safety on-site, and take all reasonable steps to protect the environment on and off the Site and to avoid damage or nuisance to persons or to property of the public or others resulting from pollution, noise or other causes arising as a consequence of the Contractors methods of operation.
(c)
31. Discoveries
31.1
Anything of historical or other interest or of significant value unexpectedly discovered on the Site shall be the property of the Employer. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer of such discoveries and carry out the Engineers instructions for dealing with them. The Contractor shall provide proper accommodation to his labourers and arrange proper water supply, conservancy and sanitation arrangements at the site in accordance with relevant regulations, rules and orders of the government. The Contractor shall pay reasonable wages to his labourers, and pay them in time. In the event of delay in payment the Employer may effect payments to the labourers and recover the cost from the Contractor. The Contractor shall comply with the applicable minimum age labour laws and requirements of (including applicable treaties which have been ratified by) the Government of Bangladesh regarding hazardous forms of child labour. The Contractor shall not perform any work on the Site on the weekly rest day (Friday), or during the night, or on any religious or public holiday, without the prior written approval of the Engineer. The Employer carries the risks that the Contract states are Employe rs risks and the Contractor carries the risks that the Contract states are Contractors risks.
32. Welfare of Labour
32.1
32.2
33. Child Labour
33.1
34. No Night and Friday Work 35. Employers and Contractors Risks
34.1
35.1
36. Employers Risks
36.1
From the Start Date until the Defects Correction Certificate has been issued, the following are Employers risks: (a) the risk of personal injury, death, or loss of or damage to property (excluding the Works, Plant, Materials, and Equipment), which are due to use or occupation of the Site by the Works or for the purpose of the Works, which is the unavoidable result of the Works or negligence, breach of statutory duty, or interference with any legal right by the Employer or by any person employed by or Contracted to him except the Contractor. the risk of damage to the Works, Plant, Materials, and Equipment to the extent that it is due to a fault of the Employer or in the Employers design, or due to war or radioactive contamination directly affecting the country where the Works are to be executed.
(i) (ii)
(b)
36.2
From the Completion Date until the Defects Correction Certificate has been issued, the risk of loss of or damage to the Works, Plant, and Materials is an Employers risk, except loss or damage due to: (a) (b) (c) a Defect which existed on the Completion Date; an event occurring before the Completion Date, which was not itself an Employers risk; or the activities of the Contractor on the Site after the Completion Date.
37. Contractors Risks
37.1
From the Start Date until the Defects Correction Certificate has been issued, the risks of personal injury, death, and loss of or damage to property (including, without limitation, the Works, Plant, Materials, and Equipment) which are not Employers risks are Contractors risks.
38. Insurance
38.1
The Contractor shall provide, in the joint names of the Employer and the Contractor, insurance cover from the Start Date to the end of the Defects Liability Period, in the amounts and deductibles stated in the PCC for the following events which are due to the Contractors risks: (a) (b) (c) (d) loss of or damage to the Works, Plant, and Materials; loss of or damage to Equipment; loss of or damage to property (except the Works, Plant, Materials, and Equipment) in connection with the Contract; and personal injury or death.
38.2
The Contractor shall deliver policies and certificates of insurance to the Engineer, for the Engineers approval, before the Start Date. All such insurances shall provide for compensation to be payable in the types and proportions of currencies required to rectify the loss or damage incurred. If the Contractor does not provide any of the policies and certificates required, the Employer may effect the insurance which the Contractor should have provided and recover the premiums the Employer has paid from payments otherwise due to the Contractor or, if no payment is due, the payment of the premiums shall be a debt due.
38.3
38.4 38.5
39. Taxes and Duties 40. Limitation of Liability
Alterations to the terms of insurance shall not be made without the approval of the Engineer. Both parties shall comply with conditions of the insurance policies. The Contractor shall be entirely responsible for all taxes, duties, license fees, and other such levies imposed outside and inside Bangladesh. Except in cases of criminal negligence or wilful misconduct: (a) the Contractor shall not be liable to the Employer, whether in Contract, tort, or otherwise, for any indirect or consequential loss or damage, loss of use, loss of production, or loss of profits or interest costs, provided that this exclusion shall not apply to any obligation of the Contractor to pay liquidated damages to the Employer and the aggregate liability of the Contractor to the Employer, whether under the Contract, in tort or otherwise, shall not exceed the total Contract Price, provided that this limitation shall not apply to the cost of repairing or replacing defective Works, or to any obligation of the Contractor to indemnify the Employer with respect to patent infringement
39.1 40.1
(b)
41. Force Majeure
41.1
The Contractor shall not be liable for forfeiture of its Performance Security, liquidated damages, or termination for default if and to the extent that its delay in performance or other failure to perform its obligations under the Contract is the result of an event of Force Majeure. For purposes of this Clause, Force Majeure means an event or situation beyond the control of the Contractor that is not foreseeable, is unavoidable, and its origin is not due to negligence or lack of care on the part of the Contractor. Such events may include, but not be limited to, acts of the Employer in its sovereign capacity, wars or revolutions, fires, floods, epidemics, quarantine restrictions, and freight embargoes. If a Force Majeure situation arises, the Contractor shall promptly notify the Employer in writing of such condition and the cause thereof. Unless otherwise directed by the Employer in writing, the Contractor shall continue to perform its obligations under the Contract as far as is reasonably practical, and shall seek all reasonable alternative means for performance not prevented by the Force Majeure event.
41.2
41.3
B. 42.
Time Control The Works to Be Completed by the Intended Completion Date Programme of Works
42.1
The Contractor may commence execution of the Works on the Start Date and shall carry out the Works in accordance with the Programme submitted by the Contractor, as updated with the approval of the Engineer, and complete them by the Intended Completion Date.
43.
43.1
Within the time stated in the PCC, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval a Programme showing the general methods, arrangements, order, and timing for all the activities in the Works. The programme may be in the form of an Implementation Schedule prepared in Microsoft Project or in any other software programme acceptable by the Employer.
43.2
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval an updated Programme at intervals no longer than the period stated in the PCC. An update of the Programme shall be a Programme showing the actual progress achieved on each activity and the effect of the progress achieved on the timing of the remaining work, including any changes to the sequence of the activities. If the Contractor does not submit an updated Programme at the intervals stated in the PCC, the Engineer may withhold an amount as stated in the PCC from the next payment certificate and continue to withhold this amount until the next due payment after the date on which the overdue Programme has been submitted. The Engineers approval of the Programme shall not alter the Contractors obligations. The Contractor may revise the Programme and submit it to the Engineer again at any time. A revised Programme shall show the effect of Variations and Compensation Events. The Contractor shall maintain Pro Rata progress of the works. Progress to be achieved shall be pursuant to GCC Sub- Clause 43.1 and shall be determined in terms of the value of the works done If at any time during performance of the Contract, the Contractor or its Subcontractors should encounter events, circumstances conditions that may adversely affect the quality of the work, increase the Contract Price or delay the execution of the Works, the Contractor shall promptly notify the Engineer in writing of the delay, its likely duration, and its cause. As soon as practicable after receipt of the Contractors notice, the Engineer shall evaluate the situation, and the Contractor shall cooperate with the Engineer in making and considering proposals for how the effect of such an event or circumstance can be avoided or reduced. The Engineer may require the Contractor to provide an estimate of the expected effect of the future event or circumstance on the Contract Price and Completion Date. The Contractor shall provide the estimate as soon as reasonably possible. The Engineer shall extend the Intended Completion Date if a Compensation Event occurs or a Variation is issued which makes it impossible for Completion to be achieved by the Intended Completion Date without the Contractor taking steps to accelerate the remaining work, which would cause the Contractor to incur additional cost. The Engineer shall notify the Contractor accordingly, with a copy of the Employer. The Engineer shall decide whether and by how much to extend the Intended Completion Date within twenty-one (21) days of the Contractor asking the Engineer for a decision upon the effect of a Compensation Event or Variation and submitting full supporting information. If the Contractor has failed to give early warning of a delay or has failed to cooperate in dealing with a delay, the delay by this failure shall not be considered in assessing the new Intended Completion Date. Except in case of Force Majeure, as provided under GCC Clause 41, a delay by the Contractor in the performance of its Completion obligations shall render the Contractor liable to the imposition of liquidated damages pursuant to GCC Clause 68, unless an extension of time is agreed upon, pursuant to GCC SubClause 46.2. If the Contractor fails to complete the Works by the Intended Completion Date, as extended by the Engineer as the case may be, the Contractor shall be liable to pay liquidated damages to the Employer, in accordance with GCC, Sub-Clause 68.1.
43.3
43.4
44.
Pro Rata Progress
44.1
45.
Early Warning
45.1
46.
Extension of the Intended Completion Date
46.1
46.2
46.3
46.4
47.
Acceleration
47.1
When the Employer wants the Contractor to finish before the Intended Completion Date, the Engineer will obtain priced proposals for achieving the necessary acceleration from the Contractor. If the Employer accepts these proposals, the Intended Completion Date will be adjusted accordingly and confirmed by both the Employer and the Contractor. If the Employer accepts the Contractors priced proposals for acceleration, they are incorporated in the Contract Price and treated as a Variation. The Engineer may instruct the Contractor to delay the start or progress of any activity within the Works.
47.2
48. Delays 48.1 Ordered by the Engineer Management Meetings
49.
49.1
Either the Engineer or the Contractor may require the other to attend a management meeting. The business of a management meeting shall be to review the plans for remaining work and to deal with matters raised in accordance with the early warning procedure. The Engineer shall record the business of management meetings and provide copies of the record to those attending the meeting and to the Employer. The responsibility of the parties for actions to be taken shall be decided by the Engineer either at the management meeting or after the management meeting and stated in writing to all who attended the meeting.
49.2
C. 50.
Quality Control Contractor to Construct the Works 50.1 The Contractor shall construct and install the Works in accordance with the Specifications and Drawings as scheduled in GCC Sub-Clause 5.1.
51.
Works open to 51.1 Inspection
All works under the Contract shall at all times be open to inspection and supervision of the Engineer, and the Contractor shall ensure presence of its representatives at such inspections provided proper advance notice is given by the Engineer. The Engineer shall check the Contractors work and notify the Contractor of any Defects that are found. Such checking shall not affect the Contractors responsibilities. The Engineer may instruct the Contractor to search for a Defect and to uncover and test any work that the Engineer considers may have a Defect. If the Engineer instructs the Contractor to carry out a test not specified in the Specification to check whether any work has a Defect and the test shows that it does, the Contractor shall pay for the test and any samples. If there is no Defect, the test shall be a Compensation Event. No part of the Works shall be covered up or put out of view without the approval of the Engineer. The Contractor shall give notice in writing to the Engineer whenever any such part of the Works is ready for examination and the Engineer shall attend to such examination without unreasonable delay. The Engineer shall give notice to the Contractor, with a copy to the Employer, of any Defects before the end of the Defects Liability Period, which begins at Completion, and is defined in the PCC. The Defects Liability Period shall be extended for as long as Defects remain to be corrected. Every time notice of a Defect is given, the Contractor shall correct the notified Defect within the length of time specified by the Engineers notice. If the Contractor has not corrected a Defect within the time specified in the
52.
Identifying Defects
52.1
53.
Tests
53.1
54.
Examination of 54.1 Work before covering up
55.
Correction of Defects
55.1
55.2
56.
Uncorrected
56.1
Defects
Engineers notice, the Engineer will assess the cost of having the Defect corrected, and the Contractor will pay this amount.
D. 57.
Cost Control Bill of Quantities 57.1 The Bill of Quantities shall contain items for the construction, installation, testing, and commissioning work to be done by the Contractor. The Bill of Quantities is used to calculate the Contract Price. The Contractor is paid for the quantity of the work done at the rate in the Bill of Quantities for each item. If the final quantity of the work done differs from the quantity in the Bill of Quantities for the particular item by more than twenty-five percent (25%), provided the change exceeds one percent (1%) of the Initial Contract Price, the Engineer shall adjust the rate to allow for the change. The Engineer shall not adjust rates from changes in quantities if thereby the Initial Contract Price is exceeded by more than fifteen percent (15%), except with the prior approval of the Employer. If requested by the Engineer, the Contractor shall provide the Engineer with a detailed cost breakdown of any rate in the Bill of Quantities. All Variations shall be included in updated Programmes produced by the Contractor. The Contractor shall provide the Engineer with a quotation for carrying out the Variation when requested to do so by the Engineer. The Engineer shall assess the quotation, which shall be given within seven days of the request or within any longer period stated by the Engineer and before the Variation is ordered. If the work in the Variation corresponds with an item description in the Bill of Quantities and if, in the opinion of the Engineer, the quantity of work above the limit stated in GCC Sub-Clause 58.1 or the timing of its execution do not cause the cost per unit of quantity to change, the rate in the Bill of Quantities shall be used to calculate the value of the Variation. If the cost per unit of quantity changes, or if the nature or timing of the work in the Variation does not correspond with items in the Bill of Quantities, the quotation by the Contractor shall be in the form of new rates for the relevant items of work. If the Contractors quotation is found to be unreasonable, the Engineer may order the Variation and make a change to the Contract Price, which shall be based on the Engineers own forecast of the effects of the Variation on the Contractors costs. If the Engineer decides that the urgency of varying the work would prevent a quotation being given and considered without delaying the work, no quotation shall be given and the Variation shall be treated as a Compensation Event. The Contractor shall not be entitled to additional payment for costs that could have been avoided by giving early warning. When the Programme is updated, the Contractor shall provide the Engineer with an updated cash flow forecast. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer monthly statements of the estimated value of the work executed less the cumulative amount certified previously.
57.2
58.
Changes in the Quantities
58.1
58.2
58.3
59.
Variations
59.1
60.
Payments for Variations
60.1
60.2
60.3
60.4
60.5
61.
Cash Flow Forecasts Payment Certificates
61.1
62.
62.1
62.2
The Engineer shall check the Contractors monthly statement and certify the amount to be paid to the Contractor. The value of work executed shall be determined by the Engineer. The value of work executed shall comprise the value of the quantities of the items in the Bill of Quantities completed. The value of work executed shall include the valuation of Variations, Certified Dayworks and Compensation Events. The Engineer may exclude any item certified in a previous certificate or reduce the proportion of any item previously certified in any certificate in the light of later information. Payments shall be adjusted for deductions for advance payments and retention. The Employer shall pay the Contractor the amounts certified by the Engineer within twenty-eight (28) days of the date of each certificate. If the Employer makes a late payment, the Contractor shall be paid interest on the late payment in the next payment. Interest shall be calculated from the date by which the payment should have been made up to the date when the late payment is made at the prevailing rate of interest for commercial borrowing established in Bangladesh. If an amount certified is increased in a later certificate or as a result of an award by the Adjudicator, or an Arbitrator, the Contractor shall be paid interest upon the delayed payment as set out in this clause. Interest shall be calculated from the date upon which the increased amount would have been certified in the absence of dispute. Items of the Works for which no rate or price has been entered in will not be paid for by the Employer and shall be deemed covered by other rates and prices in the Contract.
62.3 62.4
62.5
62.6
63.
Payments
63.1
63.2
63.3
64.
Compensation Events
64.1
The following shall be Compensation Events:
(a) (b) (c)
The Employer does not give access to the Site or part of the Site by the Site Possession Date stated in the PCC. The Employer modifies the Schedule of Other Contractors in a way that affects the work of the Contractor under the Contract. The Engineer orders a delay or does not issue Drawings, Specifications, or instructions required for execution of the Works on time. The Engineer instructs the Contractor to uncover or to carry out additional tests upon work, which is then found to have no Defects. The Engineer unreasonably does not approve a subcontract to be let. Ground conditions are substantially more adverse than could reasonably have been assumed before issuance of the Letter of Acceptance from the information issued to Tenderers (including the Site Investigation Reports), from information available publicly and from a visual inspection of the Site. The Engineer gives an instruction for dealing with an unforeseen condition, caused by the Employer, or additional work required for safety or other reasons. Other Contractors, public authorities, utilities, or the Employer do not work within the dates and other constraints stated in the Contract, and they cause delay or extra cost to the Contractor. The advance payment is delayed. The effects on the Contractor of any of the Employers Risks. The Engineer unreasonably delays issuing a Certificate of Completion. A situation of Force Majeure has occurred, as defined in GCC Clause 41; Other Compensation Events described in the Contract or determined by the Engineer shall apply.
(d) (e) (f)
(g)
(h)
(i) (j) (k) (l) (m)

64.2
If a Compensation Event would cause additional cost or would prevent the work being completed before the Intended Completion Date, the Contract Price shall be increased and/or the Intended Completion Date shall be extended. The Engineer shall decide whether and by how much the Contract Price shall be increased and whether and by how much the Intended Completion Date shall be extended.
64.3
As soon as the Contractor has provided information demonstrating the effect of each Compensation Event upon the Contractors forecast cost, the Engineer shall assess it, and the Contract Price shall be adjusted accordingly. If the Contractors forecast is deemed unreasonable, the Engineer shall adjust the Contract Price based on the Engineers own forecast. The Engineer will assume that the Contractor will react competently and promptly to the event. The Contractor shall not be entitled to compensation to the extent that the Employers interests are adversely affected by the Contractor not having given early warning or not having cooperated with the Engineer.
64.4
65.
Change in Laws and Regulations
65.1
Unless otherwise specified in the Contract, if between the date twenty-eight (28) days before the submission of Tenders for the Contract and the date of the last Completion certificate, any law, regulation, ordinance, order or bylaw having the force of law is enacted, promulgated, abrogated, or changed in Bangladesh (which shall be deemed to include any change in interpretation or application by the competent authorities) that subsequently affects the Completion Date and/or the Contract Price, then such Completion Date and/or Contract Price shall be correspondingly increased or decreased, to the extent that the Contractor has thereby been affected in the performance of any of its obligations under the Contract. The Engineer shall adjust the Contract Price on the basis of the change in the amount of taxes, duties, and other levies payable by the Contractor, provided such changes have not already been accounted for in the price adjustment as defined in GCC Clause 66 and/or reflected in the Contract Price. Prices shall be adjusted for fluctuations in the cost of inputs only if provided for in the PCC. If so provided, the amounts as certified in each payment certificate, before deducting for Advance Payment, shall be adjusted by applying the respective price adjustment factor to the payment amount. The formula indicated below applies: P= A + B (Im/Io) where: P is the adjustment factor A and B are coefficients specified in the PCC, representing the nonadjustable and adjustable portions, respectively, of the Contract; and Im is the index prevailing at the end of the month being invoiced and Io is the index prevailing twenty-eight (28) days before Tender opening. The index to be used is as published by the Bangladesh Bureau of Standards on a month basis.
65.2
66.
Price Adjustment
66.1
66.2
If the value of the index is changed after it has been used in a calculation, the calculation shall be corrected and an adjustment made in the next payment certificate. The index value shall be deemed to take account of all changes in cost due to fluctuations in costs. The Employer shall retain from each payment due to the Contractor the proportion stated in the PCC until completion of the whole of the Works. On completion of the whole of the Works, half the total amount retained shall be repaid to the Contractor, the remaining half when the Defects Liability Period has passed and the Engineer has certified that all Defects notified by the Engineer to the Contractor before the end of this period have been corrected. On completion of the whole of the Works, the Contractor may substitute retention money with an unconditional Bank Guarantee. The Contractor shall pay liquidated damages to the Employer at the rate per day stated in the PCC for each day that the Completion Date is later than the Intended Completion Date for the works or for any part thereof. In respect of the value of the delayed works the total amount of liquidated damages shall not exceed the amount defined in the PCC. The Employer may deduct liquidated damages from payments due to the Contractor. Payment of liquidated damages shall not affect the Contractors liabilities.
67.
Retention
67.1
67.2
67.3
68.
Liquidated Damages
68.1
68.2
If the Intended Completion Date is extended after liquidated damages have been paid, the Engineer shall correct any overpayment of liquidated damages by the Contractor by adjusting the next payment certificate. The Contractor shall be paid interest on the overpayment, calculated from the date of payment to the date of repayment, at the rates specified in GCC Sub-Clause 63.1. The Contractor shall be paid a Bonus calculated at the rate per calendar day if stated in the PCC for each day (less any days for which the Contractor is paid for acceleration) that the Completion is earlier than the Intended Completion Date. The Engineer shall certify that the Works are complete, although they may not be due to be complete. If so specified in the PCC, the Employer shall make advance payment to the Contractor in the amounts and by the dates stated in the PCC against provision by the Contractor of an Unconditional Bank Guarantee in a form and by a bank acceptable to the Employer in an amount equal to the advance payment. The Guarantee shall remain effective until the advance payment has been repaid, but the amount of the Guarantee shall be progressively reduced by the amounts repaid by the Contractor. Interest will not be charged on the advance payment. The Contractor is to use the advance payment only to pay for Equipment, Plant, Materials, and mobilization expenses required specifically for execution of the Contract. The Contractor shall demonstrate that advance payment has been used in this way by supplying copies of invoices or other documents to the Engineer. The advance payment shall be repaid by deducting proportionate amounts from payments otherwise due to the Contractor, following the schedule of completed percentages of the Works on a payment basis. No account shall be taken of the advance payment or its repayment in assessing valuations of work done, Variations, price adjustments, Compensation Events, Bonuses, or Liquidated Damages. The Employer shall notify the Contractor of any claim made against the Bank issuing the Performance Security. The Employer may claim against the security if any of the following events occurs for fourteen (14) days or more.
69.
Bonus
69.1
70.
Advance Payment
70.1
70.2
70.3
71.
Performance Security
71.1
71.2
(a) (b) 71.3
The Contractor is in breach of the Contract and the Employer has notified him that he is; and The Contractor has not paid an amount due to the Employer.
In the event the Contractor is liable to pay compensation under the Contract amounting to the full value of the Performance Security or more, the Employer may forfeit the full amount of the Performance Security. If there is no reason to call the Performance Security, the Performance Security shall be discharged by the Employer and returned to the Contractor not later than twenty-eight (28) days following the date of issuance of certificate of Completion of Works by the Engineer If applicable, the Dayworks rates in the Contractors Tender shall be used for small additional amounts of work only when the Engineer has given written instructions in advance for additional work to be paid for in that way. All work to be paid for as Dayworks shall be recorded by the Contractor on forms approved by the Engineer. Each completed form shall be verified and signed by the Engineer within two (2) days of the work being done.
71.4
72.
Day works
72.1
72.2
72.3
The Contractor shall be paid for Dayworks subject to obtaining signed Dayworks forms Loss or damage to the Works or Materials to be incorporated in the Works between the Start Date and the end of the Defects Correction periods shall be remedied by the Contractor at the Contractors cost if the loss or damage arises from the Contractors acts or omissions.
73.
Cost of Repairs 73.1
E. 74.
Completion of the Contract Completion 74.1 The Contractor shall request the Engineer to issue a certificate of Completion of the Works, and the Engineer will do so upon deciding that the work is completed. The Employer shall take over the Site and the Works within seven (7) days of the Engineer issuing a Certificate of Completion. The Contractor shall supply the Engineer with a detailed account of the total amount that the Contractor considers payable under the Contract before the end of the Defects Liability Period. The Engineer shall issue a Defects Correction Certificate and certify any final payment that is due to the Contractor within fifty-six (56) days of receiving the Contractors account if it is correct and complete. If it is not, the Engineer shall issue within fifty-six (56) days a schedule that states the scope of the corrections or additions that are necessary. If the Final Account is still unsatisfactory after it has been resubmitted, the Engineer shall decide on the amount payable to the Contractor and issue a payment certificate. If As Built Drawings and/or operating and maintenance manuals are required, the Contractor shall supply them by the dates stated in the PCC. If the Contractor does not supply the Drawings and/or manuals by the dates stated in the PCC, or they do not receive the Engineers approval, the Engineer shall withhold the amount stated in the PCC from payments due to the Contractor.
75.
Taking Over
75.1
76.
Final Account
76.1
77.
As-built Drawings and Manuals
77.1
77.2
F. 78.
Termination and Settlement of Disputes Termination
78.1
Termination for Default
(a)
The Employer or the Contractor, without prejudice to any other remedy for breach of Contract, by giving twenty eight (28) days written notice of default to the other party, may terminate the Contract in whole or in part if the other party causes a fundamental breach of Contract Fundamental breaches of the Contract shall include, but shall not be limited to, the following: the Contractor stops work for twenty-eight (28) days when no stoppage of work is shown on the current Programme and the stoppage has not been authorized by the Engineer; the Engineer instructs the Contractor to delay the progress of the Works, and the instruction is not withdrawn within twenty-eight (28) days;
(b)
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
the Engineer gives Notice that failure to correct a particular Defect is a fundamental breach of Contract and the Contractor fails to correct it within a reasonable period of time determined by the Engineer; the Contractor does not maintain a Security, which is required; the Contractor has delayed the completion of the Works by the number of days for which the maximum amount of liquidated damages can be paid, as defined in the PCC; the Contractor, in the judgment of the Employer has engaged in corrupt or fraudulent practices, as defined in GCC Clause 3, in competing for or in executing the Contract.
(iv) (v)
(vi)
78.2 78.3
A payment certified by the Engineer is not paid by the Employer to the Contractor within eighty-four (84) days of the date of the Engineers certificate; Termination for Insolvency. (a) The Employer and the Contractor may at any time terminate the Contract by giving notice to the other party if either of the party becomes bankrupt or otherwise insolvent. In such event, termination will be without compensation to any party, provided that such termination will not prejudice or affect any right of action or remedy that has accrued or will accrue thereafter to the other party.
78.4
Termination for Convenience. (a) The Employer, by notice sent to the Contractor, may terminate the Contract, in whole or in part, at any time for its convenience. The notice of termination shall specify that termination is for the Employers convenience, the extent to which performance of the Contractor under the Contract is terminated, and the date upon which such termination becomes effective.
78.5
In the event the Employer terminates the Contract in whole or in part, the Employer shall accept the portion of the Works that are complete and ready for handing over after the Contractors receipt of notice of termination at the Contract. For the remaining portion of the Works, the Employer may elect: (a) (b) to have any portion completed by the Contractor at the Contract terms and prices; and /or to cancel the remainder and pay to the Contractor an agreed amount for partially completed Works and for materials and parts previously procured by the Contractor, or except in the case of termination for convenience as defined in GCC Sub-Clause 78.4, engage another Contractor to complete the Works, and in that case the Contractor shall be liable to the Employer for any cost that may be incurred in excess of the sum that would have been paid to the Contractor, if the work would have been executed and completed by him.
(c)
If the Contract is terminated, the Contractor shall stop work immediately, make the Site safe and secure, and leave the Site as soon as is reasonably possible. 79. Payment upon Termination 79.1 If the Contract is terminated because of a fundamental breach of Contract by the Contractor, the Engineer shall issue a certificate for the value of the work done and Plant and Materials ordered less advance payments received up to the date of the issue of the certificate and less the percentage to apply to the value of the work not completed, as indicated in the PCC. Additional Liquidated Damages shall not apply. If the total amount due to the Employer exceeds any payment due to the Contractor, the difference shall be a debt payable to the Employer.
79.2
If the Contract is terminated for the Employers convenience or because of a fundamental breach of Contract by the Employer, the Engineer shall issue a certificate for the value of the work done, Materials ordered, the reasonable cost of removal of Equipment, repatriation of the Contractors foreign personnel employed solely on the Works and recruited specifically for the Works, and the Contractors costs of protecting and securing the Works, and less advance payments received up to the date of the certificate. All Materials on the Site, Plant, Equipment, Temporary Works, and Works shall be deemed to be the property of the Employer if the Contract is terminated because of the Contractors default. If the Contract is frustrated by the occurrence of a situation of Force Majeure as defined in GCC Clause 41, the Engineer shall certify that the Contract has been frustrated. The Contractor shall make the Site safe and stop work as quickly as possible after receiving this certificate and shall be paid for all work carried out before receiving it and for any work carried out afterwards to which a commitment was made
80.
Property
80.1
81.
Frustration
81.1
82.
Settlement of Disputes
82.1
Amicable Settlement (a) The Employer and the Contractor shall use their best efforts to settle amicably all disputes arising out of or in connection with this Contract or its interpretation.
82.2
Adjudication (a) If the Contractor believes that a decision taken by the Engineer was either outside the authority given to the Engineer by the Contract or that the decision was wrongly taken, the decision shall be refereed to the Adjudicator within fourteen (14) days of notification of the Engineers decision in writing. The Adjudicator named in the PCC is jointly appointed by the parties. In case of disagreement between the parties, the Appointing Authority designated in the PCC shall appoint the Adjudicator within fourteen (14) days of receipt of a request from either party. The Adjudicator shall give its decision in writing to both parties within twenty-eight (28) days of a dispute being referred to it. The Contractor shall make all payments (fees and reimbursable expenses) to the Adjudicator, and the Employer shall reimburse half of these fees through the regular progress payments. Should the Adjudicator resign or die, or should the Employer and the Contractor agree that the Adjudicator is not functioning in accordance with the provisions of the Contract; a new Adjudicator will be jointly appointed by the Employer and the Contractor. In case of disagreement between the Employer and the Contractor the Adjudicator shall be designated by the Appointing Authority designated in the PCC at the request of either party, within fourteen (14) days of receipt of a request from either party.
(b)
(c) (d)
(e)
82.3
Adjudication (a) If the Contractor believes that a decision taken by the Engineer was either outside the authority given to the Engineer by the Contract or that the decision was wrongly taken, the decision shall be refereed to the Adjudicator within fourteen (14) days of notification of the Engineers decision in writing. The Adjudicator named in the PCC is jointly appointed by the parties. In case of disagreement between the parties, the Appointing Authority designated in the PCC shall appoint the Adjudicator within fourteen (14) days of receipt of a request from either party. The Adjudicator shall give its decision in writing to both parties within twenty-eight (28) days of a dispute being referred to it. The Contractor shall make all payments (fees and reimbursable expenses) to the Adjudicator, and the Employer shall reimburse half of these fees through the regular progress payments. Should the Adjudicator resign or die, or should the Employer and the Contractor agree that the Adjudicator is not functioning in accordance with the provisions of the Contract; a new Adjudicator will be jointly appointed by the Employer and the Contractor. In case of disagreement between the Employer and the Contractor the Adjudicator shall be designated by the Appointing Authority designated in the PCC at the request of either party, within fourteen (14) days of receipt of a request from either party.
(b)
(c) (d)
(e)
82.4
Arbitration (a) If the Parties are unable to reach a settlement as per GCC Clause 82.1(a) within twenty-eight (28) days of the first written correspondence on the matter of disagreement, then either Party may give notice to the other party of its intention to commence arbitration in accordance with GCC Sub-Clause 82.3(b). The arbitration shall be conducted in accordance with the Arbitration Act (Act No 1 of 2001) of Bangladesh as at present in force and in the place shown in the PCC.
(b)
Section 5.
Particular Conditions of Contract
Instructions for completing the Particular Conditions of Contract are provided, as needed, in the notes in italic mentioned for the relevant GCC Clauses. GCC Clause Amendments of, and Supplements to, Clauses in the General Conditions of Contract
GCC 1.1 (h)
The Contractor is [Name, address and name of authorized representative] (to be filled up by the Tenderer) Name Address . . Authorized representative
GCC 1.1 (q)
The Employer is Civil Aviation Authority of Bangladesh (CAAB), Head Office represented by General Manager, Establishment & Engineering Division, Civil Aviation A uthority
GCC 1.1 (r)
The Engineer is Executive Engineer (civil), Construction & Maintenance Management Unit (CMMU), Civil Aviation Authority of Bangladesh (CAAB)
GCC 1.1 (w)
The Intended Completion Date for the whole of the Works shall be 720 (seven hundred twenty) days reckoned from the date of the commencement of the work.
GCC 1.1 (ab) GCC 1.1 (ae)
The Site is located at Coxs Bazar as noted in the Tender Notice The Start Date shall be on or before the 7 th day of giving the site possession to the contractor. The Works consist of Construction of Coxs Bazar International Airport , Internal Electrical and Plumbing work, Land Development, Furniture work and Other related works if any: As per order of Employer.
GCC 1.1 (ai)
GCC 4.5 (a)
The Sectional Completion Dates are : Not Applicable
GCC 5.1 (i)
The following documents also form part of the Contract: a) GCC 24.1 : b) GCC 27.1 : c) ITT 15.1 : : The Schedule of Key Personnel Site Investigation Reports List of Equipment The Approach and Methodology of the Works Work Programme
d) ITT 27.1 e)
GCC 43.1 :
GCC 6.1
Contractors that are a national of, or registered in, the following countries are not eligible: Israel
GCC 6.2
Materials/equipment/plant shall not be supplied from the following country of origin: Israel The Employers address for the purpose of communications under this Contract is : Office of the Chief Engineer, Construction & Maintenance Management Unit (CMMU), Civil Aviation Authority of Bangladesh (CAAB), Kurmitola, Dhaka
GCC 12.1
GCC 16.1 GCC 21.1
Schedule for Other Contractors : Not Applicable The Engineer shall obtain specific approval of the Employer before taking any of the following actions: (a) Consenting to the subcontracting of any part of the Works under the GCC Clause 15;
(b) Certifying additional cost determined under GCC Clause 66; (c) Determining an extension of time under GCC Clause 46;
(d) Issuing a variation under GCC Clause 60, except in an emergency situation, as reasonably determined by the Engineer; (e) Fixing rates or prices under GCC Clause 63.
GCC 24.1
The Schedule of Key Personnel a) b) c) Graduate of Civil Engineer Diploma in Civil Engineering Diploma in Electrical Engineering (Qualifications of the Personnel are specified in ITT 14.1 Section 2)
GCC 27.1
Site Investigation Reports 1) Report on Geotechnical Investigations on Sub-Soils fo construction of Coxs Bazar International Airport
GCC 28.1
The Site Possession Date shall be within 30 (thirty) days after signing of Contract. There may be delay for some valid reason in giving Possession of the site to the Contractor.
GCC 38.1
The minimum insurance cover for relevant item shall be a) b) c) d) The cover for insurance of the Works, Plant and Materials is the Initial Contract Amount plus 10 (ten percent). The cover for Contractors Equipment is the full replacement cost The cover for insurance of Third Party injury to persons or death, and damage to property is Tk. 10.00 (ten) lakh. The cover for personal injury or death for the Contractors Employers and Engineers personnel is Tk. Tk. 2.00 (two) lakh.
GCC 43.1
The Contractor shall submit a Programme for the works within 7 (seven) days of signing the Contract. The Programme shall be drawn in such a way that the progress of work of all the sites under the Package, at any stage, shall be almost equal.
GCC 43.2 GCC 43.3
The period between Programme update is 60 (sixty) days. The amount to be withheld for late submission of an updated Programme is Tk. 1.00 (one) lakh.
GCC 55.1
The Defects Liability Period is 365 (three hundred fifty five) days from the date of completion of works certified by the Engineer. These sub-clauses have been modified as follows : V. Under these sub-clauses no interest will be paid to the contractor for late payment. Payment will be made if fund is available.
GCC 63.1 & GCC 63.2 GCC 64.1 (a) GCC 64.1 (m) GCC 66.1
This sub-clause is not subject to compensation event. The following events shall also be compensation Events : None The Contract is not subject to price adjustment in accordance with GCC Clause 66.
GCC 67.1 GCC 68.1
The proportion of payments retained is 5 (five) percent. The liquidated damages for the whole of the woks are 0.05 (zero point zero five) percent of the final Contract Price per day. The maximum amount of liquidated damages for the whole of the woks is 10 (ten) percent of the final Contract Price.
GCC 69.1
The Bonus for the whole of the works is [percent of final Contract Price amount] per day. No Bonus will be paid
GCC 70.1
10 (ten) percent of Contract Price will be Paid to the Contractor as advance payment against the submission of equal amount of un-conditional Bank Guarantee within 30 (thirty) days from the date of signing of the Contract. The advance payment will be re-covered by the Client from the Interim Bills at 20 (twenty) percent of Billed Amount until the advance payment has been fully setoff.
GCC 70.3
GCC 71
The Performance Security is 10 (ten) percent to 15 (fifteen) percent of the Contract Amount to be deposited in the form of Bank Guarantee.
GCC 77.1
The date by which as-built drawings are required is 30 (thirty) days after the date of completion of works. The date by which operating and maintenance manuals are required to Not Applicable
GCC 77.2
The amount to be withheld for failing to produce as-built drawings and/or operating and maintenance manuals by the date required is Tk. 1.00 (one) lakh.
GCC 79.1
The percentage to apply to the value of the work not completed, representing the Employers additional cost for completing the Works, is 10 (ten) percent.
GCC 82.2 (b)
The Adjudicator jointly appointed by the parties later on if necessary. But fees must be born by the Contractor. In case of disagreements between the parties, the Appointing Authority for the Adjudicator is the President of the Institution of Engineers, Bangladesh. The venue of Arbitration shall be at Dhaka, Bangladesh.
GCC 82.2 (e)
GCC 82.3 (b)
Section 6.
Sl. No. 01.
Bill of Quantities
Quantity Unit Unit Rate Amount in Tk.
Description of Items Site preparation: Preparation work of site, mobilization of plant, machinery equipment, materials & labour, cutting of trees, cleaning of bushes and undesirable materials, if any, providing bench marks, giving layout for building for construction work including making approach road, constructing temporary C.G.I. sheet boundary fence to ensure the security of the site as per specification and direction of the Engineer-in-charge. Earth work : Earth work in excavation of foundation pit, still column, brick wall, water tank etc. of all kinds of soils, rocks etc. unto required depth including cutting and uprooting of roots of trees it any, shoring, dewatering, leveling, dressing, ramming hard and preparing the bed etc. strictly as per design drawing, specification and direction of the Engineer. The excavated earth, which will be excess after necessary backfilling, if any at the description of the Engineer, shall be removed away from the site to contractor's arranged land. (The contractor should quote the rate considering the gain of excess excavated earth). a) Up to 1.5m depth and 60m lead. b) Extra for each additional 1m depth beyond 1.5m c) Extra for each 30m. additional lead beyond 60m.
L.S. 02.
10000.00
cum.
34.00
cum.
7.50
cum. 03. Earth filling: Earth filling in sides of foundation trenches and elsewhere and also for site development with carried earth in 150mm layers, leveling, dressing, compacting etc. complete in all respect as per direction of the Engineer-inCharge. (Measurement will be on compacted volume) Vitti Sand Filling: Vitti Sand filling in sides of foundation trenches and elsewhere and also for site development with carried Vitti sand in 150 mm, leveling, dressing, compacting etc. complete in all respect as per direction of the Engineer in charge. Sand Filling: Sand (F.M. shall not be less than 1.2) filling in all types of foundation and plinth etc. upto
2.50
cum.
37.00
04.
cum.
148.00
05.
required level as per drawings, proper mechanical compaction of sand fill with plate, vibro or impact compactor in 150mm layers maximum to obtained standard AASHO density of 95% at optimum moisture contents in each layers, compaction shall be confirmed by field and laboratory test. Removing of debris, slush from the pit/ Trench etc. all works complete. a) Foundation cum. b) Boundary Wall cum. 06. Brick work: Single layer brick ( 1st class picked jhama) flat soling in foundation, plinth & whenever shown, including sand ( FM 1.5 ) blinding the interstices by maintaining proper grades as per drawing etc. all work complete. a) Pile cap sqm. b) Ground Floor sqm. c) Boundary wall sqm. 07. Damp proof course on Wall : 75mm thick damp proof course with Portland cement, coarse Sylhet sand 12 mm down graded 'stone chips including (1:1.5:3) breaking chips into required sizes, screening washing of aggregates, mixing laying centering, shuttering, casting and curing applying two coats of hot bitumen etc. complete in all respect as per drawing and direction of the Engineer-incharge. sqm. 08. Damp proof course in Floor (Polythene sheet): Damp proof course work in floor and wherever necessary in single layers of polythene paper using 0.16 mm thick polythene sheet (each layers) in between cement concrete and brick flat 'soling providing a lap of at least 150mm width in joints and edges and using plastic glue and supplying of all materials, etc. complete in all respect as per drawing, specification and direction of the Engineer-in-charge. sqm. 09. Shore Protection: Supplying and driving of wooden Ballah of Av. dia 150mrn (timber piles) for shore protection with Bitumen drum sheet on the outer periphery of the shoring piles with necessary fittings, fixing the planks with shoring piles as per approved drawing and design which (drawing and design) will be given by the contractor according to site condition. This item also includes bailing out of water for the whole construction period and maintenance of 15.00 311.00 116.00 116.00 116.00 195.00 195.00
the shore protection till the end of construction work. sqm. 10. Cement Concrete Work: 75mm Cement Concrete (1:3:6) over soiling in Mat foundation and other foundation works and wherever specified concrete mix and specified thickness providing Portland gray Cement, best quality coarse sand, 20mm down graded picked jhama chips in/c. breaking chips, screening, mechanical mixing of concrete, curing at least 7 days, protecting the green work from rain and sun, necessary formwork etc. all work complete: a) With concrete mix of proportion 1:2:4 in Foundation cum. b) With concrete mix of proportion 1:3:6 in Ground Floor c) With concrete mix of proportion 1:2:4 in Boundary wall 11. Brick Work In Foundation: lst class kiln Burnt Brick work with grey Portland Cement and & sand (F.M. 1.5)mortar of specified proportion, necessary scaffolding, sorting and cleaning & wetting of good bricks, curing, racking out joints, protecting the green work from rain & sun in foundation, superstructure, etc. all work complete in all floors. In Foundation, plinths, steps etc. at plinth level and where specified as per drawing with 1:6 mortar proportion. 254mm. thick brickwork above plinth level with 1:6 mortar proportion in all floors a) ground floor cum. b) 127mm. thick brick work above plinth level with 1:4 mortar proportion in all floors i) Ground floor ii) 1st. floor iii) 2nd. floor sqm. sqm. sqm. 12. Klinker paving bricks work: Klinker paving bricks work in pavement with machine made ceramic pressed bricks of approved quality in cement mortar (4:1) on minimum 12 mm thick cement mortar (4:1) in/c raking out joints, cutting the bricks to required size whenever necessary in/c high class flush pointing (2:1), cleaning, curing at least for 7 days etc. complete as per direction of Engineer in Charge and standard practice. (F.M. of sand= 1.2) 301.00 305.00 309.00 1974.00 2825.00
cum. sqm.
2350.00 340.00
a) 100 mm thick brick on edge pavement with 200 mm x 100 mm x 50 mm sqm. b) 50 mm flat brick pavement with 200 mm x 100 mm x 50 mm klinker paving bricks ( 1:4) sqm. 13. C.C Work Above Plinth Level: 254 mm thick brick work above plinth level with 1:6 mortar proportion in an floors. a) Ground floor cum. b) 1st. Floor sqm. c) 2nd. Floor sqm. 127mm thick brickwork above plinth level with 1:4 mortar proportion in all floors. a) Ground Floor sqm. b) 1st. Floor sqm. c) 2nd. Floor sqm. 14. Reinforcement in R.C.C: Steel Reinforcement works in R.C.C works providing deformed or plain bars of any size manufactured from billets having min. yield strength as specified below unless otherwise specified, cleaning the steel surface, cutting the bars in required length, making the bars as per shape and size, placing the bar in position providing necessary blocks, chairs hangers spacers etc.(no payment shall be made for hooks laps chairs hangers spacers overweight, wastage, etc.) all work complete by using 24 BWG G.I. binding wire in all floors. Deformed bars of 276 MPa (40,000 psi) a) Foundation i) Pile M.T. ii) Pile cap M.T. b) Ground Floor M.T. c) 1st. Floor M.T. Deformed bars 415 Mpa (60,000psi) a) Foundation M.T. b) Ground floor M.T. c) 1st. floor M.T. d) 2nd. floor M.T. 15. Cast-in-situ Piles: Providing and erecting all necessary plants, 26000.00 26000.00 26000.00 26000.00 23000.00 23000.00 23000.00 23000.00 305.00 305.00 301.00 1974.00 1974.00 1974.00 475.00 800.00
equipments and labour for boring holes and casting at site 500 mm dia bored Cast-in-situ RCC piles to the required depth. (The actual depth of piles shall be determined after the load test of pile is done) from 1.5 m (approx.) below the E.G.I. or as per drawing and design for all piles except test piles which will be cast from E.G.I. (payment will be made for length between tip level and cut off level) with 20mm down well graded broken Bholaganj stone chips, well graded Sythet coarse sand (F.M.=2.5) and Portland cement of proportion which actually is to be determined by trial mixes but in any case not less than (1:1.5:3) from approved materials at site to attain a minimum ultimate strength of 245kg/cm.sq.(3500) psi at 28 days cylinder. The rate shall include supply and cost of all materials such as stone chips, Sylhet sand, cement (Excluding cost of reinforcement and its fabrication) necessary quantity of Bentonite as per drawing, specification and direction of the Engineer-in-charge. The rate will also include the providing layout and bringing plants, mud-pump Trimie pipe, guide pipe etc. in position and casting of concrete for service piles and test piles. The cost includes installation of plants with all accessories and their operations, concrete casting, supplying necessary rail line and H.P. pipe line, making water reservoirs, slurry tanks, water and power supply arrangements, disposal of slurry and spoils at contractor's risk and responsibility, false concreting above for the cut-off level, supply all other necessary machineries, fuels, lubricants, tools, tackles, provisions for successful performance of the job etc. complete as per design, drawing, specification and direction of the Engineer-in-charge. (Rate is inclusive of false casting. Measurement will be given from cut-off level). a) 400 mm dia b) 500 mm dia rm. rm. 16. Breaking of pile head & repairing: Dismantling of excess concrete of piles upto required level as per drawing including straightening the top rods of the piles and bending the same for anchorage in the piles head or raft as per direction of the Engineer-incharge including removing the debris to a safe distance from the site to contractor's own arranged land. Pile head extension repair with cement, sand (F.M.=2.5)and20 mm down graded broken stone chips (1:1.5:3) having minimum f'c=245Kg/cm.sq. (3,500 psi) of 28 960.00 1296.00
days cured cylinder including cost of shuttering centering curing etc. complete as per direction of the Engineer-in-charge. a) 400 mm dia cum. b) 500 mm dia cum. 17. I section columns & Grade Beams: Supplying, fabrication and fixing to details as per design I section columns & beams reinforcement in concrete with straightening and cleaning rust, if any, bending and binding in position with supply of G. I. wires etc. complete in all respects as per drawing, design and direction of the Engineer-in-charge. (50 grade with new still plate with one coat red oxide painting) kg 18. R.C.C. in columns, footings, pile cap& Grade Beams: R.C.C work providing Portland grey cement sand(F.M 2.5) and 20mn down graded Picked jhama chips of proportion which actually is to be determined by trial mix from the approved materials at site, mechanical mixing and consolidation of concrete to attain the specified minimum cylinder crushing strength at 28 days but the mixer shall not be less than specified proportion, casting the concrete in water tight formwork, centering, shuttering, propping, scaffolding, proper placement of steel reinforcement, embedded built in items and blackouts and C~15 etc. Monolithically casting of an built in items, mailing gangway not to disturb the green work from rain and sun all work complete in/c. curing in all floors (excluding the cost of reinforcement and its fabrication works) In columns, footings, pile cap and all types Of grade beams, with a concrete mix of 1.2:4 proportion to attain the minimum cylinder crushing strength of 18 MPa (2500 Psi) a) Foundation b) Ground Floor cum. c) 1st. Floor cum. d) 2nd.Floor cum. cum. 19. Still corrugated sheet in floor slab: Supplying, fabrication and fixing to details as per design corrugated sheet under concrete base with straightening and cleaning rust, if any, bending and binding in position with supply of G. I. wires etc. complete in all respects as per drawing, design and direction of the Engineer4500.00 4500.00 4500.00 4500.00 90.00 1030.00 1030.00
in-charge. a) 1st. Floor sqm. b) 2nd.Floor sqm. 20. R.C.C in Floor Beams: All types of floor beams with a concrete mix of 1:2:4 proportions to attain the minimum cylinder crushing strength of 18Mpa (2500 Psi) at 28 days. a) Ground Floor b) 1st. Floor c) 2nd.Floor R.C.C in Horizontal slab, Stairs: concrete mix of 1:2:4 proportion to attain the minimum cylinder crushing strength of 18 MPa (2500 Psi) at 28 days. a) Ground Floor b) 1st. Floor c) 2nd.Floor R.C.C in Stair core & Lift core: A concrete mix of 1:2:4 proportion to attain the minimum cylinder crushing strength of 18 MPa (2500 Psi) at 28 days. a) Ground Floor b) 1st. Floor c) 2nd.Floor Still lattice roof truss: Supplying, fabrication and fixing to details as per design as roof with straightening and cleaning rust, provided from still industry. All respects as per drawing, design and direction of the Engineer-in-charge. (50 grade with new still plate with one coat red oxide painting) I section purlin on roof truss: Supplying, fabrication and fixing to details as per design on roof with straightening and cleaning rust, provided from still industry. All respects as per drawing, design and direction of the Engineer-in-charge(50 grade with new still plate with one coat red oxide painting) M 25. M.S. ROD (DEFORMED BAR, 60 Grade): Supplying, fabrication and fixing to details as per design deformed bar reinforcement in concrete with straightening and cleaning rust, if any, bending and binding in position with supply of G. I. wires etc. complete in all respects as per drawing, design and direction of the Engineer-in-charge.(60 grade deformed bar 4000.00 cum. cum. cum. 4550.00 4575.00 4600.00 656.48 656.48
21.
cum. cum. cum.
4550.00 4575.00 4600.00
22.
cum. cum. cum.
4550.00 4575.00 4600.00
23.
kg 24.
90.00
with minimum fy=415 Mpa). Qtl. 26. Welding work: Welding the laps of Deformed bar with 50mm long alternately placed both side @50mm c/c. welding spot of the lap by highly oxidual electrode rods of fy=4200 Kg/cm.sq. and fitting the gaps between the laps including cost of machinery tools etc. all complete as per direction of the Engineer-in-charge, (The measurement will be given 50mm length both side welding=1 point. Welding is required for 20mm and above dia rod). Pt. 27. 12mm thick Plaster with Dado/Skirting: 12 mm thick cement plaster (1:4) to dado inside the walls and plinth wall upto 150 mm below ground level with neat cement finishing and finishing the edges and corners including curing etc. all complete as per drawing and direction of the Engineer-in-charge. sqm. 28. 12 mm thick cement Plaster on Wall: 12 mm thick cement plaster having proportion (1:6) cement and sand (F.M.=1.5 min.) mortar 'to all superstructure walls both inner and outer surfaces including finished smooth surface, leveling, scaffolding, cleaning, scrapping, washing, finishing corners & edges, supplying of all materials and curing etc. complete in all respect as per drawings, specification and direction of the Engineer-in-charge. sqm. 29. Patent Stone: 38mm thick patent stone flooring (1:1.5:3) with one part of Portland cement one and half part of 'coarse sand (F.M.=2.5min) and three part of 12mm down graded stone chips of coarse aggregate, mixing and laying concrete true to level and shape in alternate panels, including finishing the top with neat cement finishing and curing by ponding fresh water including supplying all materials, screening & washing the aggregates etc. compete in all respect in all floors as per drawing, specification and direction of the Engineer-in-charge. sqm. 30. 12mm thick finished situ Terrazzo work: 12mm thick finished situ Terrazzo work on floor with one part of l0mm machine crushed well graded dust free and properly washed marble chips and one part of mixture containing white cement (made in Malaysia/Thailand/India) and grey cement in proportion (9:1) including preparation of mix laying the same over mm. 25mm thick artificial paten stone flooring in proportion (1:2:4) (cement, sand, brick chips) in/c making suitable panel, compacting, curing at least for 7 days, 59.00 72.00 87.00 4.00 3129.00
cutting with pumic stone (Nos. 40, 80,120) and finishing with Minar stone in/c breaking brick chips, screening, washing mosaic chips and supply of all necessary materials. a) With Pakistani Origin Marble chips and suitable panel by 5mm thick and 20mm deep glass dividers b) With Pakistani Origin Marble chips and without glass dividers (in window sill, stair or wherever directed. sqm. 730.00
sqm. 31. French Polishing: French polishing to door and window frames and shutters three coats over a coat of priming including cleaning, finishing and polishing with sand paper etc. all complete in all floor. sqm. 32. Enamel Paint : Minimum 2 coats of synthetic enamel paint (brand and color to approved) over an approved coat of red lead primer for metal faces or with a base coat on wooden surface (toilet & Kitchen door) with high class finishing including cleaning, iron papering and preparing the surface, supplying of all materials etc. complete in all respect in all floors as per drawing, specification and direction of the Engineer- incharge. sqm. 33. Plastic Paint : Plastic painting of best quality and approved color to wall and ceiling three coats with putty work cleaning, sand papering the surface and necessary scaffolding etc. all complete in all floors. White Wash: White washing three coats with slacked stone lime, supply of gums, blue pigment in/c scaffolding and necessary cleaning, before and after the wash for all floors. Snowcem Work: Snowcem work of approved quality and color (Foreign made) two coats over a coat of priming including cleaning and sand papering the surface and necessary scaffolding etc. all complete as per direction of the Engineer-incharge. Distemper Work: Oil bound distempering to wall & ceiling 2 coats over a coat of priming of chalk wash with glue including cleaning and sand papering the surface and necessary scaffolding etc. all complete in all floors. Insulation: Insulation with 50 mm thick glass wool blanket (12kg/m3) with tac 810 single sided aluminium foil facing on one side including galvanized roof mesh (3 x 3) square spacing).
670.00
46.00
64.00
sqm.
69.00
34.
sqm.
5.50
35.
sqm.
35.00
36.
sqm.
37.00
37.
sqm. 38. Fixed glazed window: Manufacturing, supplying, fitting and fixing of fixed glazed frame with outer member of 19mm x 19mm x 19mm x 3mm 'Z' section and verticle and horizontal dividers of 19mm x 19mm x 3mm 'T' section including all cost of fabrication and welding, supplying and fixing of 19mm x 19mm x 3mm angle clamps of 150mm length of required nos. with the frame, fixing the frame in wall with 1:2:4 cement concrete after making necessary grooves, supplying and fixing of 3mm glass panes with pucca putty, mending good all damages, painting iron faces two coats of synthetic enamel paint over a coat of anti-corrosive priming of approved colour and quality etc. all complete as per plan and direction of the Engineer-in-charge. sqm. 39. Still Railing with vertical still pipe post: Providing railing with 38mm dia still pipe hand rail welded with 12mm dia still pipe post fixed vertically @ 125mm c/c. 75mm of the bottom of the pipes to be embedded in floor with 50mm x 50mm x 3mm still base plate welded at bottom, all complete including making necessary grooves in floor, packing the post with 1:2:4 cement concrete, manding good all damages, finishing etc. as per plan and direction of the Engineer-in-charge. sqm. 40. Marble on floor (300mm x 300mm x 20mm) : Supplying and placing best quality marble on floor 30Omm x 300mrn x 2mm thick in size of approved quality texture and colour (Italian marble) in the designated places as per drawing on 25mm thick cement mortar (1:3) including placing cement slurry below the stone, cutting the marble stone to desired size, grinding and finishing the edges, setting in position with while cement and colouring pigments including supplying all necessary equipments/materials and finishing the top by pumice stone and necessary auxiliary materials complete in all respect as per direction of the Engineer-inCharge. (For all floor) Measurement for payment shall make in area of finished visible floor surface. sqm. 41. Stair Railing: 900mm high stainless steel pipe railing in stair in/c. manufacturing and fixing in position as per drawings providing wooden hand rest of 9675 Sq.mm. area, hand rest and all other verticals of 25mm dia stainless steel pipe shall be manufactured by proper welding, providing the verticals @ 250mm C/C necessary scaffolding and hardware, all vertical and end
422.92
1128.00
3200.00
6500.00
of horizontal shall be embedded 75mm in to the concrete having end anchor of 20mm X 5mm Fl bar of 50mm long etc. all works complete. sqm. 43. Stair Nosing: Supplying, fitting and fixing of stair nosing having corrugation of non skid surface on 50mm flat surface fixed at stair steps including 90mm long hold fast fish tail type anchors embedded in concrete @ 400 centers in all floors, rawel plug & brass screw shall be provided @ 800mm centers, cutting the necessary holes in concrete and mending good the damages, concrete packing in steps hole, curing, fixing in position, etc. all work complete in all floors. rm. 44. Aluminium swing door: Supplying, fitting and fixing in position of manually operated heavy swing door with concealed door closer in dark bronze anodized aluminium frame with 6mm thick Foreign made tinted glass of approved quality including necessary arrangement to keep the door fixed when open including necessary rubber of synthetic materials lining, sealers along the joints in between frame necessary filling, fixing etc. complete as per design, drawing and direction of the Engineer-in-Charge. (Including all electrical/mechanical devices). (Minimum thickness of aluminium section should be 2mm). a) In swing door shutter Door. sqm. b) In sliding door/windows and Partition wall sqm. 45. False ceiling: Supplying fitting & fixing false ceiling under floor slab or wherever necessary with 12mm thick plain veneered board/fire proof gypsum board having a panel size of 600mm X 600mm or any other approved size with 30mm X 25mm aluminium main 'T' section and 25mm X 25mm cross 'T' section. The false ceiling frame is to be hung from concrete slab by means of galvanized ceiling hanger and expanded steel rowel plug keeping provision for fitting/fixing electrical light fittings as per drawing specification all works complete. sqm. 46. Ceramic Tiles Work: Supplying and laying glazed tiles of Srilanka/Pakistan/Spain/Brazil/Malysia or approved origin and of approved quality and colour on 20mm thick cement and sand (FM 1.50) mortar with a proportion mix of 1:3 base and raking out of joints with white cement and 1448.00 1800.00 3000.00 700.00 1000.00
colour pigment including cutting and laying tiles in proper way and finishing with care, curing, at least 7 days etc. all complete. i) 150mm x 150mm. Or specified size in toilet walls sqm. ii) 100mm x 200mm. Or specified size in toilet/kitchen walls sqm. 47. Door Frame Work: Wood work in door chowkat with well seasoned, crack and worm hole free sound timber of approved quality and sizes as per drawing, coal tarring the faces in contact with masonry walls, fixing in position with 200mm long 25mm X 25mm X 6mm M.S. angle clamps 6 nos. per door frame including embedded in concrete or walls, cutting holes for clamps and refilling the holes with concrete (1:2:4), mending good the damages, putty and sand papering, two coats of paint/ polishing as specified below, etc. all work complete in all floors. Chittagong teak wood with two coats Epoxy clear Lacquar (Berger). cum. 48. Door Shuttering Works : Woodwork in 38 mm thick finished size solid panel door shutter as per drawing of well seasoned, crack and worm hole free sound specified timber including fixing with approved quality door fixtures, Hardware, tower bolts and cylindrical Mortice door locks(EPO), heavy type brass handle 4 nos. , 3 nos. 100mm butt steel hinges(China), sand papering, putty works, 3 coats of paints of approved colour, etc. complete. Chittagong teak wood and 3 coats of Epoxy clear 1acquer (Berger). cum. 49. Tempered glass: Manufacturing, supplying, fitting and fixing of fixed glazed frame with outer member tempered glass used in exterior. Alpolic cladding columns & roof: Finished Alpolic used in interior & exterior as cladding material. Alpolic rapes on columns & used in drop ceiling& raping the roof with aluminium frame Supplying, fitting and fixing as per design. a) column raping b) roof Site cleaning : Site cleaning work after completion of all works under the contract including removing all temporary structures built in connection 1610.00 35300.00 650.00 650.00
sqm.
4842.00
50.
sqm. sqm.
344300.00 430400.00
51.
with the executing the work, carrying all kinds of debris to a distance as directed by and stacking these in a neat measurable stack in places as directed by the Engineer-in-charge. 10000.00 Total
Section 7. General Specification

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION A. SPECIFICATION OF MATERIALS 1. CEMENT
Cement shall be of ordinary gray Portland cement conforming to "Specification for Portland Cement (ASTMC-150 - 695 Type-I)". Some of the important requirements shall be as follows : (a) Chemical Requirements Magnesium oxide (MgO) maximum Sulphur Trioxide (SO3) (i) (ii) (iii) (iv) 4 (b) When Tricalcium Aluminate (3 CaO A12O3) is 8% or less, maximum When Tricalcium Aluminate (3 CaO A12O3) is more than 8%, maximum Loss on Ignition, maximum Insoluble Residue, maximum 5% 2.5% 3.0% 3.0% 0.75%
Physical Requirements (i) Fineness, specific surface (sq.cm per gram) Turbidimeter Test (C-115 ASTM) Average value, minimum Minimum value, any one sample (ii) Soundness Autoclave expansion (C-151 ASTM), maximum (iii) Time of Setting Gilmore Test (C-266 ASTM) Initial Set, not less than Final set, not more than Compressive strength 45 Minutes 8 hours 0.8% 1600 1600 1500
(iv)
The compressive strength of mortar cubes, composed of 1 part of cement and 2.75 parts graded standard (ottowa) sand, by weight, prepared and tested in accordance with Method C109 (ASTM) shall be equal to or higher than the values specified for the ages indicated below :
1 day in moist air, 2 days in water 127 Kg/cm2 1 day in moist air, 6 days in water 197 Kg/cm2
1 day in moist air, 27 days in water 282 Kg/cm
(v)
Tensile strength
The tensile strength of mortar cubes, composed of 1 part cement and 3 parts graded standard (ottowa) sand, by weight, prepared and tested in accordance with method C-190 (ASTM) shall be equal to or higher than the values specified for the ages indicated below:
1 day in moist air, 2 days in water 10.6 Kg/cm2 1 day in moist air, 6 days in water 19.4 Kg/cm2 1 day in moist air, 27 days in water 24.6 Kg/cm2 (c) Test
Number of test to be performed shall be determined by the Employer/University Engineer and the cost of testing including all incidental charges shall be borne by the Contractor. The test shall be performed in Engineering University Laboratory.
2.
SAND
For both Coarse and Medium (i) General Characteristics
Sand shall consist of natural sand, manufactured sand or a combination thereof. (ii) (a) Deleterious substances The amount of deleterious substances in sand shall not exceed the limit prescribed below:
LIMITS FOR DELETERIOUS SUBSTANCES IN SAND FOR CONCRETE
ITEM Clay lumps Materials finer than No.200 sieve Coal and Lignite Light weight particles floating on liquid of density 2000 kg/cum.
MAXIMUM PERCENT BY WEIGHT OF TOTAL SAMPLE 1.00 3.00 0.50 0.50
METHOD OF TEST ASTM C-142 ASTM C-117 ASTM C-125 ASTM C-123
(iii)
Organic Impurities
1.
Sand shall be free from injurious amounts, organic impurities, except herein provided, Sand subjected to the ASTM C-40 for organic impurities and producing a colour darker than the standard shall be rejected.
2.
Sand failing in the test may be used provided that the discoloration is due principally to the presence of small quantities of coal, lignite, or similar discrete particles.
3.
Sand failing, in the test may be used, provided that when tested for the effect of organic impurities on strength of mortar, the relative strength at 7 and 28 days calculated in accordance with section 10 of the Method of Test for Effect on Organic Impurities in Fine Aggregate on strength of Mortar (ASTM - Designation: (86 - 63T), is not less than 95%.
(iv)
Soundness
Sand subject to five cycles of the soundness test (ASTM C-88) shall show a loss, weighted in accordance with the grading of a sample complying with the limitations set forth herein before, not greater than 10 percent when sodium sulphate is used or 15 percent when magnesium sulphate is used. (v) (a) Grading for Coarse Sand Sieve analysis
Sand shall be graded within the following limits when tested by method ASTM- C-135 and C-125.
SIEVE 6mm No.4 (4.76mm) No.8 (2.38mm) No.16 (1.19mm) No.30 (0.595mm) No.50 (0.297mm) No.100 (0.139mm) (b)
PERCENTAGE OF WEIGHT PASSING 100 95 to 100 80 to 100 50 to 85 25 to 60 10 to 30 2 to 0
The sand shall have not more than 45 percent by weight retained between any two consecutive sieves of these shown in paragraph (a), and its Fineness Modulus shall be not less than 2.50 or more than 3.10. Grading for Medium Sand Sieve Analysis : Sand shall be graded within the following limits when tested by Method ASTM C-135 and C125.
(vi) (a)
SIEVE 3mm No.4 (4.76mm) No.8 (2.38mm) No.16 (1.19mm) No.30 (0.595mm) No.50 (0.297mm) No.100 (0.139mm)
PERCENTAGE OF WEIGHT PASSING 100 95 to 100 85 to 100 70 to 85 10 to 40 2 to 15
(b)
The sand shall have not more than 50 percent by weight retained between any two consecutive sieve of these shown in paragraph (a) and its Fineness Modulus shall be not less then 1.50. The sand should not be retained by more than 25% between sieve No.50 and sieve No.100.
(vii)
Sampling, Testing and Approval
Sample of sand selected by the Employer/University Engineer shall be deposited by the Contractor to the Head Office of the Consultant for testing in laboratory. The arrangement to testing in laboratory shall be done by the Consultant but the cost of testing and all incidental charge in this connection shall be borne by the Contractor. The quantity of sand to be tested shall be at the discretion of the Employer/University Engineer. If any sample of sand are found deficient in test, more tests shall be done. If the test results are satisfactory, the Consultant/University Engineer will approve the sand for acceptance. If the test results are not satisfactory, the entire lot from which the samples had been taken may be rejected or at the request of the Contractor, he may be allowed to restack the sand leaving the relative inferior sand out. After the re-stacking is done a second set of test will be run on them and if the test results are unsatisfactory, the lot will be rejected. All rejected sands shall be stored in an exclusive area as indicated by the Employer/University Engineer and shall be removed from the site by the Contractor at his own cost. 3. 3.1 Coarse Aggregate General Characteristics Coarse aggregate shall consist of crushed stone of Boulders (Min. 5) of Bholaganj Standard conforming to the requirements of this specification.
3.2
Grading Coarse aggregates shall conform to the requirements prescribed in Table-2 for the size number specified. Note : The ranges shown in Table-2 are by necessity very wide in order to accommodate nationwide conditions. For quality control of any specific operation, a producer should develop an average gradation of the particular source and production facilities, and control the gradation within reasonable tolerances from this average.
3.3.
Deleterious Substances
3.4 Except for the provisions of 10.3, the limits given in Table-3 shall apply for the class of coarse aggregate designated in the purchase order or other document (Note-9). If the class is not specified, the requirements for Class3S, 3M, or 1N shall apply in the severe, moderate, and negligible weathering regions, respectively (See Table-3). Note : The specified of the aggregate should designate the class of coarse aggregate to be used in the work, based on weathering severity, abrasion, and other factors of exposure. (See Table-3). The limits for coarse aggregate corresponding to each class designation are expected to ensure satisfactory performance in concrete for the respective type and location of construction. Selecting a class with unduly restrictive limits may result in unnecessary cost if materials meeting those requirements are not locally available. Selecting a class with lenient limits may result in unsatisfactory performance and premature deterioration of the concrete. While concrete in different parts of a single structure may be adequately made with different classes of coarse aggregate, the specifier may wish to require the coarse aggregate for all concrete to conform to the same more restrictive class to reduce the chance of furnishing concrete will the wrong class of aggregate, especially on smaller projects.
3.5
Coarse aggregate for use in concrete that will be subject to wetting, extended exposure to humid atmosphere, or contact with moist ground shall not contain any materials that are deleteriously reactive with the alkalis in the cement in an amount sufficient to cause excessive expansion of mortar or concrete except that if such materials are present in injurious amounts, the coarse aggregate may be used with a cement containing less than 0.60% alkalis calculated as sodium oxide equivalent (Na2 + 0.658K2O) or with the addition of a material that has been shown to prevent harmful expansion due to the alkali aggregate reaction. Coarse aggregate having test results exceeding the limits specified in Table-3 may be accepted provided that concrete made with similar aggregate from the same source has given satisfactory service when exposed in a similar manner to that to be encountered; or, in the absence of a demonstrable service record, provided that aggregate produces concrete having satisfactory relevant properties. Hardness : Coarse aggregate shall conform to Abrasion Test.
3.6
3.7 4.
Methods of Sampling and Testing 4.1 Sample and test the aggregates in accordance with the following methods, except as otherwise provided in this specification. Make the required tests on test samples that comply with requirements of the designated test methods. The same test sample may be used for sieve analysis and for determination of materials finer than the 75-m (No. 200) sieve. Separated sizes from the sieve analysis may be used in preparation of samples for soundness or abrasion tests. For determination of all other tests and for evaluation of potential alkali reactivity where requried, use independent test samples.
4.1.1 4.1.2 4.1.3 4.1.4 4.1.5 4.1.6 4.1.7
Sampling Practice D 75 and Practice D 3665. Grading and Fineness Modulus - Method C 136 Amount of Material Finer than 75-m (No. 200) Sieve Test Method-C 117. Organic Impurities Test Method C 40. Effect of Organic Impurities on Strength Test Method C 87. Soundness Test Method C 88. Clay Lumps and Friable Particles Test Method C 142.
4.1.8 Coal and Lignite Test Method C 123, using a liquid of 2.0 specific gravity to remove the particles of coal and lignite. Only material that is brownish-black, shall be considered coal or lignite. Coke shall not be classed as coal or lignite. 4.1.9 Abrasion of Coarse Aggregate Test Method C 131 or Test Method C 535.
4.1.10 Freezing and Thawing Procedures for making freezing and thawing tests of concrete are described in Test Method C 666. 4.1.11 Chart Test Method C 123 is used to identify Particles in a samples of coarse aggregate light Er than 2.40 specific gravity, and Practice C 295 to identify which of the particles in the light fraction are chart.
TABLE -1 Limits for Deleterious Substances in Fine Aggregate for Concrete Item Weight Percent for Total Sample, Max 3.0
Clay lumps and friable particles Material finer than 75-m (No. 200) sieve: Concrete subject to abrasion All other concrete Coal and lignite : Where surface appearance of concrete is of importance All other concrete
3.0A (In roads and pavements) 5.0 A
0.5 (for fair face concrete)
1.0
In the case of manufactured sand, if the material finer than the 75-m (No. 200) sieve consists of the dust of fracture, essentially free of clay or shale, these limits may be increased to 5 and 7%, respectively. TABLE 2 Grading Requirements of Coarse Aggregates Si ze N o. 56 Nominal size (Sieves with square Opening) 25.0 to 9.5mm (1 to 3/8 in.) 25.00 to 4^N75mm (1 in. to No.4) 19.0 to 4.75mm (3/4 in to 3/8 No.) 19.0 to 4.75mm (3/4 in. to No.4) 12.5 to 4.75mm ( in. to No.4) 9.5 to 2.36mm (3/8 in to No.8) Amount Finer than Each Laboratory Sieve (Square Opening), Weight Percent 90 75 63m 50 37.5 25 19m 12.5 9.5m 4.75 2.36 mm mm m mm mm mm m mm m mm mm (3 (3 (2 (2 (1 (1 (3/4 ( (3/8 (No. (No. in) in) in) in) in) in) in) in) in) 4) 8) .. .. .. .. 100 90 40 to 10 to 0 to 0 to .. to 85 40 15 5 100 .. .. .. .. 100 95 .. 25 to .. 0 to 0 to to 60 10 5 100 .. .. .. .. .. 100 90 to 100 20 to 55 0 to 15 0 to 5 ..
100 mm (4 in) ..
1.18 mm (No. 16) ..
57
..
..
..
..
67
..
..
..
..
..
..
100
90 to 100
..
20 to 55
0 to 10
0 to 5
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
100
90 to 100
40 to 70
0 to 15
0 to 5
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
100
85 to 100
10 to 30
0 to 10
0 to 5
TABLE 3 Limits for Deleterious Substances and Physical Property
Requirements of Coarse Aggregate for Concrete
Class Designation
Type of Location of Concrete Construction
Clay Lumps and Friable Particles
Chart (Less Than 2.40 sp gr SSD)
Maximum Allowable, % Sum of Clay Material Coal Lumps, Finer and Friable Than 75- Lignite Particles, m (No. and Chart 200) (Less Than sieve 2.40 sp gr SSD) Moderate Weathering Regions ... ... 1.0D 1.0
Abrasion
Magnesium Sulfate Soundness (5 cycles)B
1M
2M
Footings, foundations, columns, and beams not exposed to the weather, interior floor slabs to be given coverings. Interior floors without coverings Foundation walls above grade, retaining walls, abutments, piers, girders, and beams exposed to the weather Pavements, bridge decks, driveways and curbs, walks, patios, garage floors, exposed floors and porches, or waterfront structures subject to frequent wetting. Exposed architectural concrete
... 10.0 50
5.0
...
...
1.0D 1.0D
0.5
50
...
3M
5.0
8.0
10.0
0.5
50
18
4M
5.0
5.0
7.0
1.0D
0.5
50
18
5M
3.0
3.0
5.0
1.0D
0.5
50
18
B The allowable limits for soundness shall be 12% if sodium sulphate is used. D This percentage may be increased under either of the following conditions : (1) if the material finer than the 75-m sieve is essentially free of clay or shale the percentage may be increased to 1.5: or (2) if the source of the fine aggregate to be used in the concrete is known to contain less than the specified maximum amount passing the 75-m sieve (Table-1). The percentage limit (L) on the amount in the coarse aggregate may be increased to L = 1 + [(P)/(100-P)] (T-A), where P=percentage of sand in the concrete as a percent of total aggregate, T = the Table-1 limit for the amount permitted in the fine aggregate, and A = the actual amount in the fine aggregate. (This provides a weighted calculation designed to limit the maximum mass of material passing the 75-m sieve in the concrete to that which would be obtained if both the fine and coarse aggregates were supplied at the maximum tabulated percentage for each of these ingredients).
4. 4.1
Boulders Colour
The Boulders shall be very dense and white in colour, Black or coloured boulders shall not be accepted. 4.2 Size
The size of Boulder shall very from 63.5 mm (2.5) to 127 mm (5). 4.3 Specific Gravity should be 2.70 to 2.80.
4.4
Compressive Strength or Crushing Strength
The compressive / crushing strength of boulder not less than 850 kg / cm2 (12,000 psi). 4.5 Deleterious Substances
The amount of deleterious substances in boulders shall not exceed the limits given below : Sl. No. 1. 2. 3. Item Clay Lumps Soft Particle Chart as an impurity that will disintegrate in five cycles of the soundness test Materials finer than No. 200 Sieve Coal and lignite Max. percent by weight of total 0.25 5.00 5.00 Method of Test ASTM C - 142 ASTM C 235 ASTM C 88 ASTM C 117 ASTM C 123
4. 5. 4.6 Soundness
1.00 0.50
Boulders subjected to five cycles of the soundness test (ASTM C-88) shall show a loss, not greater than 12 percent when sodium sulphate is used and 18 percent when magnesium sulphate is used. 4.7 Boulders tested for abrasion (ASTM C 131) shall have a loss not more than 35 percent.
4.8
Crushing value should not exceed 30%.of Crushing Strength.
4.9 5. A.
Porosity Test : Maximum 1%.
BRICKS Ordinary First Class Machine made Bricks
Brick shall be machine made ordinary First Class brick. Bricks unless otherwise specified shall be first class of size 241mm x 114mm x 70mm. Those shall be uniform in size and colour thoroughly and evenly burnt. These shall not break when thrown on the ground against one another from a height of 1.5M and shall give a metallic sound when struck against one another. The bricks shall be free from cracks or flaws. The brick shall have a minimum compression strength of 141 kg/cm2 on flat for any individual brick and 176 kg/cm2 on flat for average of any five bricks. The bricks shall not absorb more than one sixth of their weight of water when immersed for one day.
The bricks shall be M.B.CO. or Conforce standard or approved best quality.
The bricks shall be kiln and gas/coal burnt. B. Ordinary First Class bricks
The specification of Ordinary First Class Bricks shall be as that of Ordinary First Class Machine made Bricks and it may be of any brick field excepting Mirpur Zone. C. Picked Jhama Bricks The specification of picked jhama bricks shall be as that of ordinary first class machine made bricks except and provided that the bricks shall have a minimum compression strength of 253 kg/ cm2 on flat for any individual bricks and 316 kg/cm2 on flat for average of any five bricks. The bricks shall be kiln and gas/coal burnt. D. Test
The number of bricks to be tested shall be at the discretion of the University Engineer/Site Engineer. Only, after the bricks are approved by Consultant/University Engineer, it shall be used in the work. The test shall be performed in the Engineering University Laboratory. 6. A. REINFORCING STEEL General
The Mild Steel Rod shall conform ASTM A 15-64 (Structural Grade) and High Strength Rod shall conform ASTM A 432-64. The ends of the bar shall be machine sheared perpendicular to the axis of the bar. The bars shall be free from injurious defects and shall have a workman like finish. B. Chemical Properties
The steel shall conform to the following requirements as to chemical composition : Phosphorus, maximum percent Open hearth, basic oxygen or electric furnace Basic Acid .... .... 0.05 0.08
Acid bessemer and open hearth, basic oxygen or electric furnace. Rephosphorized .... C. Process 0.12
The bars shall be rolled from new and clean billet directly reduced from ingots of properly identified heats of open hearth, basic oxygen or electric furnace steel or its of acid bessemer steel. D. Tensile properties and bending properties
PROPERTIES i) Yield Strength In Mpa
MILD STEEL (PLAIN) 235
HIGH STRENGTH DEFORMED 415
PROPERTIES ii) Ultimate Tensile Strength In Mpa iii) Minimum Elongation a) dia upto 18 mm b) dia 20 & 22 mm c) dia 25 mm d) dia 30 mm iv) Bend Test The specimen shall stand being bent at (all sizes) room temperature around a pin without cracking on the outside of the bent portion. The relation between the diameter of the pin(t) and the diameter of the specimen (d) shall be E.
MILD STEEL (PLAIN) 394 In 200mm length 24% 23% 22% 20% 180o Bend t=4d
HIGH STRENGTH DEFORMED 590 In 200mm length 11% 10% 9% 7% 90o Bend upto 16mm t=4d 18mm to 22mm t=5d 25mm t=5d 30mm t=6d
Dimensional requirement for both mild steel and high strength
The nominal diameter, perimeter and cross -sectional area of a deformed bar (is equivalent to that of a plain bar having the same standard weight). Bar size 6mm 8mm 10mm 12mm 16mm 18mm 20mm 22mm 25mm 30mm Standard weight in Kg/M 0.222 0.395 0.616 0.887 1.58 1.99 2.47 2.98 3.85 5.55 Diameter in mm 6 8 10 12 16 18 20 22 25 30 Cross sectional Area in cm2 0.283 0.503 0.785 1.13 2.01 2.54 3.14 3.80 4.91 7.07 Perimeter in mm 18.85 25.13 31.42 37.70 50.27 56.55 62.83 69.12 78.54 94.25
F.
Permissible variation from standard weight Bar size Mild Steel Rods High Strength deformed Rod
Plain For lot 6mm Above 6mm For individual 6mm Above 6mm G. 5% 3.50% 10% 6%
Deformed or Twisted Deformed 3.5% for all sizes 6% for all sizes 3.5% for all sizes 6% for all sizes -
Requirement of Deformation (both for Mild steel and High strength steel)
(a)
Deformations shall be spaced along the bar at substantially uniform distances. The deformation on opposite sides of the bar shall be similar in size and shape.
(b)
The deformations shall be placed with respect to the axis of the bar so that the included angle is not less than 45 deg. Where the line of deformation forms an included angle with the axis of the bar of from 45 to 70o deg. inclusive, the deformations shall alternately reverse in direction on each side, or those on one side shall be reversed in direction from these on the opposite side. Where the line of deformations is over 70 deg. a reversal in direction is not required. The average centre to centre or distance between deformation on each side of the bar shall not exceed seven tenths of the nominal diameter of the bar. The overall length of deformations shall be such that the gap between the extreme ends of the deformations on Where the extreme ends terminate in a longitudinal rib, the width of the longitudinal rib shall be considered the gap. Where more than two longitudinal ribs are involved, the total width of all longitudinal ribs shall not exceed 25 percent of the nominal perimeter of the bar further more, the summation of gaps shall not exceed 25 percent of the nominal perimeter of the bar. The nominal perimeter of the bar shall be 3.14 times the nominal diameter.
(c)
(d)
(e)
The minimum height of deformations shall be not less than the following percentages of the nominal diameter of the bar. Diameter of the M.S. Rod 10mm dia 12mm dia 16mm dia 20mm dia to 38mm dia Minimum height of deformation in percent of nominal diameter of bar 4 4 4 5
(f)
The spacing, height, and gap of deformations shall conform to the requirements prescribed below : Bar size Maximum average spacing in mm 6.7 8.9 11.1 13.3 15.5 17.8 20.1 22.5 Minimum average height in mm 0.38 0.51 0.71 0.96 1.11 1.27 1.42 1.63 Max. Gap in mm nominal perimeter) 3.5 4.9 6.1 7.3 8.5 9.7 10.9 12.37
10mm dia 12mm dia 16mm dia 18mm and 20mm dia 22mm dia 25mm dia 28mm dia 30mm and 32mm dia (g) (i) Measurements
The average spacing of deformations shall be determined by dividing a measured length of the bar specimen by the number of individual deformations on any one side of the bar specimens. A measured length of the bar specimen shall be considered the distance from a point on a deformation to a corresponding point on any other deformation on the same side of the bar. The average height of deformations shall be determined from measurements made on not less than two typical deformations. Determinations shall be based on three measurements per deformations, one at the centre of the over-all length and the other two at the quarter points of the over-all length. TIMBER
(ii)
7.
The timber to be used shall be of first class quality of the specimen as noted in the schedule of items.
It shall be from the heart of a matured and sound tree and shall be uniform in substance. The timber shall be free from large or dead knots, cracks, flaws, shakes, blemishes or any other defects. The timber shall not contain any sapwood and shall not have surface cracks or chipping in edges and corners. The timber shall be well seasoned and shall not contain more than 12% moisture by weight. B. MATERIAL FOR PLUMBING WORK 1. (i) PIPES G.I. pipes
The Galvanised Iron pipes to be used in the work shall conform to ASTM A 120-57T, welded or seamless. The dia of pipes mentioned in the Schedule of Item are nominal diameters. The pipes shall be coated with Zinc inside and outside by hot dip process and the Zinc used for the coating shall be any grade of Zinc conforming to the specifications for slab Zinc. The weight of coating shall be less than 2.0 oz. per square foot. Each length of the pipe shall be tested at the mill to the Hydrostatic Test pressure and Test pressure shall be 84 kg / cm2. The pipes shall also conform to the following tables. The exterior surface of the pipes shall be painted in 2 coats of "Thick cote" Epoxy special 2 pack product (Catalyst/Curing Agent) made by BERGER/approved best quality.
Nominal size in mm (diameter) 12mm 18mm 25mm 38mm 50mm 62mm (v) P.V.C. Pipe
Outside diameter mm 21.34mm 26.67mm 33.40mm 48.26mm 60.33mm 73.03mm
Wall thickness in mm 2.77mm 2.87mm 3.38mm 3.68mm 3.91mm 5.16mm
Weight in kg/M 126 1.68 2.50 4.06 5.48 8.66
The PVC pipe shall conform to ASTM Designation D 1785 - 64T, 80 schedule. The wall thickness with tolerance is noted below :
Nominal size
Wall thickness (in mm)
Tolerance
50mm 75mm 100mm 125mm 150mm
5.54 7.62 8.56 9.53 10.97
+ 0.026 + 0.036 + 0.040 + 0.045 + 0.052
2. (i)
PIPE FIXTURE Gate Valve
Gate Valves of sizes 62mm to 150mm dia shall be made of Cast Iron, Bronze trim, conforming to specification B.S. 3464, 1962, "Double Dise" type with non-rising stem. Gate valves of size 50mm dia shall be made of Copper Alloy, bronze trim, conforming to specifications B.S. 1952, 1964, "Double Disc" type with non-rising stem. (ii) Screw Down Valve
Screw Down Valves shall be of plain brass and of best quality available in Bangladesh. (iii) Float and Ball Valve :
Float and Ball valve shall be brass and of best quality available in Bangladesh. (iv) Bib cock, Pillar cock
These shall be chromium plated and shall be of best quality available in Bangladesh. The item shall conform the sample kept in the Office of the Consultant having marked "Best Quality" The tenderer shall see sample before quoting their rate. (v) H.C.I. Fitting : e.g. P/S trap, Nahani trap, Floor trap, etc. The H.C.I. fittings shall be of MAANCO brand or approved best quality. Siphon The siphon used in low cistern shall be of SHANKS or approved best quality. C. A. 1.0. SPECIFICATIONS FOR ELECTRICAL WORKS (MATERIALS AND WORKS) GENERAL SCOPE OF WORK
(vi)
This chapter covers all equipment/ materials and operations in connection with internal and external electrification and similar other installation works covering buildings and related other establishments as indicated on the drawings. All works shall be completely in conformity with the Rules and Regulations as stated below. 2.0. STANDARD CODE AND REGULATIONS FOR INSTALLATION
The installation in general shall be carried out in conformity with the Electricity Rules of the Govt. of Bangladesh (Indian Electricity Act and Rules as adopted in Bangladesh) and the 14th edition of the Regulation for Electrical Equipment of Buildings of the Institute of Electrical Engineers (London), hereinafter referred as 'I.E.E. Wiring Regulations' and the British Standard Code of practice for the relevant works. But where the under noted specifications differs from these rules and standards, the specifications written hereunder shall be followed. Any special requirement of the Electrical Inspector, Govt. of Bangladesh or the Power Development Board/Dhaka Electric Supply Authority or the Telegraph and Telephone Board or any other Legally constituted Authority shall also be complied with, at Contractor's cost within the Contract Price. 3.0. 3.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS The drawings related to the works indicate only the general arrangement of the electrical installation. Details of proposed departures due to actual field condition or other pause shall be submitted to the Engineer. for approval. The Contractor shall carefully examine the drawings and shall be responsible for the proper installation of materials, fixtures and equipment in each unit as indicated without substantial alteration. Climatic and Atmospheric Conditions :
3.2
The installations, equipment and materials shall be installed both externally and internally and shall therefore, be designed and built to give efficient and reliable service continuously at the normal voltage and current rating in the prevalent climatic and atmospheric conditions at the relevant site. 3.3 Specifications :
Materials required which are not covered by the detailed specifications shall be as recommended by the equipment manufacturer or in consistent with good practice and approved by the Engineer. 3.4 Drawings :
The drawings show the general arrangement of all circuitry, wiring, feeders, cables and race ways etc. however, where local conditions necessitate a re-arrangement shall prepare and submit for approval drawings of the proposed rearrangement. Because of the small scale of the drawings it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fitting and accessories which may be required. The Contractor shall carefully investigate the structural and finish conditions affecting all of his works and shall arrange such works accordingly, furnishing such fittings, access traps, inspection boxes and accessories as may be required to meet such conditions. The Contractor , if necessary shall prepare a shop drawing indicating the exact location of conduits and wiring for approval of the Engineer. 3.5 Cutting and Repairing :
The work shall be carefully laid out in advance and any cutting of construction shall be done only with the written permission of the Engineer. Cutting shall be carefully done and mending good the damages to the building as a result of cutting for installation, piping, wiring for equipment etc. shall be done by skilled mistries of the trade involved, at no additional expense to the Employer. 3.6 Protection of Fixture:
Conduit and pipe opening shall be closed with caps of plugs during installation. Fixture fittings and equipment shall be adequately protected against dirt, water and chemical or mechanical injury. At the completion of the work, fixture, materials and equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned and delivered in a condition satisfactory to the Engineer. 3.7 Notice :
The Contractor shall give all required notices to and maintain liaison with Electrical Inspector, Government of Bangladesh and to the Electric Supply Department of Power Development Board of the area of the work concerned or similar other organisations and any other legal Authority Regulating the electrical works or installation. 3.8 Execution and Superintendence :
The works shall be carried out only by licensed workman authorized by the Government or any other legal Authority set up for the purpose to undertake such works under the provision of the Indian Electricity Act. 1939 and Rules as adopted in Bangladesh and under the direct supervision of a whole time electrical supervisor having certificate of competency for the type of work under execution. Particulars along with a Photostat copy of the competency certificate of the electrical supervisor shall be submitted to the Engineer. before commencing the work. 4.0. APPROVAL AND LIST OF MATERIALS, FIXTURE AND EQUIPMENT
As soon as practicable and within 30 days after date of receipt of executed contract and before any materials fixtures or equipment are purchased, the contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval a complete list, in triplicate, of materials, fixtures and equipment to be incorporated in the work, together with the names and addresses of the manufactures and their catalogues numbers and trade names. The contractor shall also furnish other detailed information where so directed, under the various items. No consideration will be given to partial lists submitted from time to time. Approval of materials will be based on manufactures, published ratings. Any materials fixtures and equipment listed which are not in accordance with the specification requirements may be rejected, the product of any reputable manufacturer regularly engaged in the commercial production of equipment shall not be excluded no the basis of minor differences, provided all essential requirements of this specification relative to materials capacity and performance are met. The Contractor shall furnish a statement
giving a complete description of all points wherein the equipment proposed does not comply with the specifications. Failure to furnish such a statement will be in turreted to mean that the equipment meets all requirement of the specifications. Tear sheet of catalogues shall be furnished if such catalogues are not readily available to the Engineer. 5.0 AS-BUILT/RECORD DRAWINGS 5.1 As-Built/Record Drawings and Charts for Internal Electrification.
Before the installation is finally handed over to the Employer the Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Engineer for approval As-Built/Record drawings showing layout of all electrical fixtures and Boards and positions and layout of conduits and exposed wiring if any and cable runs with dimensions and full circuit details. If the Engineer finds that the As-Built Drawings are not complete in all respects and/or they contain errors, the Contractor shall do the corrections and resubmit to the Engineer, more than once if necessary, till the Engineer can approve the As-Built Drawings. A detailed circuit Chart shall be prepared, fitted in a durable frame and fixed in an approved position adjacent to the main distribution control gear. The installation shall not be considered complete till the As-Built Drawings free from incompleteness and errors are submitted to and approved by the Engineer and the Charts mentioned above are fixed in a satisfactory manner. 5.2 As-Built/Record Drawings for External Electrical Works
Before the installation is finally handed over to the Employer, the Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Engineer for approval As-Built/Record drawings showing all routes and depths below ground of all electrical cables, telephone cables. If the Engineer finds that the As-Built Drawings are not complete in all respects and/or they contain errors, the Contractor shall do the correction and resubmit to the Engineer for approval of the As-Built Drawings, more than once if necessary, till the Engineer can approve the As-Built Drawings. The installation shall not be considered complete till the As-Built Drawings free from incompleteness and errors are prepared and submitted by the Contractor to the Engineer and the Charts mentioned above are fixed in a satisfactory manner. Submission of As-Built/Record Drawings for all work is a pre-requisite for Contractor's claim for final payment for any work including Electrical Work. 6.0 PAINTING
Manufacturer All paints and primers shall be made by BERGER/approved best quality) Mending G.I. members Galvanization spoilt by welding shall first be mended by Epilux-4 zinc-rich primer, 2 Pack, (J65). Painting on G.I. members Galvanized iron members (after mending galvanization spoilt by welding, if any by Epilux-4 zinc rich primer (J65)) shall be coated with Wash primer 2 Pack, (J31) and yellow zinc chromate (J41) before the specified final paint is applied. G.I. Pipe Poles The final paint shall be 2 coats of Single Pack Aluminium (J04)
G.I. Pipes and accessories Below Ground The final paint shall be 2 coats of Epilux-5 Coal Tar Epoxy, 2 Pack, Black. Galvanised steel boxes If no paint is indicated, any damage to galvanization shall be repaired by Epilux-6 zinc-rich primer, 2 Pack, (J65). DB/SDB in 16 SWG sheet steel The final paint shall be 2 coats of Epilux-4, Enamel, 2 Pack, grey, (J33) over Epilux red oxide primer, 2 Pack, (J42). H.T. Panel, L.T. Panel, Power Factor Improvement Plant, Auto-Manual Change Over Panel and Auto-Mains Failure Panel in 14 SWG galvanised sheet steel Any damage to galvanisation in the Panel surface by welding or otherwise shall first be primer mended by Epilux-4 zinc rich primer (J65) followed by Wash Primer, 2 Pack, (J31) and Yellow Zinc Chromate Primer (J41). There after the final paint shall be applied in 2 coats of Epilux-4 Enamel, 2 Pack, Grey colour. Paint on non-galvanized mild steel members There shall be final paint of 2 coats of Epilux Enamel paint, 2 Pack (J33) over a coat of Epilux Red Oxide primer, 2 Pack, (J42). No Aluminium to be embedded in or to come in contact with concrete/plaster Since the metal aluminium is affected by alkalies present in cement, no aluminium conduits or accessories or any other aluminium body shall be embedded in concrete or used in positions where it may come in contact with cement products such as concrete and plaster. Standard Brick mentioned herein shall be 241x114x70mm in size and shall be first class with 150Kg/cm2 compressive strength on flat. All sand mentioned in different items, sand to be used in mortar for brick work and plaster and sand to be used as fine aggregate for plain concrete shall be clean and of F.M. 1.30 min. Sand to be used as fine aggregate in R.C. shall be clean and of F.M.2.30 min. Coarse aggregate for C.C and R.C shall be clean and be made from jhama bricks of 250 kg/sq.cm. compressive strength and graded 19mm down. Cement shall conform ASTM C150 Type 1. 7.0 EXCAVATING, TRENCH MAKING AND BACK FILLING 7.1 Excavating, trench making and back filling is as specified elsewhere later on. 8.0 WOODEN MEMBERS 8.1 Wood battens, angles, boards and boxes for surface wiring shall be best quality teak/garland wood. 9.0. 9.1 9.1.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS Concealed Installations Where condition is shown on the drawings or is otherwise specified as being concealed, such conduit may be embedded in structural slabs or in concrete fill laid on top of structure slabs or concealed within hollow spaces. Where embedded in structural slabs conduits shall not exceed 30mm trade size, unless there are specific identification to the contrary. In areas where the slab is less than 125mm thick, the overall diameter of the largest conduit shall not exceed one third of slab thickness.
9.1.2
All the conduit running through the boxes and columns shall be laid with the innermost reinforcement case with suitable effect in conduit so to make the outer surface of junction box cover for switch box edges flush with the finished surface level or beam of columns as approved. Care shall be taken when making concealed installation to see that adequate clearance is provided over the thickness elements such as coupling etc. so that fill or architectural finishes may be applied which will be smooth, flat and not subject to spalling or cracking. Raceways runs embedded in slab shall be spaced not less than three outside diameter centre to centre unless they are so coordinated with structures as not cause weakens. Exposed Installation Raceways or there wiring methods shall be exposed only : In specially assigned electric riser closets, shafts or switch board room. In mechanical equipment spaces. Where specially indicated on the drawing or otherwise with the expressed permission of the Engineer. Exposed raceways of there wiring method shall be run parallel to building, walls, columns lines etc. throughout. All exposed heavy conduits are to be fastened to masonry walls, floor or partitions, use of wooden plugs will not be permitted instead rowel plugs should be used. Metal saddles of approved type not more than 0.61M apart shall be used for fixing exposed conduit. Routing Every effort shall be made to route raceways or wiring therein so as prevent wiring from being subject to high ambient temperature condition. minimum clearance from heated pipes, ducts or surface such as breathings, flush etc. shall be maintained as follows : Crossing un-insulated pipes or ducts Crossing insulated pipes or ducts Running parallel to un-insulated pipes, ducts or surface Running parallel to un-insulated pipes, ducts or surface 75mm 25mm 900mm 150mm
9.1.3
9.1.4
9.2 9.2.1 a. b. c. 9.2.2 9.2.3
9.3 9.3.1
a. b. c. d.
9.3.2Regarding of any routing shown on the places, raceways or other wiring method shall not run exposed over a boiler or embedded in construction under a boiler unless special provisions for wiring through these specific high ambient temperature areas have been indicated. 9.3.3. Regarding or other wiring methods run in suspended ceiling may be installed as the draw, files, except that, where such raceways etc. and being installed prior information regarding the final layout of Square manner so as to minimize future conflicts. 9.3.4. Under no condition raceways or other wiring methods be installed in elevator shafts and hoistways. Where outlets are being provided for such items as tri cables, pit lights, run by lift etc. only the outlet boxes themselves shall be located within the confines of the shaft. Miscellaneous Requirements The installation of raceways or other wiring methods requiring the notching, cutting or drilling of structural elements shall coordinated with the other trades to ensure that no weakening of the structure is caused. When finishing or snaking raceways to set up for pulling in wires and cables, fish taps with ball types means shall be used.
9.4. 9.4.1
9.4.2.
9.5 9.5.1 b.
Wires and cables shall not be pulled into raceways until : a. The project has been progressed to such a stage as to not likely to injure electrical wires or cables.
The project has been progressed to a point where raceways are dry and moisture is no longer likely to get into them. Wires or cables shall be pulled into raceways utilizing a suitable brush, followed by an 85% diameter ball mended ahead of the wires or cables in the pulling assembly. The only permissible pulling lubricants is powdered soap-stones. Sufficient slack shall e left on all rooms or wires and cables to permit the proper connection of devices, equipment etc. Mounting Height Mounting height of outlet and fixtures shall be accordance with the following list of bottom line dimension above finished floors unless otherwise shown on drawings. a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k. l. m. n. Light and fan s switch broads Wall bracket light Socket outlet on wall Socket outlet above the lab table Telephone and Intercom Calling Bell outlets Calling Bell Indicator Electric Clock outlet Fire Alarm outlet Fire Alarm Bell Ceiling Fan Lamp for Operation Theaters Television Antenna outlet Ceiling suspended Fluorescent Light Fitting 225mm 2.60M 1.37M 2.44M 2.29M 1.07M 225mm 0.76M 2.44M 2.44M 2.44M 2.13M 2.60M from finish floor level on wall from finish floor level on wall from finish floor level on wall from finish floor level on wall from finish floor level on wall from finish floor level on wall from finish floor level on wall from finish floor level on wall from finish floor level on wall from finish floor level on wall from finish floor level on wall To ceiling with adjustable chord to increase the height of lamp. from finish level from finish level
c.
9.5.2. 9.5.3
9.6. 9.6.1.
9.7 9.7.1.
Stage Equipment Flood and spot light shall be with heat proof glass and mounting device shall have tilt up and tilt down slamping device. Curtain control motor, if incorporated, will be single phase 250V, 50 cycle with micro switch arrangements to start and stop at extreme ends. Dimmer shall be of single, if incorporated, will be single phase 250V, 10KVA, Electronic type. Stage control panel board shall be as per drawing. The public address system shall include : Amplifier of 100Watts with 4 Nos. microphone Jack 6 Nos. outlet for speaker.
9.7.2.
9.7.3. 9.7.4. 9.7.5 a.
b. c. d. B. 1. 1.1.
Microphone shall be highly sensitive with switching device. Microphone stand shall be adjustable type and electroplated. Connecting lead for Microphone and speaker shall be flexible shielded wire (coaxial type) MATERIALS AND THEIR INSTALLATION : PIPE (CONDUIT) / BATTEN WORKS PVC Pipe (Conduit) and Accessories
The work under this item comprises supply and installation of rigid, water grade PVC Pipe and accessories concealed or exposed in/on floors, roof slabs, walls and column where necessary in accordance with the drawings. PVC Pipes shall be of standard manufacture to meet the requirement of BS 3505 : 1968 but with thickness and weight per metre relaxed as per Table - 1. Pull boxes, circular boxes, bends, sockets, elbows etc., shall be of PVC or other similar inert synthetic materials, press fitted and then sealed with PVC solvent cement or by any other standard glue as prescribed by the manufacturer. Switch Boxes, and Junction Boxes shall be made of Steel 18 SWG and galvanised. Each junction box shall have an earth block where earth continuity conductor can be connected. The circular boxes shall be of PVC material with 19mm long hub and machine screwed cover. Pull wires, to draw the copper conductors through conduits shall be 16 SWG and galvanized. The conduits to be concealed in slabs shall be installed along with G.I. Pull Wire in between top and bottom bar immediately after placement of reinforcement bar as per applicable routing shown on the drawings. Conduits shall be tied with bars by 2 x 20 SWG G.I. Wire at 610mm c/c. Conduits over false ceiling will remain exposed. All these nonconcealed conduits are to be secured with concrete surface or timber frame by galvanized saddle or cleats at 381mm c/c. Concealed conduits in concrete wall or column surface shall be placed along with shuttering or form work before the concrete is poured in. Any change in routing necessitated because of job condition shall have prior approval of the Engineer. All such changes shall be marked on the plans as field records. Conduits in brick wall shall be installed during construction of wall. No chiselling in masonry wall shall be allowed without prior approval. PVC Pipes shall be bent either by using a hot box bending or by using flame. In any event bending radii shall be 6 times pipe size but 152mm minimum. The pipe bore in the bent portion shall remain truly circular and without reduction in diameter. The conduit run shall be continuous throughout its length and kept straight as far as possible. It shall have either horizontal or vertical run but shall never run at an angle. Routing of conduits in between walls at right angle shall not be allowed. All conduit run shall be kept at least 152mm clear of all service pipes. Where necessary it shall be rerouted or set out to maintain the specified separation. If there arise any difficulty in fulfilling the above condition, it shall be brought to the notice of the Engineer for solution/decision. In installing the conduits particular care shall be taken in cutting them to the proper lengths so that the ends will fit exactly in to the outlet boxes. After installation the open end shall be carefully plugged to prevent intrusion of plaster, dust, moisture etc. No inspection bends shall be used. At points where inspection is normally required steel boxes shall be used, in 18 SWG sheet fabricated by welding and galvanised. All conduits along with accessories required for complete installation shall be furnished and installed in a best workmanship manner. Measurement for payment shall be in linear metre of conduits installed in place for vertical or horizontal run as measured from the as-built drawings. The amount of completed and accepted work measured as provided shall be paid for at the contract price, per running metre which payment shall constitute full compensation for furnishing all materials equipment, tools and labour including storage, transportation, cutting, painting and supply of conduits and all
accessories, preparing as built drawings and providing all incidentals and consumable necessary to complete this item of work. TABLE - 1 Recommended specifications for P.V.C Conduits for Electrical Cables Nominal size, mm Outside dia Wall Thickness Approx. inside dia, mm Basic dimension, mm 13 16 20 25 30 40 50 60 75 100 152 1.2 1.2.1 Metal Conduits : Metal conduits shall conform to B.S. 4568 Part-1 & Part-2, or B.S. 31:1940, and shall be in 18 SWG (minimum) thick, either solid drawn or formed round and then welded. In the latter case, the bore shall be free from any burs. The conduits shall be black enamelled or galvanized. The steel shall be such that when bends are formed, the conduit should not break, crack or be deformed. Appropriate sample shall be submitted prior to installation of conduit. G.I. pipes 17 21.5 26.7 33.5 42.3 48.3 60.3 75.3 89.0 114.3 152.4 Tolerance, mm 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 Minimum wall thickness, mm 1.5 1.5 1.5 2 2 2 2.5 2.5 3.0 3.0 3.5 Tolerance, mm 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 14.0 18.5 23.8 29.5 38.2 44.2 55.3 70.3 82.8 108.3 110.00
1.2.2
The Galvanised Iron pipes to be used in the work shall conform to ASTM A 120-83 Standard, welded or seamless. The diameter of pipes mentioned in the Schedule of Item are nominal diameters. The pipes shall be coated with Zinc inside and outside by hot dip process and the Zinc used for the coating shall be any grade of Zinc conforming to the ASTM B-6. The weight of coating shall not be less than 550gm per square metre. Each length of the pipe shall be tested at the mill to the Hydrostatic Test pressure and Test pressure shall be 84 kg/cm2. The pipes shall also conform to the following tables. The pipe and accessories shall receive paint as specified in General Notes, General, - Painting.
Nominal Size
Outside diameter in
Wall thickness
Weight in kg/M
diameter in mm 12.7 19.1 25.4 38.1 50.8 63.5 76.2 101.6 152.4
mm 21.3 26.7 33.4 48.3 60.3 73.0 88.9 114.3 168.3
in mm 2.77 2.87 3.38 3.68 3.91 5.16 5.49 6.02 7.11 1.26 1.68 2.50 4.05 5.43 8.62 11.28 16.06 28.23
Conduits Network of each circuit shall be completely erected before the cables are drawn-in. The conduits run shall be continuous throughout its length, and kept straight as far as possible. It shall run either horizontally or vertically, and never at an angle. The conduits are to be properly tied with the re-bar at 914mm spacing using 20 SWG G.I. wire and spacers. [If the conduits are installed exposed on wall or over false ceiling those shall be secured and clamped with saddle mild steel flat bar 25 x 3mm at 914mm spacing using rawl plug as per direction of the Engineer. All conduit runs shall be kept clear of gas, air and steam conduits, and conduits of other services and for this purpose the conduits shall be either re-routed or set out with at least 75mm separation from other conduits and electrical conduits. If there arise any difficulty in ful-filling the above condition, it shall be brought to the notice of the Engineer for solution/decision. Conduits installed in wall shall be placed at the time of construction of the wall. No cutting in brick work shall be allowed without prior approval of the Engineer. 1.2.3 G.I. Bends
No inspection bends shall be used. At points where inspection is normally required steel boxes shall be used, in minimum 18 SWG sheet fabricated by welding and galvanised. Long radius preformed bends of same material and of required angle (22.5o, 45o, 60o and 90o) shall be used. G.I. conduit may be bent to required angle other than above only after obtaining express approval of the Engineer. The inside edges of all openings though which cables are intended to pass shall be smoothly rounded to prevent damage to the cables 1.2.4 Junction box, Pull box, Circular box and Switch box
Junction Box and Switch Box shall be shall be of minimum 18 SWG sheet steel and galvanised. Circular boxes, Pull Boxes and fittings shall be manufactured from unplasticized PVC copolymer material or other suitable non-metallic material. The fittings shall be homogenous and non-porous and shall be so designed and constructed as to have adequate mechanical strength and be able to withstand such rough uses as may be expected during and after installations. The inside and outside surfaces of the fittings shall be smooth, clean and uniform and free from projections and other defects. The interior of the fittings shall be free from obstruction which might cause abrasion of cables or which might interfere with the ready introduction or withdrawal of cables of the maximum size and number permitted to be enclosed by the conduit.
The inside edges of all openings, through which cables are intended to pass, shall be smoothly rounded in order to prevent damage to the cable. The minimum thickness of the Pull Boxes and Circular Boxes shall be 1.5 mm. All Switch Boxes shall have copper earth block 10 x 10 x 10mm in size with 5 drilled hole and 3 machine screws tapped for 1 thread per mm. 1.2.5 Conduit termination and fittings
At the end of a run, the conduit/G.I. pipe must terminate in a metal box, galvanised. When a conduit is terminated in a metal box (circular boxes excepted), a smooth bore brass/PVC bush or ring bush shall be used along with 2 brass locknuts of the following specifications : Conduit size in mm 19.1 25.4 Locknut Thickness in mm 4.36 4.76 Outside diameter in mm 28.58 31.75 No. of threads 3 3
Bush Conduit size in mm 19.1 25.4 1.2.6 G.I. pipe in floor Outside diameter in mm 22.22 28.58 8.73 10.72 4 5 Length in mm No. of Threads Length of smooth bore at end in mm 1.98 2.78
All G.I. Pipes (conduit) shall be installed having a slope of 1:100 towards the floor mounted pull box or cable duct so that condensate or leakage water drains out easily to the pull box or cable duct. For runs of more than one conduit in the same floor the direction of slopes of different conduits should be decided in such a systematic manner as to ensure a uniform drain out of the leakage. All socket joints shall be made watertight. No U-bend in floor shall be installed. All G.I. pipe and accessories shall be painted as specified in General Notes, General - Painting for G.I. pipe below ground. 1.3 1.3.1 1.3.2 1.3.3 Conduit Installation Cutting of conduits shall be done with a hacksaw in a neat manner without damage to the conduits. The ends of all conduits of shall be carefully reamed out free from burrs before installation and after threading. The ends of all conduit entering box, outlet box, cabinet etc. shall be provided with two brass lock nuts and male/female brass bushing of required size for 31mm dia conduits and larger ones, installed bushing shall be used. if bushing are of fully insulated type, an additional lock nut shall be used inside the junction box and cabinet before installing the bushing. Conduits entering main distribution feeder pull boxes shall be provided with insulated bushing regardless of sizes. Care shall be taken to see that all conduits run from a permanent and continuous ground return back to the service ground connection point. Conduits used on system which are entirely isolated from
1.3.4
1.3.5
1.3.6
the light and other distribution system shall be electrically continuous and grounded in an approved manner. 1.3.7 Where conduits terminate at equipment or location where a ground bus is provided, such as main switch boards (or pull boxes), sub-station transformer vaults etc. grounding bushings shall be provided for each conduits. such bushing shall be bounded to the ground bus by a 8 SWG dia (Min.) wire. Conduits exposed or embedded crossing building expansion or construction joints shall be furnished with approved brass expansion fittings and shall be provided flexible grounding bonds by passing the fittings. Wherever exterior underground conduits enter the building through sleeves or openings in walls they shall be securely and permanently plugged by means of approved sealing compound. During installation of conduits all unfinished runs and also termination in pull boxes, cabinets etc. shall be capped in an approved manner. Caps in cabinets etc. shall be left in place until building is ready for installation of conductor. Paper of wood plugs shall be used for this purposes. The conduits system shall be self-ventilating type and drainage outlet shall be provided at points in the installation where condensed moisture might cool, as per standard practice of the electrical trade. Joints
1.3.8
1.3.9
1.3.10
1.3.11
1.4
1.4.1 Conduits shall be coupled by means of running threads. Threadless coupling shall not be permitted. All joints shall be made up tight. 1.4.2 1.4.3 Where it is impossible to turn the conduit in coupling section together a Brick stone type coupling shall be used. Where conduit is to be embedded in concrete, threads shall be coated prior to coupling or making up with red leads. Wooden Batten Pins, Screws etc.
1.5
The batten shall be well seasoned polished teak wood and its thickness shall not be less than 12mm. The width of a batten shall be sufficient to accommodate all the cables and shall not be less than added diameters of the cables plus 10mm. All screws shall be counter-sunk brass wood screw and link clips shall be tinned brass or other non-corrosive metal with counter-sink holes. The wood pins shall be of well seasoned teak wood of approved best quality and shall have uniform flat heads and regular tapered sides. 2. CABLE WORKS Single core cable and conductors
2.1(a)
Single core low voltage cables and conductors shall be as per B.S. 6004, or B.S. 6346, or equivalent VDE specifications of copper conductor and PVC insulated conductors shall have 600/1000 volt grade of PVC insulation cables. All sizes over 2.5 mm2 shall be stranded. The cable lugs shall be of copper. Flexible cables shall be as per B.S. 600A unless otherwise specified. (b) Multicore cables
Multicore low voltage cables of copper conductor shall be PVC insulated PVC sheathed non-armoured direct burial type, termite proof, made and tested according to VDE 0472/6.65 and VDE 0472/3.69 for this type of installation, rated voltage being 600/1000V. Cable glands shall be made of brass having screwed locking system and sizes shall suit the cable glands. (c) Subscriber cables (Telephone)
The subscriber cables shall be suitable for laying underground and shall be made according to VDE 0816 of 0.6 sq.mm/0.8 sq.mm (as applicable) copper conductors, with PE (Polythene) insulated and core wrapping. The cables shall be tested (20oC) at voltage not less than 500V (rms) wire to wire and 2000V (rms) wire to shield with operating voltage of 150 volts (rms), shall have minimum insulationearch resistance (tested with min. 100V d.c.) of 5000M. ohm-km, and mutual capacitance of not more than 50mF/km (for 0.6 sq.mm)/50mF/km (for 0.8 sq.mm). (d) Installation Cables (Telephone)
The installation cables shall be suitable for exposed or concealed installation, of 0.6 sq.mm copper conductors, with PVC insulation and PVC sheath star quad formation, basic unit standing and core wrapping. The cables shall be tested (at 20oC) for voltage not less than 500V (rms) with operating voltage of 200 volts (rms) shall have minimum insulation resistance (tested with min. 100V d.c.) of 100m ohm-km and mutual capacitance of not more than 130V mF/km (at 800 Hz). 2.2 Cable in Conduits (G.I/PVC Conduit)
Generally, single core cable (non-sheathed) are to be installed in conduits. The conduit sizes shall be as specified in the drawings. It shall be ensured that cables are not scratched/damaged during pulling. For long lengths over 10m, pull boxes shall be used even if not indicated in the drawings. Cable shall not be drawn round more than two 90o bends (or their equivalent) between drawing-in-boxes, and no single bend shall be less than 90o. No cable pulling lubricant other than powdered soap stones shall be used and that after obtaining approval of the Engineer. 2.2.1 Cable bending radii
The internal radius of every bend in a cable shall not be less than the appropriate value stated below: Insulation Finish Overall Diameter Factor to be applied to overall diameter of cable to determining minimum internal radius of bend 3
Rubber or PVC (Circular copper or circular stranded conductors)
Non-armoured
Not exceeding 10mm
Exceeding 10mm but not exceeding 25mm Exceeding 25mm Armoured PVC (solid aluminium or shaped copper conductors) 2.2.2 Cable termination and joints Armoured or non-armoured Any Any
4 6 6 8
No termination or joints of cables shall be allowed except at switch boxes. Termination of cables upto 2.5mm2 shall be done by making a hook at the end, and for higher sizes, brass cable terminals shall be used. Tee-off joints in the cable to lighting point, switches etc. shall not be made. Looping in system of wiring shall be followed and the joints shall be made in the switch boards only. All PVC cables shall be terminated using brass cable glands of proper size. 2.2.3 Cables for Batten Wiring
These shall be flat twin core cable as per B.S. 6004 : 1969 of copper conductors, PVC insulated and PVC sheathed of 600/1000V rated voltage and where applicable, with earth continuity conductor.
2.2.3.1 Installation of wires and cables a) The maximum number of conductors in any conduit shall be as per drawing conforming with the regulations of I.E.E. No joints in the conductor will be made throughout the installation and looping system shall be followed. The conductor shall be tested for continuity and insulation before energizing and conform to the standard laid down by the local Engineering Authority and Institution of Electrical Engineer (England). Generally, single core cable (non-sheathed) are to be installed in metal conduits. The conduits sizes shall be as specified in the drawings. It must be ensured that the cables are not damaged during pulling. For long lengths, pull boxes must be used even if not indicated in the drawing Cables shall not be drawn round more than two 900 bend between drawingin-boxes and any single bend must not be less than 900 The cable up to 0.0258cm2 shall be solid conductor and therefore, jointing are to be done through porcelain connector and the connection shall be wound with PIB tape before placing in the boxes. Termination of cable termination must be used. Tee-off joints in the cable to light point, switches etc. should not be made Looping in system of wiring is to be followed for recessed and surface wiring and the joints are to be made in the switch boards only. Ass 3 to 4 core PVC cable shall be terminated using brass cable glands of proper size. Connection to switches
b)
c)
d)
2.3
The phase wire shall be connected to the switches and the neutral wire shall be kept solid in all switch connections. 2.4 Cable colour
Cables used shall have colour as stated below : Two wire single phase a.c. system Red, white or blue for phase line or switch wire, black for neutral and green for earth when flexible cords are used. Three wire two phase a.c. system Red for one phase. Black for common return. White for other phase. Three or four wire three phase a.c. system Red for first phase White for second phase Blue for third phase Black for neutral Two wire d.c. system Red for positive or switch wire Black for negative. For two wire final sub-circuits, whether a.c. or d.c. supplying lighting or power circuits, the neutral or "middle" wire shall always be black, and the phase or outer wire (no matter which phase it is connected to) shall always be
red. For lighting, the red wire shall always feed the switch, and a red wire shall always be used from the switch to the light. 2.5 Filled-in Trenches for laying cables
The size of cable trench shall be minimum 915mm in depth and 457mm in width for each cable to be laid. Where more than one cable is to be laid, the width is to be increased by 152mm for each extra cable. Trench digging shall not commence until all cables are procured and brought to site store. Excavation of trench bed may require shuttering and shoring of trench sides, bailing out water, and the trench bed shall be dressed, cleaned and levelled. This shall be followed by 152mm thick cushioning by sand of min. F.M. 1.0 in the bed over which the cables will be laid. After laying of cables first class bricks shall be placed as separators between the cables. Thereafter sand filling shall be done with sand of F.M. 1.0 upto 152mm over the top of the largest cable in the trench after which two layers of flat brick is to be placed along the length and breadth of the trench as a mechanical protection against injury and as a signal that a power cable is laid under the bricks. No covering of cable trenches shall however be done before inspection and approval by the Engineer. If the Engineer notices any damage to the cable or any other fault which requires remedy or replacement of the cable the Contractor shall do the needful promptly at his own cost. The rest of the trench shall be filled with earth, watered and rammed in 152mm layers. After installation of the cables, original ground conditions are to be restored, be it brick pavement, drains, concrete road or any other construction. All costs involved in mending good of the damages shall be fully borne by the Contractor. The Cables are to be placed in trenches with slight curve so that it can give way when the earth settles later on. Cables shall be laid into or out of the ground through PVC/RCC/G.I. Pipe of appropriate size decided by the Engineer. The length of the pipe over the ground shall be 1.2m. The cable route should be as direct as possible and must receive Engineer's approval before excavation. All cable runs shall be kept at least 610mm clear of gas, sewer, water and other services pipes in horizontal plane. Where necessary the cable run shall be re-routed to maintain the specified gap. Trenches for H.T. Cables shall be maintained at a minimum 610mm clear distance from an adjacent L.T. cable trench. All cable bends shall have a radius of not less than 24 times the overall diameter of the cable for armoured cables, and 20 times the diameter for non-armoured cables. But the radius shall not be less than twice the diameter of the cable drum in any case. Great care shall be exercised to avoid damage during handling of the cables and to prevent formation of "Kinks". The cable drums shall preferably be conveyed on wheeled cable-drum carriers and unrolled and laid directly from the drum carrier along the trench over rollers of approved construction. Carriage by trailers or trucks can be allowed if proper care is taken during unloading the drums and unrolling is done after placing the drum on jacks and spindles. Dragging the cables over the surface of earth along the trench shall not be allowed. The cables should be carried and unrolled in the direction indicated on the drums by the manufacturers. The cables shall be terminated at required locations and as directed by the Engineer. 152mm dia G.I. pipe (or other size approved by the Engineer for L.T. cables) shall be provided for all road and drain crossings. These pipes shall be laid direct in the ground without any sand bed, sand layer, brick, or cable covers. When trenches are left open overnight and where road is to be cut, the Contractor shall exhibit suitable danger signals such as banners, red flags and red lamps at his own cost. Temporary arrangement by placing wooden sleepers/sheet steel etc. across the road cutting for vehicular traffic are also to be made by the Contractor at his own cost. The Contractor shall be wholly responsible for any accident which may occur due to his negligence.
G.I. pipes of appropriate size and length shall be used to protect the cable from all sorts of mechanical injury, every time it climbs up/down the pole/steel structure. Cable terminals of appropriate type, size and capacity shall be used every time outdoor termination of cable is followed/preceded by bare overhead lines/Busbars/Terminals etc. All surplus earth shall be removed to the indicated places by the Contractor at his own cost. Any damage done by the Contractor to any other agencies during or as a result of cable laying operations shall be made good by the Contractor. 2.6. Cable in G.I. or R.C pipes in Road and Drain crossing
G.I. pipes/R.C. pipes whatever is applicable and as directed by the Engineer shall be provided for all road and drain crossing. These pipes shall be laid direct in the ground without any sand bed, sand layer, brick or cable covers. Cables shall laid out of or laid into the ground through G.I. pipe of suitable size as decided by the Engineer. The length of the pipes over the ground shall not be less than 1.2m and no extra cost shall be paid for such pipes. The exposed end of the pipes shall be sealed using PVC or wooden plugs. 2.7. 2.7.1 Cable works Cable Boxes
2.7.1.1 All types of cable and boxes shall be of cast iron and shall comply with latest Bangladesh Government Specification and as per drawing. All other accessories shall be approved type and design and shall be approved by the Engineer. 2.7.1.2 The excavation shall be 1.06M deep and 0.46M wide. The bed surface shall be free from any point sharp materials, Breadth of the trench shall be increased by 0.61M on a joint point. 2.8 Crossing road, pavement, culvert etc.
In crossing road or pavement, a hume pipe of suitable size shall be provided in the trench shall be covered with pre-cast slabs or blocks of sufficient strength to withstand the load over them. 2.9 2.9.1 Joint Cable While laying the cable it shall be so arranged that cables to be jointed overlap each other by about 0.46M to provide ample length for jointing. Metal serving and armouring shall be removed from both cable to conform to the dimension of the box. The lead sheath (if there by any) is than to be cut off from both cables to box dimension. The belt paper shall be removed to within 25mm of the lead sheathing at each and exposing the insulated core. The insulation shall be removed to the required length. All points shall be sweathed, wiped clean and properly insulated. At least 25mm clearance shall be allowed between the center of each pair or joints. A wad of impregnated tape shall be provided between each core and in tee joints, the armouring shall be properly bound and the box shall be replaced in the filling holes. Necessary tapping up shall be carried out after the compound has cooled. Cables are to be terminated with the cable glands or end box as the case may be with the cable lugs of appropriate size and ratings. 2.9.4 2.9.5 3. Markers shall be provided along the cable routes at each turning point of the trench. Markers shall be made of 3.125mm thick M.S. sheet welded to M.S. angle as shown in the drawing or shall be made of cast iron.
2.9.2
2.9.3
FEEDERS, LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE CIRCUITRY 3.1. Sizing and other pertinent data regarding main feeders, sub-feeders, branch feeders, operation at 600 Volts or less and any branch circuitry protected by different ratings, circuit breakers are fully delineated on the plans. All such feeders and circuitry shall be provided in accordance with the
indication on the plan and shall be connected for correct phase sequence and proper operation of the equipment served. 3.2. Each individual lap off a feeders which is called with multiple cables per phase shall be arranged so that all of the feeders are connected to the corresponding phase leg of the individual tap. 3.3. General circuitry operating at less than 600 Volts. and called for or indicated without specific details as to sizing etc., shall be understood to be lighting or less. Where lighting and appliance outlets are shown on the drawings without fully delineated circuitry such shall be
3.4.
3.5.
All lighting and appliance branch circuitry protected as 20 amp. or less shall be performed in accordance with the following ground rules unless there are specific indications to the contrary. Unless otherwise noted minimum conductor size shall be No. 16 SWG dia copper. Conductors for circuitry operating in the range of 230 to 250 Volts. to neutral and extending in excess of 61M from the point of supply to the last outlet or fixture tap, shall be No. 10 SWG dia copper throughout. Raceway sizes shall be adequate for the number of conductors contained as required by code. Unless otherwise noted, circuitry shall be multi-wise utilizing common neutrals arranged so that no neutral conductor acts as common wire more than one circuit conductor connected to the same phase leg of the supply system. Circuit shall be balanced on phases at supply point as evenly as possible. Except as hereinafter differently specified standard type of metallic outlet box shall be provided for each and every wiring device, lighting fixtures etc. Where more than one switch is shown on the plans or a single location their switches shall be gang-mounted to a single suitable outlet box. A switch and receptacle shall not be gang-mounted in a single outlet box unless the plans specifically indicate such a communication. Where buried-in-outlet boxes are required by code authorities to separate wiring devices wired off different phase legs of the supply system, to separate wiring of different voltage system or for other reasons, such barriers shall be provided at no additional cost. Under no condition shall any switch break any neutral conductor. Outlet boxes for switches shall be located at the strike side of doors, door swing indicated on plans are subject to field change. Outlet boxes for switches shall be located on the basis of the final door swing arrangement. Unless made accessibly by other means, boxes for recessed ceiling fixture be mounted near to the ceiling fixture. Final connection from outlet boxes to recessed ceiling fixtures shall be means of suitable flexible fixtures pigtails not less than 1.22M and not more than 1.83M long. In all cases enough slack shall be left in pig-tails to permit removal of fixtures from ceiling for inspection with disconnection. Where the specifications for drawing indicates no specific requirements as to the loading or connections of outlets in lighting and appliance branch circuit, the following maximum limitations shall be follows :
3.6. 3.7.
3.8. 3.9.
3.10. 3.11.
3.12.
3.13.
3.14
3.15. 3.16.
3.17. 3.18.
3.19.
No more that 12 outlets of 1650 watts shall be applied to any single 10 amps circuit and no more than 24 outlets of 400 total watts to any single 20 amps circuit in the range of 230 to 250 volt to neutral. 3.20. At any location where lighting and appliance branch circuitry is provided extending from a flush mounted panel board to a suspended ceiling immediately above, at least 4 (four) 25mm empty conduit shall be provided (in addition those required for active circuitry) to permit future wiring
3.21.
Emergency wiring shall be run in a completely separate raceway conduit system containing no wires of " Normal" lighting and appliance.
4.
EARTH CONTINUITY CONDUCTOR WORKS
The Conductor shall be electrolytic copper of 100% conductivity at 20oC (68o F) (International Annealed Copper standard) with weight resistivity of 0.15328 ohm-gram per sq.m. at 20oC (68o F) and density of 8,890 kg/m3 for meeting the requirements of B.S. 636 : 1969 or its metric adoption. The earth continuity conductor and earthing lead shall run in accordance with the drawings and direction, and all metal fittings shall be earthed with earth continuity conductors. All the earth continuity conductors from the various circuits, sockets, etc. shall be connected to the earthing block located near the DB/SDB. The earth continuity conductors shall be of sizes as stated in the drawings. All DB/SDB/SB shall be interconnected with earth continuity conductors. The earth continuity conductors shall be drawn along with the cables and no joint shall be allowed from earthing block to the respective earth point. Light and fan points, excepts where indicated otherwise, shall not be earthed. 5. LIGHT FITTINGS AND FIXTURES
The light fittings shall be constructed as per schedule, and shall comply with the relevant requirements of applicable B.S. including B.S. 4533. The chokes, if applicable, shall comply with the requirements of B.S. 2818, and shall be Thorn, or of equivalent quality and shall have appropriate power factor correction capacitor (250V 3.5MF for 20W and 40W tubes, 5MF for 65W tubes, and 7MF for 80W tubes if used with Thorn chokes : for other chokes of approved best quality, the improved p.f. shall not be less than 0.90). The starters for fluorescent lights shall be 91W lamp type and shall have built in radio interference suppressor capacitor. All incandescent light fittings, except where specifically stated other wise, shall have un-switched brass holders for BS 22/25/26 lamp caps complying with B.S. 52 : 1963. Fixtures near combustible materials shall be so constructed or installed, or equipped with shades or guards that combustible materials shall not be subjected to temperature in excess of 90oc. Appropriate samples of light fittings with chokes and starters shall be submitted prior to installation. The light fittings shall be installed in accordance with the applicable fittings layout drawings. All pendant fittings shall be supported from brass ceiling base plate with at least 9.52mm screw-hub. The location of outlets shown on diagrammatic wiring plans shall be considered as approximate and it shall be incumbent upon the Contractor, before installation of outlet boxes, to study all pertinent drawings and obtain precise information from the architectural schedule, scale drawings, large scale and full size details of finished rooms and approved shop drawings of other trades. It shall be understood that any outlets may be relocated at a distance not exceeding 4.57m from the location shown in the drawings. In centering outlets, due allowance shall be made for overhead piping ducts, window and door trim, variations in thickness of furring, plastering etc. as erected, regardless of whatever is shown on small scale drawings. Outlets incorrectly located shall be properly relocated at the Contractor's own cost. 6. FANS
Materials, assembly and performance shall conform to BSTI standard. Appropriate samples shall be submitted prior to installation of the fans and fan clamps. 6.1 Fan Hook
The U-type fan hook shall be made of 15.87mm dia mild steel rod as per drawings. 6.2 Ceiling Fan
Ceiling fans shall be of capacitor type, A.C. 240V, single phase 50 Hz, complete with suspension rod of required length, canopy and shall be constructed in accordance with applicable B.S. The ceiling fan shall be of "Brand and Make" shown in schedule of Items. 6.3 Wall Mounted/Pedestal/Exhaust Fan
The Wall Mounted/Pedestal/Exhaust Fan shall be as per schedule and shall be constructed in accordance with applicable B.S. The fan hook shall be provided during slab casting as per schedule. The fan hook shall be secured in place during the casting. The fan shall be installed in accordance with the applicable fan layout drawings. Circular box with ceiling rose for fan outlet shall be at the centre of the clamps, as detailed in the drawings. Fans shall have the following installation height except where indicated otherwise : Ceiling fan bottom Exhaust fans (top edge of fan i/c cover) Wall fan blade end 7. 7.1 : : As close to ceiling as possible 2.58m from the floor. : 2.58m from the floor
DISTRIBUTION BOARD/SUB-DISTRIBUTION BOARD DB/SDB Boxes
The DB/SDB boxes shall be as per schedule and shall be safety dead front fixed type having circuit breakers and shall be designed for operation on a 240/415V, 50 Hz, 3 phase, 4 wire system. The panels shall have the phases clearly marked and where required shall have solid neutral buses. The panels shall be constructed with 16 SWG mild steel sheets as per schedule and shall comply with relevant requirements of applicable B.S. including: B.S. 4649, where applicable with standard concentric knockout of required size all around. The Boards shall be painted as per General Notes, General, Painting. The colour of paint shall be as decided by the Engineer. The panels shall be mounted directly on frames. The door is to be provided with flush lock and handle. All doors are to be keyed alike. All hinges shall be concealed. 7.2 Bus-Bar
Bus-Bar shall be of the laminated type, constructed of hard rolled copper each part being finished fitted and bolted together using electroplated steel bolts for assembling. Bus-Bars shall be constructed on the basis of 1.24 Amp per sq.m. cross section metal bars which shall have same width as outside lugs. O Spacing
The minimum distance bars, metal parts, bus-bar, etc. shall not be less than what is specified below : Opposite polarity where mounted in the same surface Not over 250V 31.75mm Not over 600V 50.80mm 7.3 Opposite polarity where held free in air 19.05mm 25.40mm 12.7mm Live parts to ground
Conductors and bus-bars shall be located as to be free from physical damage and shall be held firmly in place. The arrangement of bus-bars and conductors shall be such as to avoid overheating due to inductive effects.
The Board shall be installed in accordance with applicable layout drawings. Minimum height to bottom of the Boards from the floor level shall be 610mm maximum height of any circuit breaker/switch shall be 1.83m from the floor level. The location of DB/SDB shown on diagrammatic wiring plans shall be considered as approximate and it shall be incumbent upon the Contractor, before installation of DB/SDB to study all pertinent drawings and obtain precise information from the architectural schedule, scale drawings large scale and full size details of finished rooms and approved shop drawings of other trades. It shall be understood that DB/SDB may be located at a distance not exceeding 40cm from the location shown on the drawings. In centering DB/SDB due allowance shall be made for piping, ducts, window and door trim, variations in thickness of furring, plastering etc. as erected, regardless of whatever is shown on small scale drawings, DB/SDB located incorrectly shall be properly relocated at Contractor's own cost. 7.4 Meter Board
All meters and cut outs are of ratings given in schedule fixed in 16 SWG sheet steel box with locking arrangement The box must be hammer painted. The materials shall be submitted to the Authority/Engineer.. 8. CEILING ROSE
The ceiling rose shall be moulded plastic of approved best quality. Wherever the ceiling rose shall be used it shall be installed as near as possible to the fittings. For ceiling fans, these shall be installed at the centre of the hook. 9. MCB/MCCB
The MCB/MCCB shall be quick-make, quick-break type, and shall have inverse time limit characteristics with instantaneous magnetic trip elements functioning on overloads over the normal operating range. All circuit breakers shall be 'trip-free'. Ratings and frame sizes of breakers shall be in accordance with schedule. All lugs must be of the solderless mechanical type. The MCB must comply with B.S. 3871 : Part-1 (1965) category M4 (5A-60A). Rated voltage 240/415V A.C. 50 Hz, interrupting capacity 4000 amp, capable of providing overload and short circuit protection, through thermal magnetic trip actions respectively : temperature rating, 40oC tropicalized (moisture-fungus corrosion treated), with contacts of silver alloy : terminal capability upto 70 mm2 wire. The breakers shall be designed manufactured and tested in accordance with B.S. 3871 part-2 or equivalent having the following short circuit rating with overload and short circuit protection with thermal and magnetic tripping action and temperature rating 40o C, tropicalized (moisture fungus corrosion treated) termination capability upto the requirement : 5A 5A 10A 80A 200A 400A 600A 10. SWITCH WORKS The flushed snap plate/grid switches shall be vertical single pole (1-way/2-way) 5A A.C. architrave rocker operated switches white in colour, to B.S. 3676: 1963, complying with the test requirements for inductive, fluorescent or resistive loads specified, and satisfy the best requirements for three types in fluorescent lamp circuit, upto the ratings of these switches as set out in B.S. 3676 amendment 3, 1969. The switches shall have minimum clearance of 3mm between the contacts, and a similar minimum creepage distance. Flush dimmer switch/Fan to to 100A to to to 70A TP 300A 500A to 60A SP TP TP 14KA TP TP 4KA 5KA 10KA SYM at 230V A.C. SYM at 480V A.C. SYM at 480V A.C.
SYM at 480V A.C. 30KA 42KA 85KA SYM at 480V A.C. SYM at 480V A.C. SYM at 480V A.C.
1200A TP
speed controller white in colour to BS5518: 1977 & BS800 : 1977 or relevant IEC standard complying with test requirement for induction or resistive load specified. All contacts shall be faced with pure silver/silver-cadmium oxide alloy. The switch operating member shall pivot independently of the rocker, making the speed of `make and break' independent of the speed at which the rocker is operated. Terminal capability : minimum 2 x 2.5 mm2 conductors for each. Appropriate samples shall be submitted prior to installation of switches. Switches shall be installed on switch board or otherwise as per drawings. 11. SWITCH BOARD/DIMMER/FAN SPEED CONTROLLER BOARD WORKS Switch boards and/or fan dimmer boards shall be as per schedule and shall have plate switches and/or fan dimmer. Switch boards shall have copper earthing block of appropriate size. The switch boards and fan dimmer boards shall be installed on wall at a height of 1372mm from the floor if not specified otherwise, and at locations shown in applicable layout drawings. The phase wire shall be connected to the switches and the neutral wire shall be kept solid in all switch connections. The earth continuity conductor (ECC) shall be connected to the earth point inside the switch board. The approved size galvanised steel boxes shall be installed at the time of construction of the wall to avoid chasing in wall. The location of board shown in diagrammatic wiring plans shall be considered as approximate and it shall be incumbent upon the Contractor, before installation of switch board/regulator board boxes,to study all pertinent drawings and obtain precise information from the architectural schedules, scale drawings, large scale and full size details of finished rooms and approved shop drawings of other trades. It shall be understood that any outlet may be relocated at a distance not exceeding 4.5M from the location shown in the drawings. In earthing outlets, due allowance shall be made for piping, ducts, window and door trim, variations in thickness of furing, plastering, etc. as erected, regardless of whatever is shown on small scale drawings. Switch boards, and other boards located incorrectly shall be properly relocated at Contractor's own cost. 12. (i) EBONITE/ACRYLIC/FORMICA SHEET Ebonite Sheet
Paper impregnated and press fitted soacked with insulating oil from the Ebonite sheet to be used for switch board, DB/SDB cover. It is a Electrical insulating material and have heat insistent quality. Available in market in Down, Deep brown and bitter chokolate colour leaving different thickness. For switch board 3mm thick sheet will serve the purpose. (ii) Acrylic Sheet
Polyvinyl base plastic sheet is available in market in trade name of Acrylic sheet. It can also be used for switch board cover. It is got no insulating on heat resisting quality but available in different thickness and different colour. For switch board 3mm thick sheet with same the purpose and beauty. (iii) Formica Sheet
The Formica sheet shall be 3mm thick of approved colour shall be installed on switch board on otherwise mentioned. It has got heat resisting quality. 13. SWITCH SOCKET - OUTLETS (ROUND PIN)
All switch socket outlets, except the shaver sockets, shall be round pin type, white in colour, conforming to B.S. 5733:1979 or relevant IEC Standard. All mouldings shall be made from aminoplastic urea moulding powers to B.S. 1322: 1950 and shall possess high scratch resisting qualities. These shall be supplied with counter sunk cadmium plate fixing screws and mounted in 18 SWG galvanised sheet steel shall be painted as per General Notes, General, -Painting, having brass earth point as per drawings and direction.
The socket/MCB/MCCB shall be installed on wall with lower end of the face plates at height and locations shown in applicable layout drawings.
The fixing of the units on the outlets boxes shall be by means of flat head cadmium plated screws. The flat head of the screw shall be sunk in the plates so as to finish flush with the surface of the cover. The mounting heights of the outlets shall be as shown in the drawings. The earth wire shall be connected to earth point of the boxes of the 3rd pole of the 3-pin sockets, 2-pin socket outlets are for television, shavers, calculator etc. 14. CALLING BELL Electrical calling bell should be of Bugger on Ding Dong sound type. The working voltage of the bell coil will be 240V A.C. The body of the Bell should be of plastic on Acrylic. Separate Board of plastic sheet with brass holder and 40W Electric bell would be used in service with the Bell. Separate calling Bell push are to be used on board as per drawing. 15. EARTHING DEVICE (i) Earth electrode
The pipe earthing electrode shall be buried below ground level, as per schedule by tube-well sinking method. The earthing lead from the DB to the main earthing electrode shall be installed in G.I. pipe of specified diameter. The terminal connected to the earthing electrode shall use a copper clamp of 203x38x6.35mm size for making the connection. a) Pipe Electrode (where applicable)
The earthing inspection pit shall be constructed as per schedule and direction. The pit shall have well formed regular sides. Curing for the R.C, shall be for 4 weeks, and for C.C., brick work and plaster shall be 2 weeks. (ii) Earthing Lead
Earthing lead shall consist of copper conductor as per schedule. All terminal lugs shall be of solderless mechanical type of tinned copper and nut-bolts of brass. The earthing leads from the earth electrode shall be connected to the brass bar of test point. A double run of specified tinned copper conductor shall be brought out as earth lead for the earth electrode through G.I. pipe from the electrode and connected to the brass bar. There shall no joint in the copper earth lead. All earthing lead shall follow the shortest and most direct route to earth electrodes and sharp bends and joints shall be avoided. The earthing leads shall be connected to the earth electrode as per drawings. The joints shall be made mechanically strong and electrically continuous with minimum of resistance. Earthing lead shall consist of copper conductor as per specification given in Art 2.03a. All terminal lugs shall be of copper and nut-bolts of brass. (iii) Earthing Block
The earthing block shall be of solid electrolytic copper, cast and machined, of size as per schedule having at least 10mm dia drilled, holes for accommodating the terminals of the earth continuity conductor. Requisite number of brass nuts and bolts shall also be provided. (iv) Earth Inspection Pit
Bricks used shall be 1st class. Only approved best quality cement shall be used. Jhama brick khoa for R.C.C. cover shall be 25mm down graded (upto 6mm) and shall be washed clean before casting, 8mm dia M.S. rod @ 25mm c/c, with two 9.5mm dia, M.S. hook (of 50mm diameter) shall be provided in the cover slab. (v) Earth Loop Resistance
The maximum earth loop resistance from any point in the installation including earthing lead to the earthing electrode shall not exceed the resistance specified in the schedule, or that indicated by the Engineer. The Contractor shall ensure that the leads are efficiently bonded to all metal works other than the current carrying parts, so that the above resistance level is not exceeded. It will be the duty of the Contractor to
provide earth tester for test of installation in presence of the authorised representative of the Engineer, and submit earth test report to the Engineer for approval. 16. LIGHTNING PROTECTION 16.1 Air-Terminals
Air-terminals shall be of copper of grade required for commercial electrical work, generally designated as being of 98 percent conductivity when annealed. The size and shape of the air-terminal shall be as per drawings and schedule. Air-terminals shall be clamped with the building as per drawings and in manner that there is no possibility of overturning. Where necessary, additional braces, permanently and rigidly attached with the building, shall be used. On mortar and brick work, all holes shall be made with proper tools, such as a Rawl bits, and shall be made in brick rather than in the mortar joint. All air-terminals shall be installed in a manner to bring the tip not less than 300mm above the object to be protected. 16.2 Roof Conductor
Roof conductors shall be made of copper of grade as specified in Art. 12. Roof conductors shall be continuous and without any joint between terminations. All terminations shall be permanent, both electrically and mechanically. Where jointing in a conductor is absolutely unavoidable it shall be made after express consent of the Engineer. The joint shall be mechanically strong and well made and provide adequate electrical conductivity, which shall be secured by a contact area not less than double the conducting cross-sectional area of the conductor.
conductor runs shall preserve a downward or horizontal course. The conductor shall be securely attached to the building by means of fasteners at intervals not exceeding 1.2m, and shall be embedded under roof finish or concealed in plaster. Fasteners shall have cross section not less than 14 SWG and shall be made of copper. 16.3 Down Conductor
The down conductor shall be continuous and shall be installed as indicated in the schedule. 16.4 Test Point
The test point shall be made as per schedule and drawings. The brass bar assembly shall be well-formed and shall be without filling. The conductor terminals shall be provided with tinned copper lugs of size as detailed in the drawings. The test point shall be installed during construction of the building wall and made flush with the outside walls finish. Copper lugs shall be press-fitted with the conductor terminals with crimping tools, or shall use cast brass lug-block with brass nuts. The lug shall be bolted with the brass-bar by means of brass nuts and bolts. 17. 17.1. Danger Plate The danger plate shall be displayed in each pole with red pattering on white back ground. The lettering shall be in English and Bengali stating " DANGER", "CAUTION" and " PRESSURE". The size of the plate will be 250mm x 150mm x 3.175mm of M.S. plate and the size of letter will be 38mm in height. Non - Climbing Device Non - climbing device of flat iron bar welded with ring from spike as per drawing shall be in each pole.
17.2.
17.3. 17.4
17.5.
Barbed wire device may also be used covering 50mm space of the pole as per direction of the EMPLOYER/ CONSULTANT. Guard Wires 18.1 Safety device, cradle guards or other approved method shall be provided in crossing of the aerial line against the possibility of coming into contract with each other and so that no broken wire can fall dead. The guard wires or the cradle shall be of the size so that it can carry the weight of the broken line and withstand the mechanical pressure of the fallen wires. ______________________________ SIGNATURE OF THE TENDERER
18.
Technical Specification Works, Page No. 1
SPECIFICATION OF WORKS
A. CIVIL WORKS
1.
EARTHWORK IN EXCAVATION IN FOUNDATION TRENCH INCLUDING REFILL The item shall include earthwork in all kinds of soil including slushy soil; stabilising the sides of excavation by shuttering, shoring, waling, bracing etc. and all dewatering works necessary to keep the excavation dry, the stabilising and dewatering work being continued till the concrete and/or masonry work within the excavation is completed.
The item shall also include removal of Temporary Works from out of the excavation and refilling the excavation (Payable under separate item) after the concrete and/or masonry work within the excavation is completed, the materials for refilling being such portion of spoils of excavation as are suitable and approved by the Architect supplemented if necessary, by local sand of minimum F.M. 0.70 or by imported earth. If local sand or imported earth is used for refill it will be payable under a separate item.
The item shall also include the work of conveyance of surplus spoils of excavation upto a distance of 153M. measured from the outline of the building and depositing them in uniform layers in the low-lying areas surrounding the building.
Earthwork in excavation shall not be commenced before the pillars marking the centre lines and Bench Marks bearing known levels are checked by the Consultant.
Extreme care shall be taken that the bottom level of the excavation never lower than that required by the Drawings. 5mm depth shall be saved during the mass work; this 50mm material shall be removed and final beds shall be exposed not more than 12 hours before being topped by masonry/concrete work.
If the Contractor over-excavates in depth beyond the required level, the excess depth shall be refilled by 1:5:7 concrete at Contractor's own cost.
All loose materials and residue of foreign materials shall be removed before masonry work or concrete casting is commenced.
In any precious material or any object of archaeological interest is discovered during the excavation, attention of the Employer shall be drawn to it.
In case any utility line is found to lie in or traverse the soil included in the excavation, the lines shall be protected from injuries or damages due to strikes from excavation tools or due to loss of continuous support. Attention of the Employer shall be drawn to the presence of utility lines and measures shall be taken by the Contractor, without additional cost to the Employer, to support them till all works below ground are completed.
2.
PILE WORK 2.1 Description
This work shall consist of construction of reinforced concrete cast-in-situ bored vertical or inclined piles for abtitments/pier(s) of structures at different locations in accordance with the details shows on the drawings and to the requirements of these specifications. The contractor shall undertake at the actual location of such piles foundations, sub-soil investigations in accordance with these specifications prior to start of the work of pile foundation.
The prevailing soil conditions indicate that no permanent steel easing is required. However, if the method of pilling chosen by the Contractor requires permanent steel casing, this shall be executed as described below at Contractor's own cost. No additional payment shall be made for this.
The pile boring shall be, carried out using a temporary steel casing bored to the pile toe or to a level approved by the Engineer. The temporary easing shall be withdrawn.
Under certain circumstances the Contractor may be permitted to bore all or part of tile pile without easing under water or using drilling fluid to stabilise the borehole as referred to in this section below.
The piles shall be concreted and reinforced to resist pile loads and Horizontal forces on the pile caps according to the Drawings and these Specifications.
2.2.
Materials
2.2.1
Steel Casing
This part of the Specification deals with the permanent steel casing. For steel easing used during the boring of the pile see section below.
The steel of the easing shall conform to AASHTO Standard Specifications M 183-79 (ASTM A36) or equivalent.
The minimum wall thickness of the permanent steel easing shall be 10mm. The minimum length shall be from 10 cm above the bottom of the pile cap to 5 metre under the river bed or into firm strata. If the permanent easing is used in the boring operation or if the handling and transport require a greater thickness to avoid deformation or buckling, the increased wall thickness shall he provided by the Contractor at his own expense.
The steel easing shall be furnished in appropriate lengths and the joints shall be approved by the Engineer.
The easing shall be handled and stored in a in a manner that shall prevent buckling and other deformation as well as accumulation of dirt, oil and paint. When placed in the work it shall be free front dirt, oil, grease, paint, mill scale and loose or thick rust.
The outside surface of the permanent easing of piles of piers shall receive two coats of anticorrosion bitumen type paint for a maximum depth of 125mm from the underside of the pile cap. The paint shall be approved by the Engineer and its application shall follow the manufacturer's instructions.
2.2.2
Concrete
The concrete shall conform to Section of these Specifications. Cement type 1 shall be used and the characteristic cylinder strength shall not be less than 25 N/mm2. Concrete placed under water or drilling mud by tremie shall have a cement of not less than 350 kg/ m3.
The density and consistency of the concrete shall be conform to the tremie casting method and the maintenance of sufficient workability (slump) of the concrete during the casting, including reasonably calculated delays, shall be secured by a approved design mix. (including the necessary retarders and plasticisers), which is tested by trial mixes prior to the pile construction.
All relevant concrete properties such as slump, time of setting, temperature and strength shall be measured and defined during the trail mixes.
2.2.3 boreholes:
Reinforcement The reinforcement shall be complied with if bentonite mud is sued to stabilize the
(a)
Supply
A certificate shall be obtained by the Contractor from the manufacturer of the bentonite powder, showing the properties of the consignment delivered to the site. This certificate shall be made available to the Engineer at least 4 weeks prior to its' use. The properties to be given by the manufacturer are the apparent viscosity range (in centipoise) and the gel strength range for solids in water.
Any other material for the drilling fluid shall be approved by the Engineer.
(b)
Mixing
Bentonite and any other materials shall be mixed thoroughly with clean water to make a suspension which shall maintain the stability of the pile excavation for the period necessary to place concrete and complete the construction thereof.
Where saline or chemically contaminated ground water occurs, special precautions shall be taken to modify the bentonite in fresh water so as to render it suitable in all respects for the construction of piles.
(c)
Tests
The frequency of testing the drilling fluid and the method and procedure of sampling shall be determined by the Engineer prior to the commencement of the work. The frequency may subsequently vary depending on the consistency of the results obtained. the control tests shall cover the determination of density, viscosity, gel strength and pH values.
The Contractor shall supply all equipment and experienced operators required to carry out tests on the drilling mud. No additional payment shall be made for these tests which shall be considered as an essential part of the drilling operations.
2.2.4
Length of piles
The basic length of pile and its diameter is shown on drawings. The final length shall be decided by the Engineer on the basis of the results of initial load test on piles and on the basis of actually boring data observed oil site. Test piles shall be installed as directed by the Engineer at selected locations at each bridge site.
2.2.5
Method
2.2.6.
General Pile type and construction methods shall ascertain that the pile shaft shall not be weakened by contamination of the concrete by sectional reduction, by washing out of cement, by breaking, pulling of temporary casings or in any other way, including the construction of neighboring piles.
a)
Assumed Procedure The following construction procedure has been assumed in the tender design. Final construction procedure shall be as approved by the Engineer prior to the start of the piling operations.
i)
Place permanent steel casing, if required, in position and embed casing toe into river bed or firm strata. If no permanent steel casing is specified a sufficient length of temporary steel casing shall be used to stabilise the upper part of the borehole.
ii)
Bore and excavate inside the steel casing down to casing to level, or an approved level, continue excavation to final pile tip level using either temporary casing under - water or approved drilling mud. Water level inside casings shall at all times be at least 50mm higher than outside the casings.
iii)
All mud and/or sedimentation shall be carefully cleaned from the bottom of borehole.
iv)
Place reinforcement cage, inspection pipes etc.
v)
Place under water concrete or drilling fluid continuously by use of the tremie method.
vi)
Withdraw the temporary boring casing concurrently with concreting to the instructed level.
vii)
After hardening, the top section of the concrete pile shall be removed to reach sound concrete.
b)
Approval of Construction Method
In the tender, the Contractor shall describe the construction method he proposes, including information on boring equipment, materials, methods of work, control of quality and bearing capacity and, if any, the name of the Sub-contractor. The Contractor shall submit references from similar jobs carried out by him or by his Sub-contractor.
During contract negotiations tile Contractor shall submit all requested supplementary detailed information in writing.
After the Contract has been awarded to the Contractor, he shall prepare a detailed programme and a establish a procedure for the pile construction in accordance with the above information for the Engineer approval.
The detailed programme shall contain all information on materials, equipment, methods of work etc.
The Engineer's approval shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility for the pile construction.
No boring equipment or materials shall be imported before the Contractor has received the Engineer's approval in writing.
2.2.7
Setting Out Piles
The Contractor shall verify the easing position for each pile during and immediately after placing tile casing and submit the final location for the approval of the Engineer.
2.2.8
Diameter of Piles
The diameter of a pile shall be not less than the specified diameter. 2.2.9 Tolerances
The centre of the completed pile at the cut off level shall not deviate more than 10 cm from the theoretically correct position shown on the drawings. The inclination of the vertical pile shall not deviate more than 1% from vertical. The Contractor shall provide suitable equipment such as an inverted pendulum, to cheek the verticality of the boreholes during drilling and prior to the concreting.
2.2.10. Boring
a)
Method of excavation shall be proposed by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer. Water or air jetting for boring of the piles shall not be allowed.
b)
Boring Near Recently Cast Piles
Piles shall not be bored close to recently casted piles which contain non-hardened concrete. Boring and excavation for a pile shall not be commenced until 24 hours after completion of any pile within a radius of 6.0M.
c)
Temporary Casing
Temporary casing of approved best quality or an approved alternative method shall be used to maintain the stability of pile excavations which might otherwise collapse.
Temporary casing shall be free from significant distortion. They shall be of uniform cross-section throughout each continuous length. During concreting they shall be free from internal projections aid encrusted concrete which might prevent the proper formation of piles.
d)
Stability of Pile Excavation Using Drilling Fluid.
Where a borehole is formed without casing under water or using drilling fluid for maintaining the stability of a boring, the level of the water or fluid in the excavation shall be maintained so that water fluid pressure always exceeds the pressure exerted by the soils and external ground water. The water or fluid level shall be maintained at a level not less than 2M. above the level of the river water level or any artisan pressure level.
In the event of a rapid loss of water or bentonite suspension from the pile excavation, the excavation shall be backfield without delay aid the instructions of the Engineer shall be obtained before excavation at that location is resumed.
e)
Disposal of Excavated Material
No excavated material shall be dumped into the river or any connecting. Excavated material shall be removed from site and dumped at an approved location. The Contractor shall be fully responsible for costs involved in removing the excavated material to spoil.
f)
Pumping from borehols
Pumping from a borehole shall not be permitted unless a easing has been placed into a stable stratum which prevents the flow of water from other strata in significant quantities into the boring, or unless it can be shown that pumping will not have a detrimental effect on the surrounding soil or property.
g)
Obstructions
Where boulders or other obstructions render it impossible to bore the pile, excavation operations inside pile easing to remove obstructions shall be carried out as directed by the Engineer. The removal of these obstructions is deemed to be covered in the contract price.
h)
Unexpected Ground Conditions
The Contractor shall report immediately to the Engineer, any circumstances which indicates that, in the Contractor's opinion, the ground conditions differ from those expected by him from his interpretation of the site investigation reports and his subsoil investigations.
i)
Boring Records
During the boring of the pile the Contractor shall compile a boring log indicating depths and types of the various soil layers encountered. Disturbed samples sisal be submitted to the Engineer if requested.
The Contractor shall take provisions for carrying out sampling and tests to check soil strengths. The cost of the sampling and testing shall be included in the contract rates.
j)
Final Pile Toe Level
The final pile toe level shall be as indicated on the Drawing or as instructed by the Engineer after due consideration of the Contractor's proposals, boring logs and test results.
k)
Inspection and Cleaning Bottom of Excavation
The time between final excavation and bottom cleaning and the start of concreting shall he reduced as much as possible and shall not exceed 6 hours. To achieve this, the final 2M of excavation shall not start until all preparations for cleaning, reinforcing and concreting are finalized. In case of unexpected delay the Contractor shall dump sand or gravel in the borehole till 2M above toe level.
Immediately after excavation the bottom of the bore hole shall be carefully cleaned of mud and sedimentation and other soft material.
The cleaning shall be made by an approved method. Sufficient notice of cleaning for each individual pile shall be given to the Engineer to enable inspection.
Sedimentation tests (if required) shall be carried out by the Contractor in the presence of the Engineer.
In case of boring without casing, the diameter of the boring hole for a each piles shall be measured by calliper prior to the placing of reinforcement. The verticality of boreholes will be checked Is directed by the Engineer. These measurements shall be done by the Contractor using approved best quality and no reimbursement shall be made.
2.2.11
Placing Reinforcement
The reinforcement shall be placed as indicated on the Drawings. Reinforcement in the form of a cage shall be assembled with additional support, such as spreader forks and lacing, necessary to form a rigid cage. Hoops, links or helical reinforcement shall fit closely around the main longitudinal bars and be bound by them by approved wire, the ends of which shall be turned into tile interior of tile pile or pour. Reinforcement shall be placed and maintained in position.
The cover to all reinforcement shall be not less than 75
Joints in longitudinal steel bars shall not be permitted unless otherwise specified. Joints in reinforcement shall be such that the full strength of the bar is effective across the joint and shall be made in such a way that no relative displacement of the reinforcement occurs during the construction of tile pile.
Joints in longitudinal bars in piles with tension (for instance for test loading) sisal] be carried out by welding or method as approved by the Engineer.
2.2.12. Placing Concrete
a)
Approval
No concreting shall take place before the bottom of the excavation has been cleaned, the borehole inspected and approval obtained from the Engineer.
Methods
The method of placing and the workability of the concrete, shall be such that a continuous monolithic concrete shaft of the full cross sections is formed.
The concrete shall be placed continuously and without interruptions that allow the previously placed concrete to set. In this respect the Contractor shall submit details of his plans, standby paint etc. to be utilised in the event of an equipment failure.
The Contractor shall take all precautions in the mix design and during the placing of the concrete to avoid arching of the concrete in a casing.
b)
Workability of Concrete
Slump measured at the time of discharge into the pile boring shall be minimum 150mm, maximum 200mm or as approved by the Engineer.
c)
Placing of Concrete under Water or under Drilling Fluid Concrete to be placed under water or under drilling fluid shall be placed by tremie and shall not be discharged freely into the water or drilling fluid.
Before the placing concrete, the Contractor shall ensure that Heavily contaminated bentonite suspension, which could impair the free flow of concrete from the Pipe of the tremie has not accumulated in the bottom of the hole.
As sample of the bentonite suspension shall be taken from the base of the boring using an approved sampling device. If the specific gravity of the suspension exceeds 1.25 t/m3, the placing of the concrete shall not proceed. In this event the Contractor shall modify the bentonite mud quality.
The concrete shall be placed in such a manner that segregation does not occur.
During and after concreting care shall be taken to avoid damage to the concrete from pumping and de-watering operations.
The hopper and pipe of the tremie shall he clean and watertight. The pipe shall be extended to the base of the boring. A sliding plug or barrier shall be placed in the pipe to prevent direct contact between the fist charge of concrete in the pipe and the water or drilling fluid. The pipe shall at all times penetrate the concrete which has previously been placed and shall not be withdrawn from the concrete until completion of concreting. The bottom of the tremie pipe shall be kept at least 1.5m under the surface of the concrete. At all times a sufficient quantity of concrete shall be maintained within the pipe to ensure that the pressure from it exceeds that from the water or drilling fluid. The internal diameter of the pipe shall be not less than 150mm for concrete made with 25mm aggregate and not less than 200mm for concrete made with 32mm aggregate. The internal face of the pipe of the tremie shall be free from obstructions.
The Contractor shall maintain a continuous record of the volume of concrete used related to the level of the concrete in the pile. any deviations from the theoretical, or expected, volume/level relationship shall be immediately reported to the Engineer. 2.2.13 Extraction of Temporary Casing
a)
Workability of Concrete
Temporary casings shall be extracted while the concrete inside the pile retains sufficiently workable to ensure that the concrete is not lifted.
b)
Concrete Level
During the extraction of the casing a sufficient quantity of concrete shall be maintained inside the casing to ensure that pressure from external water or drilling fluid is exceeded and that the pile is neither reduced in section nor contaminated. The toe of the temporary casing shall be kept at least 50mm under the outlet of the tremie.
c)
Vibrating Extractors
The use of Vibrating easing extractors shall be permitted.
d)
During the concreting and the pulling of the casing the reinforcement cage shall be secured against uplift and the top shall be kept under close inspection.
e)
Supervision
The execution of tile Pile concreting shall be supervised by a qualified person of the Contractor's staff, who will keep records on the relation between quantity of concrete used, level of concrete and withdrawal of casing,
2.2.14
Temporary Support The Contractor shall ensure that free standing piles are temporarily braced immediately after casting to prevent loosening of the piles in the ground and to ensure that no damage resulting from oscillation, vibration or movement of any free-standing pile length can occur.
2.2.15
Records
The Contractor shall keep records as indicated below for the installation of each pile and shall submit two signed copies of these records to the Engineer within 24 hrs. The signed records shall form a record of the work. The following data are requested:
a) b) c) d) e) f) g) h) i) j) k) l) m) n) o) p) q) r)
Contract Pile reference number (Location) Pile type Nominal cross-sectional diameter Date and time of boring Date and time of concreting River bed level at commencement of installation of pile Working level Pile toe level River water levels Pile head level Length of temporary easing Length of permanent casing Soils samples taken and in situ tests carried out Standing water level Length and details of reinforcement Concrete mix Volume of concrete supplied to pile and corresponding levels of concrete and casings All information regarding obstructions delays and other interruptions to the sequence of work.
s)
2.2.16
Measures in Case of Rejected Piles
If any pile is found unsatisfactory in the opinion of the Engineer for Utilization in the structure it shall be cut off below the pile cap if so ordered by the Engineer.
The pile shall be replaced as directed by the Engineer. All extra expenses shall be borne by the Contractor and payment shall be made on the basis that no replacement pile had to be provided for the unsatisfactory pile.
When the safe bearing value of any pile is found to be less than the additional piles shall be installed as ordered in writing by the Engineer.
2.3.
Pile Load Test Work
The work shall include the application of test load (as per Schedule of Item) using Ancor piles, suitable Beamd and Yokes, hydraulic Jacks etc. with suitable apparatus such as Pressure Gauge, Deflectometer etc. for accurately measuring the test load and the settlement of the pile under each increment of load. The load shall be kept for 48 hours. The work also include the cost of loading, carriage of load to position, removal of the loads after completion of test, carrying and stacking those in neat measurable stack as per direction of the Consultant/Engineer. The load test shall be performed following the content of 3(c), 5(a), 5(b) of ASTM specification D1143-61 and the report shall be submitted as per the same specification.
Load testing work of pile may also be done by any other alternate suitable method(s) and in that case prior permission and approval shall be taken from the Consultant/Engineer but the Consultant/ Engineer is not bound to accept the alternate method of load testing work of pile.
2.4.
Dynamic Pile Load Test
In case any pile, during driving, goes below the required level, the driving may be suspended for 7 (seven) days and then driving will be attempted again and modified Heily's Formula shall be used for evaluating the safe pile capacity where the factor of safety is 3.
3.
LEAN CEMENT CONCRETE WORK
The specification shall be the same as for R.C. works excepting that :
(i) (ii) (iii) (iv) (v)
No reinforcement will be used; Proportion shall be as noted in Schedule of Items; 12mm down graded chips of Jhama bricks shall be used as coarse aggregate; The curing shall be done for 7 days minimum; Compaction of concrete may be done by wooden or steel tempers or rammers in lieu of vibrations;
In order to improve bond with masonry/concrete work coming above it, if required, the surface shall be roughened before it reaches initial set, by scouring with the help of a pointed tool.
The size of groove shall be of section between 0.45cm2 and 0.90cm2 scouring shall be done in a pair of orthogonal system of parallel lines spaced 100mm to 200mm and making 45o angle with either axes yielding a mesh of 100mm to 200mm.
4.
BRICK WORK General
The Bricks for use shall be regular in size and shape and shall be free from cracks and other structural defects. The bricks shall be hand picked and stacked separately at least one day before use. Only after the stack is approved by the Employer, the bricks shall be used in the works.
There will be average 10mm to 18mm thick mortar all around the brick. The proportion of cement-sand mortar shall be as stated in the Schedule of Items.
All masonry work shall be laid by skilled workmen under adequate supervision and shall be laid true to lines and levels with joints of uniform thickness and all surfaces true and corners straight and plumb.
Before use, bricks shall be cleaned and scrubbed. Any fungus and or moss grown on the surface, it shall be cleaned by steel brush. Then those shall be soaked in clean tamarind water for at least 8 hours. Soaking shall be discontinued 2 hours before use.
Sand shall be screened once and washed once immediately before use. The mortar shall be mixed in a mixer machine.
Mortar shall be used up within 30 minutes of mixing the mortar. No retempering of mortar will be
allowed.
Water shall be of same quality as for making R.C.
Before laying bricks for a course, mortar of suitable consistency shall be laid with a large trowel over the previous course in thickness more than horizontal joints. The bricks to be laid shall have the free and buttered thickly and then shoved on the mortar bed pressing hard against the previously laid bricks in the same course so that the horizontal and vertical joints are completely filled by flow of exposed surfaces of bricks shall be meticulously avoided/cleaned. The proportion of cement and sand in mortar shall be as stated in the schedule of items.
All horizontal joints shall be parallel and truly level. Vertical joints in alternate course shall come directly one above other unless otherwise directed. The top of everyday's work shall be covered with water proof covering to prevent rain water spoiling day's work.
No deductions will be made for flue, storm drainage, sewerage, electrical conduits and other utility pipe holes for payment of the work. But those shall be provided by the Contractor true to plans and elevations.
The rate shall include the cost of erection and removing of scaffolding, trowel finishing the brick joints during work and curing for 14 days complete.
5.
DOUBLE WYTHE BRICK WORK
The specification of this item of work shall be similar to that for `Brick work'.
The two wythes shall be constructed simultaneously. At no stage of progress of the tops of the two wythes differ in level by more than 4 brick courses, that is the vertical spacing of ties. In this work, one wythe shall be built up in stages equal in height of vertical spacing of ties. The other wythe shall also be built up in stages but always lagging behind the former. When the leading wythe completes a height stage above the lagging one, its inside face shall be plastered in cement-sand mortar. (The thickness of plaster and proportion of cement sand in mortar shall be as stated in the schedule of items. The specification of plaster work shall be similar to that for cement sand plaster work). The lagging wythe shall then be built up to reach the level of leading wythe. When the level is reached the work will be shifted to leading wythe and the cycle shall be repeated until the full height of the wall is reached.
The two wythes shall be bonded by expanded metal net tie or by "Z" tie made of 6mm dia m.s rod. The ties shall be provided in every 4th horizontal course.
The details of ties to be used shall be shown in Drawings.
6.
BRICK BONDED CONCRETE WORK The prepared sub-grade shall first be moistened with care so that it is not too wet. First class bricks that have been soaked in water for at least 8 hours shall be placed in rows and columns in a manner so that the distances between center lines of the interstices are 150mm in one direction and 275mm in the other.
Placing of concrete in the interstices and over the top shall proceed next. If at the time of commencement of placing concrete the bricks are more than 2 hours out of soaking bath, they shall be remoistened with water in position, care shall be taken that the remoistening is done in thin jets and that not much water leaves the bricks to overwet the sub-grade.
Cement concrete shall be 1:2:4 mix. with medium sand as fine aggregate and 12mm down graded chips of jhama bricks as coarse aggregate including breaking of bricks into chips. The work provided for paying single ordinary brick flat with about 38mm gap all around to be filled in by concrete and then placing a topping concrete so that overall thickness is as mentioned in the Scheduled of Items.
Interstices shall be carefully rodded. The top layer over the bricks shall be placed within half an hour of filling the interstices, hence the progress between filling the interstices and laying of top layer will have a phase difference of 15-20 minutes. The top of the work before the cover layer of concrete is placed shall not be allowed to be soiled so that the bond between the concrete in interstices, of bricks and the cover concrete is not reduced. The top layer of concrete shall be beaten by timber or any other means brought level or profile as shown in the drawing. Immediately after finishing levelling and before drying up of the concrete, the top surfaces shall be covered with cement powder strained through fine cloth and it shall be rubbed on the surface carefully and repeatedly till the finished surface is very smooth, polished, plane and hard.
But in case where the surface will be without neat cement finishing work, the surface will be left rough. In both the cases the concrete shall be cured for at least 14 days by stagnant water.
7.
R.C WORK
The item shall include cost of form work, provision for joints, dowels, recesses, grooves, holes, fixing of utility pipes and other embedments curing etc. complete. The item shall include breaking of jhama bricks into coarse aggregate of required sizes. Cost of reinforcement which is a separately payable item should not be included in this item.
(a)
Water for Mixing Concrete
Water used in mixing concrete shall be clean and free from injurious amounts of oils, acids, alkalies, salts, organic materials or other substances that may be deleterious to concrete or steel.
Where different materials of proportions are to be used for different proportions of the work, each combination shall be evaluated separately.
(b)
Materials to be used
(i) (ii) (iii)
Cement Fine Aggregate Coarse Aggregate
: : :
Portland cement A mixture of 67% medium sand and 33% coarse sand. 18mmn down well graded chips of jhama bricks or boulders.
Grading requirement for Coarse Aggregate
Size Nominal size Num-ber (Sieves with square openings) 67 18mm to No.4
50mm 38mm 25mm 18mm 12mm
18mm
No.4
No.8
4.76mm 2.40mm .. .. 100 90 to 100 .. 20 to 55 0 to 10 0 to 5
The fine and coarse aggregate shall be screened at least once and washed at least once in clean water immediately before use in works.
(c)
Concrete proportions and consistency
The leanest permissible mix proportion shall be as stated in the schedule of items. The consistency of the concrete shall be such as to work readily into the corner and angles of the forms and around reinforcement but without permitting the materials to segregate or excess free water to collect on the surface.
The methods of measuring consistency of the concrete shall be such that the proportions can be accurately controlled and easily checked at any time during the work.
The following slumps shall be used for different concrete members.
Minimum (i) Beams and Lintels, Footings Grade Beams (ii) (iii) Roof slab, slabs, walls of water tank 25mm Shelves 25mm 25mm 62mm
Maximum
62mm
62mm
(d)
Strength Tests of Concrete
The strength of concrete 28 days, 150mm x 300mm cylinder, shall be as stated in the schedule of items. Strength shall be the basis for acceptance. Each class of concrete shall be represented by at least five tests (15 specimens). Three specimens shall be made for each test at a given age. The test shall have to be carried out as per direction of the Employer but in no case more than three tests shall have to be made for each 150 cubic yards of structural concreting.
Samples from which compression test specimens are moulded shall be secured in accordance with "Method of Sampling Fresh Concrete" (ASTM C-172). Speciment made to check the adequacy of the proportions for strength of concrete or as a basis for acceptances of concrete shall be made and laboratory cured in accordance with "Method of Making and curing concrete compression and flexure test specification in the field" (ASTM C-31) strength Tests shall be made in accordance with "Method of Test for Compressive strength of Moulded concrete Cylinders (ASTM C-39).
The age for strength tests shall be 28 days. Additional tests shall be made at 7 days to obtain advance information on the adequacy of strength development. The strength test of concrete cylinders is payable under a separate item.
To conform to the requirement of this specifications, the average of any three consecutive strength tests of the Laboratory cured specimen representing each class of concrete shall be at least 25 percent greater than the specified strength, and not more than 10 percent of the strength tests shall have values less than the specified strength.
(e)
Mixing and placing concrete
Preparation of equipment and place of deposits. Before concrete is placed, all equipment for mixing and transporting the concrete shall be cleaned, all debris shall be removed from the space to be occupied by the concrete.
Water shall be removed from the place of deposit before concrete is placed.
(f)
Mixing of Concrete
Concrete shall be machine mixed at job-site.
(g)
Compaction
Concrete, during and immediately after depositing shall be thoroughly compacted. The compaction shall be done by mechanical vibration subject to the following provisions :
Vibrators shall be of a type and design approved by the Consultant. They shall be capable of transmitting vibration to the concrete at frequencies of not less than 4500 impulses per minute.
(h)
Curing
Concrete shall be maintained above 50oF and in a moist condition for at least the first 28 days after placing.
(i)
Formwork
All form shall be of wood or metal and shall be, built mortar tight and of sufficient rigidity to Prevent distortion due to the pressure of the concrete and other loads incident to the construction operation. Forms shall be constructed and maintained so as to prevent warping and the opening of joints due to shirkage of the lumber.
The forms shall be substantial and unyielding and shall be so designed that the finished concrete will conform to the proper dimensions and contours. The design of the forms shall take into account the effect of vibration of concrete as it is placed.
Forms for exposed surfaces shall be made of dressed lumber of uniform thickness, with or without a form line of approved type, and shall he mortar tight. Forms shall be filleted at all sharp corners and shall be given a level or draft in the case of all projection.
Metal ties or anchorages within the forms shall be so constructed as to permit their removal to a depth of at least 50mm from the face without injury to the concrete. In case ordinary wire ties are permitted all wires, upon removal of the forms, shall be cut back at least 6mm from the faces of the concrete with chisels or nippers; for green concrete nippers are necessary. All fittings for metal ties shall be of such design that, upon their removal, the cavities which are lief will be of the smallest possible size. The cavities shall be filled with cement mortar and the surface left sound, smooth, even and uniform in colour.
All forms shall be set and maintained true to the line designated until the concrete is sufficiently hardened. Forms shall remain in place for periods which shall be determined as hereinafter specified. When forms appear to be unsatisfactory in any way, either before or during the placing of concrete, the Architect shall order the work stopped until the defects have been corrected.
The shape, strength, rigidity, water tightness and surface smoothness of re-used forms shall be maintained at all times. Any warped or bulged lumber must be re-sized before being re-used. Forms which are unsatisfactory in any respect shall not be re-used.
All forms shall be treated with oil or saturated with water immediately before placing the concrete. For rail members or other members with exposed faces the forms shall be treated with and approved oil to prevent the adherence of concrete. Any material which will adhere to or discolour the concrete shall not be used.
Removal of forms and shores :
The supporting forms and shoring shall not be removed until members have acquired sufficient strength to support their weight and the loads superimposed their safely. In no case may any forms be removed until the time and sequence has been approved by the Engineer.
All form work shall be removed without damage to the Concrete. The minimum time forms and shoring to remain in place shall be as follows :
i. ii. iii.
Beams and slabs spaning upto 6.10M Beams and slabs spaning above 6.10M Soffits of openings in wall
: : :
14 days 20 days 14 days
iv.
Column, wall and beam sides
48 days
8.
REINFORCEMENT WORK
The item includes cutting into sizes, removal of rusts and loose scales, straightening, hooking and bending according to design and drawing, carrying, placing in position, splicing and binding with 24 SWG Black mild steel wire. The item also includes supply of binding wire.
Details of Reinforcement
(i)
Hooks and bends shall conform to ACI Code 318-63 section 801.
(ii)
Cleaning reinforcement - Reinforcement shall be free from loose flakes, rust, mud, oil of other coatings that will destroy or reduce the bond.
(iii)
Placing of reinforcement shall conform to section 803 ibid.
(iv)
Spacing of bars shall conform to section 804 ibid.
(v)
Concrete protection for reinforcement shall conform to section 808 ibid.
9.
M.S STRUCTURAL WORK IN FRAME, SHUTTER AND GRILL WORKS
(a)
Preparatory work The structural steel elements shall be cleaned of all loose scales and rusts by sand papering all accessible parts of the body. If the elements get distorted before assembling they shall be straightened in the shop by methods that will not injure it; it shall be kept straight during fabrication. Finished members shall be free from twists, bends or open joints. If the elements have to be provided with holes, the holes shall be drilled in the shop and not at the place of assembly. For large works templates shall be made in order to control the profile and configuration of the assembly.
(b)
General
The joints of the elements shall meet without gap unless a gap is intended specifically. The planes of the elements meeting at a joint which are required to be co-planer shall be accurately so. The weld metals shall be deposited uniformly along the length of the containing the joint shall be rubbed out and made smooth by grinding with power - grinders. Cutting of elements shall be done by steel hacksaw, manual or power, but prior approval of the Consultant/University Engineer shall be obtained for this. All cut edges exposed to view shall be ground even. If gas cutting is done the out edges shall be freed from gouges by grinding.
(c)
Rivetted and bolted Construction
Holes for rivets or bolts shall be 1.60mm larger than the nominal diameter of the rivet or bolt. If the thickness of the material is not greater than the nominal diameter of the rivet or bolt plus 3.17mm, the holes shall be either drilled from the solid, or sub-punched and reamed. The dia for all sub-punched holes, and the drill for all sub-drilled holes, shall be at least 1.60mm smaller than the nominal diameter of the rivet or bolt.
(d)
Welded Construction
Surfaces to be welded shall be free from loose scale, slag, rust, grease, paint and any other foreign material except that mill scales which withstands vigorous wire brushing may remain. Joint surface shall be free from fins and tears. Preparation of edges by gas cutting shall, wherever practicable, be done by a mechanical guided torch.
Parts to be fillet welded shall be brought in as close contact as practicable and in no event shall be separated by more than 5.76mm. If the separation is 1.60mm or greater, the size of the fillet welds shall be increased by the amount of the separation. The separation between faying surfaces of lap joints on a backing structure shall not exceed 1.60mm. The fit of joints at contact surfaces which are not completely sealed by welds, shall be close enough to exclude water after painting.
Abutting parts to be butt welded shall be carefully aligned. Misalignments greater than 3.17mm. shall be corrected and, in making the correction, the parts shall not be drawn into a sharper slope than 2 degrees (11.10mm in 300mm).
The work shall be positioned for flat welding whenever practicable.
In assembling and jointing parts of a structure or of build-up members, the procedure and sequence of welding shall be such as will avoid needless distortion and minimize shrinkage stresses. Where it is impossible to avoid high residual stresses in the closing welds of a rigid assembly, such closing welds shall be made in compression elements.
In the fabrication of cover-plated beams and built-up members, all shop splices in each component part shall be made before such component part is welded to other parts of the member. Long girders or girder sections may be made by shop splicing not more than three sub-section, each made in accordance with this paragraph.
All complete penetration but welds made by manual welding, except when produced with the aid of backing material or welded in the flat position from both sides in square-edge material not more than 8mm thick with root opening not less than one-half the thickness of the thinner part joint shall have the root of the initial layer gouged out on the back before welding is started from that side, and shall be so welded as to secure sound meatal and complete fusion throughout the entire cross section. Butt welds made with use of a backing of the same material as the base metal shall have the weld metal thoroughly fused with the backing material. Backing strips may be removed by gouging or gas cutting after welding in completed, provided no injury is done to the base metal and weld metal and the weld metal surface is left flush or slightly convex with full throat thickness.
Butt welds shall be terminated at the ends of a joint in a manner that will ensure their soundness. Where possible, this should be done by use of extension bars or run-off plates. Extension bars or runof plates, if used, shall be removed upon completion of the weld and the ends of the weld made smooth and flush with the abutting parts.
The items of work shall also include painting the m.s. surfaces in 2 coats of synthetic enamel paint over a coat of red lead primer.
10.
WOOD WORK
The timber shall be of species as specified in the schedule of items.
The dimensions shown in the design-drawings are finished dimensions prior to application of paint or varnish. While sawing for sizes, allowance shall therefore be made for losses during sawing, working, painting and finishing.
All wood work shall be neatly and truly finished maintain right angles and other angles accurately. Wood work which will be exposed to view shall be accurately planed.
No filling or stopping of knots, cracks or other flaws shall be done by putting or other fillers. The Consultant may, however, approve filling a neat square-cut hollow circumscribing the knot, crack of flaws by a plug of exactly fitting size fixed with polyvinyl acetate adhesive but prior approval for this shall be taken.
Unless otherwise specified all joints shall be simple mortice and tenon joints with the ends of tenon exposed to view. All mortice or scarfs shall fit truely and fully with full contact bearing and no filling shall be used. Holes of correct size shall be drilled before insertion of nails or screws. The nails shall be in timber of the same quality as that of the body unless otherwise permitted. All screws shall be dipped in oil before being inserted in the body. The kind of nails and screws shall be subject to prior approval of the Employer. Driving in or starting in of screws with a hammer shall not be allowed. If any undue shrinkage or warpage is noticed after the woodwork has been erected, the work shall be pulled down and replaced.
All portions of timber built into or against or close to masonry or concrete shall be given two coats of hot solignum, creosote or other wood preservative approved by the Consultant.
The direction of the grain shall be as shown in the design-drawings or as instructed by the University Engineer/Consultant.
Finishing of the work shall be done by rubbing with sand paper of coarseness in the sequence of No.2, No.0 and 00 followed by hand rubbing with woolen rag.
11.
CEMENT SAND PLASTER WORK
(i)
Sand shall be screened twice and washed at least once. It shall be absolutely free from acids, alkalies and salts. The quality of water for mixing mortar shall be similar to that of R.C. work. The proportion of cement and sand in mortar shall be as specified in the schedule of items using medium sand.
(ii)
(iii)
The bulk of each batch of mortar mixed, shall be such as can be exhausted in half an hour. The mixture shall be turned over and over till the ingredients are thoroughly mixed.
(iv)
The surface shall be moistened with fresh water and shall be kept damp for 2 hours before the plaster is applied.
(v)
The plaster work shall be so carried out that no segments, laps between them or patches are visible. Preferably a wall or a ceiling shall be plastered in one operation with sufficient number of masons working along side and working from top to downwards in walls. The plastered surface shall be true, plane and plumb. All edges and corners shall be straight and squared. The surface of the plaster shall be brought to a smooth finished with the help of steel trowels. The consistency of the mortar shall neither be too stiff nor too fluid. The work shall be cured for 10 days, Chiselling and repairing of cement plaster shall not be permitted under any circumstances. The thickness of plaster shall be as mentioned in Bill of Quantities. The work shall also include providing of panel lines on plaster surface as per drawing.
(vi)
Where so mentioned in the schedule of items there the plastering work shall be carried out in 2 layers in the process as mentioned above, thickness of each layer being as mentioned in the schedule of items except and provided that :
(a)
In both layers an admixture of "Pudlo" @4% by weight of cement shall be used.
(b)
The first layer shall be in the forms of scratch coat which shall be allowed to dry for a day before the final coat is placed on it. The surface of the scratch coat shall be prevented from getting covered with dirt or dust and shall be cleaned before the final coat is placed.
(c)
Immediately after finishing the final coat of plaster, its surface shall be covered with cement powder strained through fine cloth and it shall be rubbed on the surface with the help of small steel trowels working on the surface carefully and repeatedly and spreading of cement and rubbing by steel surface shall be continued till the finished surface is very smooth, polished, plane, hard and dry.
(vii)
The mortar which was partially hardened or otherwise deteriorated shall not be used in work.
12.
BRICK LINING WORK
The specification of this item of work shall be same a that for "Brick work" vide item no.2 except and provided that the work shall include formwork and cutting of bricks as necessary with the help of hacksaw and that the thickness of brick lining shall be as stated in the schedule of items.
13.
RULED POINTING WORK : The recess kept for pointing work during brick work shall be minimum 9.50mm and it shall be cleaned of all dirts, dusts and extraneous matter and shall be washed with and soaked in clean water before the commencement of pointing work. The recess shall be completely filled with cement sand mortar in 1:2 proportion using medium sand and admixture of black oxide 0.34 kg per bag of cement. The mixing of mortar shall be done as specified in cement plaster work. During filling of the joint the mortar shall not be allowed to spread over the edges of the bricks. When the cement mortar is thumb-print hard it shall be tooled with a non-staining tool of the special profile instructed by the Employer.
The tooling shall be done neatly and skillfully so that the joint surface is true, hard, dense, smooth and glossy.
The rules shall be absolutely straight. The horizontal rules shall be continuous horizontal lines without break. The vertical rules in alternate layers shall be in same vertical lines. The pointing work shall be cured for 7 days.
14.
ARTIFICIAL STONE FLOORING WORK The floor shall be divided into panels, for providing contraction joints, as shown on the plan or decided by the Consultant. The area of any panel shall normally not exceed 1.488 sqm. The temporary dividers may be of metal strips or a wooden batten of true line and shape. The top of the dividers shall be perfectly level with level of the finished floor desired. The sequence of filling in the panels should be on `checker board' plan. The casting of the complementary set shall be done at least 48 hours after the first set is cast and dividers removed.
Extreme care shall be taken that the concrete or mortar of a panel does not `ride over' the top surface of the adjoining panels previously cast.
The concrete work shall be done in accordance with the specifications for R.C. works except that no reinforcement will be used in the work and that vibrators need not be used for compaction. Fixed proportion of ingredients and not strength shall be the criteria. The proportion of concrete ingredients shall be 1 part cement, 1.5 parts coarse sand and 3 parts 9.50mm down graded chips of jhama bricks.
The concrete surface in sub-flooring shall be thoroughly scrapped to remove laitance, dirt etc. and washed cleaned and soaked with water until no more water is absorbed.
The free water from the base being removed, a coat of mixture of cement and water, of the consistency of thick cream, shall be brushed on the surface, just prior to placing the topping.
The ingredients shall be mixed with just sufficient water to obtain the plasticity required. Mixing for a larger period will be preferred to adding more water to obtain this plasticity.
The concrete as prepared above, shall be laid immediately after the mixing is completed, on the freshly grouted base. It shall be spread evenly and straight - edged carefully, and low place being filled, humps removed, and the whole surface again straight - edged.
As soon as the layer is even, the surface shall be rapidly compacted by ramming or beating screeded to a uniform line and level, and floated in neat cement finish using cement powder strained through fine cloth and marble dust mixed in 1:1 proportion and it shall be rubbed on the surfaces with the help of small steel trowels working on the surface. This trawling operation shall be repeated several times till the surface is hard, impervious, smooth and nearly dried. The thickness of neat cement finish shall be 3.17mm (minimum).
Where specified in the schedule of items the top finish shall be done in neat cement finish only without admixture of marble dust.
The finish shall be covered by burlap immediately after it has got the final set and shall be kept continuously submerged under water for at least 21 days. The thickness of the floor finish shall be as specified in the schedule of items.
15.
SKIRTING/DADO WORK IN CEMENT-SAND PLASTER
The specification for this item of work shall be same as that for cement-sand plaster work.
(a)
The proportion of cement-sand shall be 1:4 and sand to be used shall be medium sand.
(b)
The plaster shall be laid in two layers. The first layer shall be in the form of a scratch coat which shall be allowed for a day before the final coat is plastered on it. The surface of the scratch coat shall be prevented from getting covered with dirt or dust and shall be cleaned before the final coat is plastered.
(c)
Immediately after finishing the final coat of plaster its surface shall be covered with cement powder strained through fine cloth and marble dust mixed in 1:1 proportion and it shall be rubbed on the surface with the help of small steel trowels working on the surface carefully and repeatedly (at least four passes over the entire area) till the finished surface is very smooth, polished, plane and hard.
Where specified in the schedule of items the top surface shall be finished in neat cement finish only without admixture of marble dust.
16.
TERRAZZO-IN-SITU WORK IN FLOOR
The sub-floor shall be cleaned of all liatance, dirt and extraneous mater. It shall be cleaned twice with clean water till the sub-floor is spark-clean. The sub-floor shall be kept continuously moist for 4 hours before the concrete bed is placed.
The floor shall be divided into panels for providing contraction joints as shown in the Drawings or specified by the Consultant. Unless otherwise specified, the area of a panel shall not exceed 1.488 sqm. The temporary dividers may be metal strips or wooden battens whose edges shall be straight, true and sharp. The top of the dividers shall be perfectly level with the desired level of finished floor. The sequence of casting in the panels shall be on `finished floor' plan. The complementary panels shall not be cast till the divider strips are removed
and 48 hours elapse since the casting of the adjoining panels. If the material for divider strip is absorbent it shall be moistened or oiled with non-staining grease before the flooring may come in contract with it.
A bed of plain cement concrete shall be laid on the moist sub-floor. The proportion of mix shall be 1:2:4 using medium sand and 18mm down chips of well burnt jhama bricks as coarse aggregate. Next, the topping course proper shall be laid, The topping course shall be composed of marble chip and cement mixed dry in the proportion 1:1 by volume in which water shall be added gradually in order to make the mix plastic but not too wet. Colouring agent shall be used in proper proportion if coloured flooring is intended. The flooring shall be white unless otherwise specified, be in two fractions, 2 parts 4.76mm down and 1 part 1.60mm down. The thickness of topping shall be 9.50mm. The mixture shall be poured into panels formed by temporary strips along contraction joints and it shall be rolled into a compact mass by using a heavy stone or metal roller until all superfluous cement and water are extracted.
The quality of marble chips and marble powder shall be as stated in the schedule of item.
Where so specified grey cement shall be mixed with white cement in the proportion as stated in the schedule of Items. The surface shall then be hand trowelled to an even surface flush with the top of the strips. The finished surface shall show 70% marble granules. The floor shall be kept moist throughout these operations and when the operations are complete, it shall be cured for at least 10 days.
When the floor is cured for at least 10 days, it shall be polished manually or with surface grinding machine. This grinding is to remove laitance or loose material and to produce a smooth finish. The first grinding shall be done with a coarse carborundum stone (80 Grit) and fine sand sprinkled ever the surface, using water freely. The floor shall be cleaned twice with clean water after the first grinding is done. All pores and holes shall next be filled with white cement grout. After 5 days the second grinding shall be done using grinding machine or manually using a finer grain carborundum stone (120 Grit.). The surface shall then be cleaned twice using clean water and a light grout of pure white cement shall be spread over the entire floor an be allowed to fill in all fine voids. After the grout has hardened for 3 days, the surface shall be subjected to final grinding with machine or manually, with carborundum stone 240 Grit. The floor shall be washed thoroughly after each grinding and in the final grinding washing shall be done with hot water and pure soft soap.
After washing, cleaning and drying the floor after final grinding, oxalic acid shall be dusted over the surface (0.30 kg over 9.3 cm2). The floor shall then be sprinkled with water and rubbed hard. This operation shall be repeated till the surface has acquired the required gloss. The following day the floor shall be wiped with a moist rag and dried with a soft cloth. A hot mixture of turpentine and bee-wax (3:1) shall then be applied to the surface and thoroughly rubbed with hand and later again rubbed with clean cotton waste using 4 passes. This rubbing will be continued till the floor ceases to be sticky. Best result will be obtained with a minimum of wax and maximum of rubbing.
17.
GLAZED TILE WORK The tile shall be mettle glazed, waterproof, white, dust pressed with square edges. The tiles shall be 12mm thick. No border edging or rounding pieces will be used. Length of each side of wall shall be filled by the tiles completely. The cut sizes, if used at the ends shall be equal in size and as close to full size as possible by making either the edge or the centre of tile to coincide with the vertical centre line of wall. The wall on which the tiles shall be applied shall be kept moistened for 2 hours. Next the bedding mortar in 1:3 using medium
sand shall be applied. The size of the tiles to be used shall be as stated in the schedule of items. The joints in tiles shall be pointed with white cement mortar unless otherwise specified.
18.
LIME TERRACING WORK Stone lime shall be used for this work and the stones (quicklime) shall be slaked on the job. Under no circumstances shall lime be procured in the slaked state. The terracing shall be done by lime concrete composed of lime, surki and brick khoa mixed in the ratio 2:2:7 by volume unless otherwise specified. The brick khoa shall be first class brick chips and shall be graded 20mm down. The thickness of lime concrete shown at different points of the surface shall be provided accurately. If the thickness of lime terracing is not specified it shall be 50mm at drainage outlets with thickness increasing with increasing distance from it as required to provide surface slope of 1:120. The platform on which the mixing will be done shall be level and even and the surface impervious without any open joints. The platform shall be leaned thoroughly and on it the slaked lime and surki shall be mixed dry in the requisite proportion using rectangular boxes as units by spading the mass at least 3 times. The brick khoa shall be soaked in water continuously for 48 hours before use.
The water-soaked khoa shall be spread to a uniform height over another platform which has been thoroughly cleaned previously. The mixture of lime and surki shall then be spread over it uniformly in a thickness as required by the proportion of the mix. The lime-surki mixture and the khoa aggregate shall then be mixed together by means of spades. While mixing the materials water shall be added gradually in small quantities. The materials mixed thoroughly till the mixture is uniform and for this purpose the entire mass shall be turned over not less than 3 times. After the mixing is done it shall be allowed to stand for being tempered. After 40 hours the concrete shall be turned over throughout its entire mass at least twice and during this spading also small quantities of fresh water shall be added as needed for workability.
The concrete shall again be allowed to stand for being tempered. After 24 hours the mass of concrete shall be spaded and turned over twice. It is now ready for laying.
The surface on which the lime concrete will be placed shall be cleaned and washed accompanied by scrubbing if necessary. This surface shall never be used even partially as a mixing platform. The surface shall be well soaked in clean water immediately before the concrete is spread over it. The concrete shall be laid in proper thickness and slopes, a margin of 25% in thickness being allowed for settlement all over the surface and allowed to be soaked in.
Beating shall now begin by two rows of beaters who shall traverse the length of roof backwards and forwards while beating with wooden mallets. Beating shall continue until the mortar has almost set and the mallets rebound from the surface, but shall not be for a period less than a week. The number of beaters shall not be less than 3 for each 9.3 sqm.
Lime water to which molasses and conventional resins have been added @5% by weight shall be sprinkled at intervals to keep the surface wet while being beaten. Special care shall be taken that no portion of the surface is allowed to dry up even for a small period of time during the entire period of beating. No plaster shall be allowed on the surface.
The mortar which comes up during beating shall be troweled on the surface to cover any blind spots and bring the surface to some degree of polish. The surface shall be cured by impounding water for 14 days.
19.
PAINTING WORKS
The type of paint shall be as specified in the Bill of Quantities. The surface shall be rubbed clean with sand paper. The cleaned surface shall be free from foreign materials. If there be any unevenness in the surface it shall be made even by making good the surface defects in a manner approved by the Consultant. The surface shall be allowed to be completely dry before the work is undertaken.
The floor, doors, windows, glazing and other members, which may get a splash of paint during the work, shall be covered with the help of paper or any other suitable covering sheet so that the paint does not stain any part or any member of the building not intended to be covered by the paint. If such staining takes place in spite of the best precautions, the stain shall be forthwith removed.
The manufacturer's specification shall be meticulously followed except and so far as not modified by the Consultant.
The colour of the paint shall be as selected and approved by the Employer.
Painting shall not be carried out in damp weather nor when weather is excessively hot and dry. No painting shall be done on a surface having direct sun rays at the time of painting. The relative humidity shall be above 20% and below 50% at the time of painting. No painting shall be done if there is a chance of rain, paint shall be constantly stirred while being applied, such stirring being done with a smooth stick and under no circumstances with the brush.
The preceding coat shall be perfectly dry and all dust shall be removed and the condition of surface approved by the Consultant before the next coat is applied. Each coat shall differ slightly in tint from the preceding one to permit ready distinction of each coat, the last coat being of the tint required for the finished work.
Where brushes are used for applying paint they shall be as supplied or recommended by the manufacturers. The brushes shall be washed in hot water after work each day and hung up to dry. Brushes clogged with old paint shall not be allowed on the work.
All coats shall be spread as evenly and smoothly as possible by means of crossing and laying off. The final coat shall be very carefully crossed and laid off so that the brush marks are not visible.
When using a brush to apply paint, the paint shall be applied from the ends of the hair, If the sides are used, the application is not satisfactory. Brush shall be reversed at frequent intervals so that it wears down evenly. A free easy stroke shall be the rule of applying the brush. Short and jerky strokes shall be avoided. Stretching the strokes too far shall also be avoided.
In brush painting, brushes shall be applied quickly and boldly leaving non dry edges. The brush shall be dipped in paint and stroked horizontally on the wall, then immediately stroked up and down and stepped. Two workers shall work on a wall together, one working from the ceiling and down-words as far as he can reach and the second following him in applying the paint in the lower height of the wall. No patchy overlaps shall be allowed under any circumstances.
Before starting work enough paint shall be mixed to finish one room. Each room shall be finished in one operation and work shall not be started in a room so late as can not be finished the same day.
When paint is not in use, its containers shall be closed airtight. When painting is completed the surface shall be of uniform colour free from blotches, lines or cut-shades and shall present a smooth, regular and even surface such as will neither cut nor come off on the fingers when rubbed.
The Contractor shall remove with turpentine, or by other approved method, all defects and leave the work in perfect order after removing all stains, smears splashes and dropping from floors, doors, windows glazing, furniture etc.
Number of coats of paints to be applied is specified in the Bill of Quantities. The paint shall be of BERGER BRAND/approved best quality by the Consultant. The priming coat shall be as recommended by the manufacturers. Under no circumstances shall the surface be primed with whiting or lime. The items shall also include all scaffolding work.
21.
WHITE WASHING/COLOUR WASHING WORK
Before the white wash is applied, the walls are to be thoroughly cleaned down and made free from all foreign matters. When the wall gets dried, it will be again washed with tamarind solution in concentration approved by the Consultant. When the wall is dry again, it is ready to receive the white wash.
The wash is to be composed of fresh stone lime and shell lime slaked on the spot in the proportion of two parts of the former to one part of the latter. The slaked lime is placed in tub nearly full of water and is then mixed and stirred until it attains the consistency of thin cream. When sufficiently mixed, it is to be strained into earthen pots through coarse cloth. Gum Arabic in the proportion of two chhataks to thirty seerts of lime shall be added to the strained wash and the whole shall then be boiled together. It is now ready for use.
White wash shall be laid on the walls vertically and horizontally alternately. Each coat shall perfectly dry before the succeeding one is laid over it.
In case of colour wash work, the cream for colour wash shall be prepared by simply mixing the requisite coloring material (to be approved by the Consultant) to the cream of white wash. The colour wash shall be laid over a priming coat of white wash.
Number of coats of white wash/colour wash shall be as stated in the Bill of Quantities.
The items shall also include all scaffolding works.
B. PLUMBING WORKS
1.
SCOPE OF WORKS
As for Civil items of work, each item of works shall include furnishing by the Contractor of all plants, machinery and equipment, fuel, materials and labour. It shall also include cost of all auxiliary and secondary works to be done for executing the item. For example, the item for laying drainage pipes shall include all excavation including shoring and dewatering if necessary, painting, laying jointing, fitting, supplying joints and all connections, e.g. bends, Y-junction branches, supplying, sealing, providing concrete bed as per specification carrying out tests for defective work, filling the trenches with earth, sand, formwork for concrete bed etc. making holes in masonry or concrete works for passing through them where needed and making good area of the hole outside the laid pipe; lintel in the wall above the pipe if the hole is wider than 150mm; testing the completed item of work etc. complete. For second example, an item for supplying and installing galvanised iron service pipe for water supply shall include (i) reduction joints at either ends and in intermediate locations if needed, (ii) applying and providing bends, elbows, tees, unions, plugs and any other connections and junctions necessary, (iii) arrangement for securing and supporting them throughout their length as per approved design and methods, (iv) arrangement for embedment in masonry or concrete works as the masonry/concrete work proceeds and/or cutting grooves, recesses, holes etc. as needed and surrounding the pipe by concrete/mortar as per approved design, making good the surface of walls, floors or ceiling to the usual surface finish, (v) testing of all defective works, (vi) supplying and providing gate and screw down valves, (which will be payable under separate items) at each central position unless otherwise specified etc. complete.
2.
GENERAL
The work shall conform to National Plumbing Code (ASA A40.8-1955) published by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers unless modified hereunder. General arrangement of drainage and plumbing as shown in Drawings shall be faithfully observed. If any change is necessary for any reason, the Contractor may invite notice of the Employer to the matter but shall not make any alteration himself.
3.
APPROVAL OF MATERIALS
Inspection and approval of the Employer shall be sought and secured by the Contractor before the pipes and other materials are used in work. Rejected pipes or materials shall be separately stored and removed from site within 24 hours of being asked for removal.
Pipes shall be kept absolutely free from earth, debries, superfluous cement and other obstructions during laying and until the completion of contract.
GRADIENTS
Drain pipes shall be laid to following gradients unless otherwise specified or shown in the Drawings :
Size of Pipe
Soul Pipe
Rain or waste water pipe
100mm dia
1 in 40
1 in 60
150mm dia
1 in 60
1 in 90
225mm dia
1 in 100
1 in 150
5.
JOINTING
(i)
Cast Iron pipes :
Unless otherwise specified, the jointing shall be done as for R.C. pipe but no preliminary wetting is necessary.
(ii)
Asbestos cement pipe : (Used as drain pipes)
The joints of asbestos cement pipes shall be as for R.C. pipes. (iii) Galvanised Iron Pipes :
The pipes, sockets and fittings shall be cleaned first and allowed to dry before use in the work. The joints shall be made water tight using hemp yarn soaked in China Lacquer. The tightening shall be done perfectly by Torque wrench. (iv) Reinforced Concrete Pipes : Spigots and sockets shall be thoroughly wetted by water at first hemp yarn soaked in cement grout shall be caulked turn by turn upto 12mm depth on either side of mid length of socket ensuring that the spigots and sockets are co axial and that the hemp-seal would not permit the cement sand mortar packing the reach inside the pipe hollow. The remaining space shall be filled up by cement sand mortar in 1:2.5 proportion using medium sand. The filling of the mortar shall be done by small thin trowels and in small batches. A fillet shall be formed all around the pipe at the joint at an angle of 45o. The joints shall be cured for 14 days. (v) P.V.C. pipes :
The joint of PVC pipes shall be sealed with the help of Plastic Glue.
6.
TRAPS AND STRAINERS
Lavatory basins, water closets, and urinals shall be fitted with suitable traps with water seals. The collection point in toilet room floor, collecting the waste water shall be fitted with 10mm cast iron strainer with 4.76mm to 6mm wide slits and 10mm wide ribs and provided with a flat-bottom trap (trap is a separate item).
The rain water stacks shall have 300mm dia C.I. M.S. sheet Bell-mouth circular cone with 6mm thick C.I. hemispherical grating of M.S. Rod mesh at the top. (Bell-mouth circular cone and Hemispherical Grating are payable under separate items).
If for some unavoidable reasons, flat strainers are used with prior approval of the Employer, the available inlet area shall be double the pipe area. The strainer shall be firmly secured to the pipe by means of bell and spigot joints or 4 nos. nuts and bolts of 6mm dia. The thickness of cast iron strainers shall be 6mm; the strainer holes shall not be more than 12mm long, its width shall be more than 9mm but less than 8mm; the width of metal between holes shall not be less than 6mm. 7. ANTI-SIPHON/VENT PIPE
Anti-siphon pipe or by-pass vent pipe shall be used to serve water closets which drains to a soil stack serving water closets in a higher floor(s). The anti-siphon pipe shall be connected to the soil pipe at least 0.76M above the highest floor served by the soil stack.
8.
VERTICAL EXTENSION OF STACKS The soil stack, vent stack and waste water stack shall be carried to at least 0.61M above roof finish work, unless otherwise shown in the Drawings.
9.
BRANCH DRAIN PIPE AT FLOOR LEVELS If the water from lavatory, wash basin, kitchen sink or bath tub is not connected to a waste stack or inspection pit directly but, drained through a floor trap, 50mm dia C.I. pipe laid at a slope 1:50 shall be used as branch drain pipes unless otherwise specified or approved. These pipes shall be embedded in the floor slab which may be thickened for this purpose. The extra thickness of floor slab on this account will be paid for under the item of floor slab, prior authorization of the Employer shall be secured in the matter.
10.
PIPES TO BE CONCEALED
All work shall be concealed and embedded in wall, floor, roof and below grade or ground unless otherwise specified. The routing of the plumbing lines concealed in the building must precede simultaneous with the construction of masonry work phase by phase. In the straight reaches in brick walls, the alternative of leaving a recess in the wall of future insertion of the pipe may be allowed. Access and inspection doors and covers shall be provided in all bends and junctions. These covers shall be neatly provided and housed in the surface of the wall opposite to one facing the pipe. In brick walls, the pipes shall be surrounded by concrete in 1:2:4 at least 38mm thick, all around them, the coarse aggregate of the concrete being 10mm down size of Jhama brick chips and fine aggregate is medium sand. All pipes except G.I. pipes less than 38mm dia when embedded in walls, shall be located in the Midthickness of wall unless otherwise specified or shown in the Drawings.
11.
PIPES TO BE SUPPORTED If a pipe is embedded in wall with insufficient cover (less than 38mm) or if it is carried exposed, it shall be supported by clamps and nails/nuts and bolts according to approved designs/methods. The distance between supports shall not exceed 0.91M and the strength of each anchore shall not be less than that of a 10mm Ubolt.
12.
PROVISION OF LINTELS If holes or grooves or partial pulling down of masonry or concrete work requires, according to the advice of the Employer a lintel above it shall be provided by the Contractor at his own cost. The design and details of lintel shall be as prepared or approved by the Consultant.
13.
EXCAVATION Excavation of trenches for drains shall be made true to drawing and gradient. Over-excavation shall be avoided. If over-excavation is done, this shall be filled up by the Contractor at his own cost with 1:5:7 cement concrete in jhama chips and medium sand. If during excavation existing utility lines are exposed they shall be well secured according to Employer's instruction. Care shall be taken for securing the utility lines and it will be paid for separately. The width of the trench shall be at least 0.36M grater than the diameter of the pipe. Any shoring
and dewatering required during excavation shall be done at the Contractor's own cost. Before laying the pipes, inspection and approval of the Employer shall be sought and secured by the Contractor. All excavated materials shall be deposited away from the edge of the trance keeping at least 0.46M margin concrete bedding of the pipes and joints and filling of the trench shall not commence till the drain pipes are inspected and approved by the Employer. A depth of 0.30M above the top of the pipes shall be filled by hand packing of selected soil out of the spoils. It shall be watered liberally and compacted with great care. In selecting the soil for filling, all lump and clods larger then 25mm size shall be powdered or avoided. The filling above this 0.30M shall be done in the usual way as specified under side filling of trenches. If grass covered soil is removed during excavation of trenches. If grass covered soil is removed during excavation of trenches, the top grass-bearing layer shall be separately preserved and replaced after filling the trench and nursed till the original grass cover is restored and this work of preservation of grass top and re-laying will not be paid for separately, its cost being deemed to have been included in the rate for pipe laying, surplus spoils of excavation shall be disposed according to the instruction of the Employer but if the lead exceeds 152.44M and/or if the materials is used for compacted fill, it shall be paid for as an item for excavation and/or compacted fill.
14.
BENDS AND JUNCTION
No bend or junction shall be used in the buried drain pipes except at inspection chambers. All junctions shall be oblique.
15.
TESTING
Immediately after the drains are laid and jointed but before bedding in concrete they shall be inspected, tested and passed by the Employer as satisfactory. The testing shall be done by water pressure for a head 3.05M more than the highest point. Testing may be done section by section. The drain shall not be walked over before concrete bedding is placed.
16.
BEDDING AND ENCASING DRAIN PIPES
The trench bottom shall be rammed and compacted to the satisfaction of the Employer. The drain pipes shall be laid and supported on false supports. The jointing shall then be done and after the pipe network is tested under pressure and approved by the Employer the concrete bed in 1:2:4 using 18mm down jhama brick chips and medium sand shall be placed. The width of the bed at the bottom will be 350mm wider than the internal diameter of the pipe.
The side slopes will joint the edge of the bottom of concrete bed and the pipe tangentially. The depth of concrete bed shall be 100mm minimum below the pipe and shall be increased at joints as needed to maintain 100mm minimum from socket surface. The concrete bed shall be cured for 10 days
Technical Specification Particulars Specifications, Page No. 1
SECTION 8: PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS

SECTION 8A: CIVIL WORKS MATERIAL SPECIFICATION
1.0
GENERAL
This specification has been prepared with all possible care and diligence and every effort has been made to cover all types of materials and items of works necessary to complete the Project in all respect. All workmanship and materials to be used in the Works shall be of the best quality of their respective kinds as specified herein. All materials used in the Works shall be new and obtained from the sources and suppliers approved by the Engineer-in-Charge. Materials shall comply strictly with the requirements prescribed hereinafter or, where such requirements are not specified in this specification, the latest issues of the relevant Technical Standard shall be followed. All tests of materials shall be done from the laboratory (ies) designated by the Engineer -in-Charge. The accuracy and sufficiency of information furnished in this specification is not guaranteed It is the responsibility of the Contractor to clear any confusion or ambiguity in this specification well ahead of submission of bid. In case of any missing item relevant standard specification shall be followed. 2.0 MATERIALS 2.1 CEMENT
Cement shall be Ordinary Portland Cement conforming to the requirements of the Standard Specifications for Portland cement Type-I. ASTM C-150 or BDS '232:1993 (2' ` ' U Revision) unless otherwise specified. Cement shall conform to the following standards as per BDS 232:1993 (2 n'' Revision) and ASTM C109, C191, C204. a). Water for normal consistency : Minimum 280 sqm/kg (by air permeability method) i). Initial setting time. ASTM C191 ii). Final setting time. ASTM C191 c). Minimum compressive strength i). 3 days ii). 7 days iii).28 days (optional) 26% to 33%
: Not less than 45 min. : Not more than 375 min.
: 12.4 Mpa (1800 psi) :19.3 Mpa (2800 psi) : 27.6 Mpa (4000 psi)
d). Minimum compressive strength i). 3 days :12.4 Mpa (1800 psi) ii). 7 days :19.3 Mpa (2800 psi) iii).28 days (optional) :27.6 Mpa (4000 psi) Cement shall be delivered in packages as packed by the Manufacturer with the brand name, type of cement and weight of each bag marked on the bag. Sample test must be
done from the laboratory designated by the [Engineer in Charge. two bags, from each, or each consignment of supply of 25 metric tons of cement shall be selected for testing. 2.2 BRICK Common building clay bricks shall conform to BDS 208:1980 (First Revision). Bricks shall be manufactured from combination of clay mixed with silica sand and alumina and shall be uniformly burnt throughout. Bricks shall be kiln burnt. 2.2.1 First Class Bricks
First Class Bricks shall comply with the following requirements of BDS 208:1980 Building Clay Bricks First Revision) a). Bricks shall be of machine mould/, uniform color/, shape and size having " square sides and edges and parallel faces. b). Bricks shall be sound, hard and well burnt homogeneous in texture and free flaws and cracks. c). Bricks shall emit a clear metallic sound when struck with a small hammer brick. A fractured surface shall show a uniform compact structure free from lumps, grits or holes. d). A first class brick shall not absorb more than 1/6th of its dry weight when immersed in water for 24 hours. e). A first class brick shall not break when struck against another brick or when. at T-position on hard ground from a height of about 1.2 meter. f). Standard dimension of bricks shall be 240 x 115 x 70mm (9 1 /2"x4 1 /2''x2. 3 /4") g). Allowable variations in dimensions shall be: i). in length not more than 6mm ii). in breadth not more than 5mm iii). in height not more than 1.5mm h).Unit weight of bricks shall be minimum 1100 kg/cum i). Minimum compressive strength of bricks shall be for i). halved bricks (mean of 12 bricks) : 28 Mpa (4000 psi) ii). Individual brick : 21.1 Mpa (3000 psi) j). range of efflorescence for a first class brick shall be slight to nil. 2.2.2 Picked Jhama Bricks
Picked Jhama Bricks shall be over-burnt First Class Bricks. uniformly vitrified throughout : with good shape, hard, slightly black in color. and without cracks or spongy areas Minimum compressive strength shall not be less than 28N/mm 2 (4000 psi).
ama e x c e p t dimensions. 2.2.3 Perforated Bricks
Perforated bricks shall meet the f o l l o w i n g s p e c i f i c a t i o n s ' a). Minimum unit weight b). Minimum compressive strength on gross area: i). Multi-core brick ii). 10-Hole engineering brick iii). Maximum size of perforation
3 . 0 0 kg/brick by Minimum : 70 kg/sq.cm : 210 kg/sq.cr' : 25
sq.mm
c). Minimum number of perforation i) Along width of brick ii). Along length of brick d). Minimum wall thickness i). Between brick edge and perforation ii). Between adjacent perforations e). Maximum water absorption i). 5 hrs, boiling ii). Efflorescence Dimensions (3mm) 24cm x 1 1 cm x 7cm (9 '11/2" x 4 '11/2" x 2 3/4 " )
2 6 10mm 10mm 20 % of dry wt. Nil
The perforations may he of any regular shape in cross section. In case of rectangular section the larger dimension shall be parallel to length of the brick. Dimension of perforation measured parallel to the plane of the shorter side shall not be more than 15cm except in case o f circular shape of the perforation in which case it may be allowed up to 20cm. Total area of perforation shall not exceed 45% of the total area of corresponding face of the brick. 2.2.4 Clinker Bricks Clinker bricks or tiles shall meet the following requirement: Minimum unit weight Minimum compressive strength Minimum modulus of rupture Water absorption 5 hrs. boiling Efflorescence :200mm x 100mm x 5mm (8"x 4"x2")
:2 kg/brick :560 kg/sq.cm (8000 psi) :12 kg/sq.cm (600 psi) :12%-15% of dry wt. :Nil
Clinker bricks shall be manufactured by dry process and burnt to a higher temperature and shall be uniformly vitrified to a dark copper tone. Edges shall be square, straight and sharply defined. 2.3 SAND
Sand shall conform to BDS 243:1963. ASTM C33 Sand shall be either natural sand, composed of clean, hard, durable uncoated particles resulting from the disintegration of siliceous and/or calcareous rocks; or manufactured sand resulting from the crushing of boulders or shingle. Sand shall be clean and free of injurious amounts of organic impurities; deleterious substances shall not exceed the following percentages by weight: Clay Lumps and friable particles - maximum 3% Coal and Lignite 0.25% Material passing the 0.075mm (No 200) sieve 1% Shale, coal, soft or flaky fragments 1% Sulfur compounds 0.3% Organic material content no organic material Sand shall be well graded from coarse to fine and shall conform to the following Fineness Modulus.
[4]
Concrete Mortar Filling sand
2.5 1.5 1.5 1.0 0.8
(Two point five) (One point five) (One point five) (One point zero) (Zero point ight) Sand
from different sources of supply shall not be mixed and stored in the same stockpile nor used alternately in the work without permission from the Engineer-in-Charge 2.4 COARSE AGGREGATE
Coarse aggregate shall conform to BDS 243.1963 (Coarse and Fine Aggregates from Natural Sources for Concrete 1; ASTM C 33: Concrete Aggregates). Nominal maximum size of coarse aggregate in concrete shall not be larger than: a). One-fifth of the narrowest dimensions between sides of forms; or b). One- third the depth of slabs; or c). Three- fourth the minimum clear spacing between individual reinforcing bars or wires, bundles of bars, or prestressing tendons or ducts. 2.4.1Boulder The boulders to be used for coarse aggregate in concrete shall be composed of limestone, sandstone, granite, trap rock or rock of similar nature and shall have the following properties: Compressive strength (minimum) 35 Mpa (5000 psi) Specific gravity 2.2-2.6 Unit weights 22-25.1 kn./cum Porosity 2.10% Water absorption (maximum) 2.5% by wt The boulder shall be of uniform light color as approved and shall be free of thin laminations. adherent coatings, and deleterious substances, The wear loss of co arse aggregate of a types shall not exceed 35% by weight when tested by the Los Angeles Abrasion Test. 2.5 WATER
The water used in mixing and curing concrete shall be tested for chlorides and sulphates in a standard material-testing laboratory as directed by Engineer-in-Charge. The maximum acceptable limits shall be as follows: 1000 mg/I as SO 3 for sulphates 500 mg/I as CI ion for chloride Water shall be clear and free from salt, oil or acid, vegetable or other substances injurious to the finished product. Water used in construction work shall be potable 2.6 ADMIXTURES
Admixtures used for the purpose of modifying the normal plastic life of concrete mix or for influencing its rate of gaining hardness and strength or for the workability of concret e shall not be used except with the written approval of the Engineer -in-Charge.
[5]
Admixture if specified or permitted shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO standard Specification M-194/ASTM, C-494 or ASTM C-1017. It shall be kept in mind that a small change in the amount of Admixture may cause great: change in their action and their adequacy of performance is difficult to measure at hi construction site during the progress of work. Water reducing admixture, accelerating admixture, water reducing and retarding admixtures, water-reducing and accelerating admixtures shall conform to ASTM C -494 (Chemical Admixtures for Concrete of ASTM 1017 (chemical admixtures for 1017 . (Chemical Admixtures for use in producing flowing concrete). 2.7 REINFORCING BAR
High tensile steel reinforcing bar shall be structural grade deformed bar specified as per ASTM A615M, and BDS 1313: 91- Cars having minimum yield levels of 275 Mpa (40,000 psi) and 415 Mpa (60,000 psi) are designated as Grade 40 and Grade 60 respectively. High tensile steel reinforcing bars shall meet the following strength test requirements; Properties Yield strength (minimum) Ultimate strength (minimum) (70000 psi) 2.7.1 Tolerance on Mass Tolerance of mass per metre run (%) + 8.0 + 4.5 Grade 40 275 Mpa (40000 psi) 483 Mpa Grade 60 415 MPA (60000 psi) 620 Mpa (90000 psi)
Nominal size (mm) Upto 7 8 to 12 __ + 6.0 Over 12 2.7.2 Tolerance on Diameter
Tolerance in diameter for both plain and deformed bars shall not exceed 2.5% for 12mm and less size and 1.8% for sizes larger than 12 mm. 2.7.3 Tensile Requirements Grade 40 70000 40000 Grade 60 90000 60000
Tensile strength, min. psi Yield strength min. psi Elongation in 8 in. min. % Bar nos. 3 (10 mm) 4, 5, 6 (12; 16, 20 mm) 7, 8 (22, 25 mm) 9,10(28,32mm) 1 1 , 14, 18 (35. 45 57 mm)
[6]
9 9 8 7 7
2.7.4
Bending Requirements
The bend-test specimen shall withstand being bent around a pin without cracking on the outside of the bent portion. The requirements for degree of bending and sizes of pins are prescribed in Table 3 Bend Test Requirement. The bend test shall be made on specimens of sufficient length to ensure free bendin g and with apparatus which
Continuous and uniform application of force throughout the duration of the bending operation. Unrestricted movement of the specimen at points of contact with the apparatus and bending around a pin free to rotate. Close wrapping of the specimen around the pin during the bending operation. Bend Test Requirements Bar Designation No. Pin diameter for Bend Test "A Grade 60 3, 4, 5 6 7, 8 9, 10 11 14, 18 (90) 3 '1/2d ' 5d 5d 7d 7d 9d Grade 40 3 '1/2d 5d -----
A. Test bends 180 unless noted otherwise. B. d=nominal diameter of specimen
Table -3 2.7.5. Frequency of Tensile, Bend, Rebend testing Nominal size of bar (mm) Under 10 10 to 16 20 to 32 Value of x (Quality of materials in tonnes) Tensile test 25 35 45 Bend test 50 70 90 Rebend test 50 70 90
For the specified tests sample length shall be 600mm long or 20 times nominal size whichever is greater. Sample shall be selected from each batch a frequency of not less than one per x tonnes or part thereof where x has the value give in the above table. Samples from the bend and rebend tests shall not be selected from the same bar. 2.7.6 Cross Sectional Area and Mass
[7]
Nominal size 6 mm 8 mm - --------10 mm 12 mm 16mm 20 mm 22 mm 25 mm 28 mm 32 mm ,
Mass (kg/m) 0.222 0.395 0.616 0.888 1.579 2.466 2.980 3.854 4.830 6.313
Cross sectional area ( m m 2 ) 28.30 50.30 78.50 113.00 113.00 201.00 314.00 380.00 491.00 616.00 804.00
All steel bars prior to its use ';shall be cleaned with wire brush to make it free from loose scale. dirt, paint. oil, grease or other foreign substances. All reinforcing steel shall be stored properly under shed not to be contaminated by oil, grease or mud. 2.7.7 Requirement for Deformation in Reinforcing Steel The reqirement of deformation shall meet ASTM A615. a). Deformations shall be spaced along the bar at substantially uniform distances. The deformations on opposite sides of the bar shall be similar in size and shape. b). The deformations shall be placed with respect to the axis of the bar so that th e included angle is not less than 45 deg. Where the line of deformations forms an included angle with the axis of the bar of from 45 to 70 deg. inclusive, the deformations shall alternately reverse in direction on each side, or those on one side shall be reversed in direction from those on the opposite side. Where the line of deformation is over 70 deg. a reversal in direction is not required c). The average spacing or distance between deformations on each side of the bar shall not exceed seventeenths of the nominal diameter of the bar.
d). The overall length of deformations shall be such that the gap between the ends of the deformations on opposite sides of the bar shall not exceed 12.5% of the nominal perimeter of the bar. Where the ends terminate in a longitudinal rib. The width of the longitudinal rib shall be considered the gap. Where more than two longitudinal ribs are involved, the total width of all longitudinal ribs shall not exceed 25% of the nominal perimeter of the bar. Furthermore, the summation of gaps shall not exceed 25% of the nominal perimeter of the bar. The nominal perimeter of the bar shall be 3.14 times the nominal diameter. e). The spacing/height and gap of deformations shall conform to the requirements prescribed in Table 1 of ASTM A615. Any bar that fails to satisfy the above requirements is to be treated as plain reinforcement according to ACI Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete ACI 318-95
f).
[8]
Measurement i) The average spacing of deformations shall be determined by dividing a measured length of the bar specimen by the number of individual deformations on any one side of the bar specimen. A measured length of the bar specimen shall be considered the distance from a point on a deformation to a corresponding point on any other deformation on the same side of the bar The average height of deformations shall be determined from measurements made on not less than two typical deformations. Deformations shall be based on three measurements per deformations, one at the centre of the over-all length and the other two at the quarter points of the over-all length. 2.8 TIMBER FOR DOORS/ WINDOWS
ii)
Timber for doors shall conform to BDS 142:1961 specification for Wood Doors (under revision): BDS 820:1978, Recommendation for maximum permissible moisture content of timber used for different purpose in Bangladesh. Timber used for doorframe and leaf shall be well-seasoned, dry and straight grained, free from knots and other defects affecting its appearance, strength and durability. All timbers used for doors/windows shall be mechanically seasoned and the moisture content shall not be more than 12-13%. 2.9 ALUMINIUM SECTIONS
All Aluminum Sections shall conform to U.S. Architectural Aluminum Manufactures Association Standards (AAMA). The following are the standards to be followed for Aluminum doors, windows and curtain walls or as specified in Bill of Quantity: Channel : Channel thickness thickness for for doors windows thickness 1.8 2.5mm 1.2 1.8mm 15 microns : 4mg per sqm
Anodization : Density of anodization :
2.10 M. S. PIPE M.S. pipe shall be made from low carbon steel conforming to ASTM A53 and followin g { physical requirements:
Nominal Pipe Diameter 100mm 150 mm
Schedule No. 40 60
Wall I Thickness 6mm 7 mm
Inside Diameter 102.3mm 154.0 mm
Outside Diameter 114.4 mm 168.3 mm
Weight/ft
4.90 kg 8.60 kg
[9]
2.11
UPVC PIPE
UPVC pipe shall be of Unplasticised Polyvinyl Chloride (UPVC) and shall conform to the following specifications: Specific Gravity : 1.36 1.43 Tensile strength Elongation Compressive Strength : 450Kgf/Cm2 560Kgf/Cm2 : 80% : 600-700 Kgf/Cm2
No minal size Diameter (mm) Inch 2.00" 3.00" 4.00" 5.00" 6.00" 8.00" (mm)
Moan o utside
Sched ule 40 Schedule 80 Wall Thickness (mm) 1 Wall Thickness (mm) Min 3.91 5.49 6.02 6.55 7.11 9.17 Max 4.42 6.15 6.73 7.34 7.79 12.70 Min 5.54 7.62 8.56 9.52 10.97 14.22 Max 6.20 8.53 9.58 10.66 12.29
100 125 150 200
Min 50 60.17 75 88.70 114.07 141.05 168.00 218.70 219A6
Max 60.47 89.10 114.53 141.55 168.56 8.18
2.12 WHITE CEMENT It shall be made from pure calcite lime stone and have the same physical properties as that of Portland cement Type 1 ASTM C-150. Cao Sio Al 2 0 3 Fe 2 0 3 Mg SO 3 - 65.0% - 25.056% - 5.9% - 0.6% -1.1% - 0.1%
2.13 MARBLE CHIPS Marble chips shall be white in color and shall be of size No. 2 -3 (retained on screens 6mm and 10mm mesh). The chips shall be of uniform color and texture and shall be made from white marble stone, a calcareous metamorphic rock. which is capable of being polished and have following properties: Compressive Strength Specific Gravity 560 840 kg/sq.cm (8000-12000 psi) 2.72
[10]
Unit Weight
2560 2760 kg/cum (60-170 per Cft)
3.0
CIVIL WORKS
3.01 Mobilization and Preparation of Site The Contractor has to make all mobilization and preparation o f site as described in Sub-section 1.1.5 of Section 7.0 (General Specifications) this document. 3.02 Establishment of Contractor's Facilities The site facilities required for the work are described in Suh-section 1.2 of Section 7.0 (General Sp ecificatio n) o f this Document. 3.03 General and Sundry Obligations These are described in Sub-section 1.3 of Section 7.0 (General Sp ecificatio n s) this d ocument 3.04 REINFORCED CONCRETE CAST-IN-SITU BORED PILES 3.04.1 Description This work shall consist of constructing reinforced concrete cast -in-situ bored piles for column foundations as per drawing and specifications and to provide all labour, materials, equipment including boring & testing equipments and incidentals necessary to complete the work as per direction of the Engineer-in-Charge. 3.04.2 3.04.2.1 Materials Concrete
The concrete for cast-in-situ pile shall be manufactured as per Section 3.13 of concrete C19 with a minimum proportion 1:1.5:3 having a minimum concrete strength of 19 Mpa at 28 days. The concrete shall be placed by using a tremie pipe as per section 3.12 of concrete C19. The tremie pipe shall be sufficiently long to reach the bottom level of the pile and gradually withdraw as the placing of the concrete proceeds. 3.04.2.2 Reinforcing Steel Steel bars used as reinforcement fore cast -in-situ concrete piles shall meet the requirements of section 3.15. The reinforcing bars for each pile shall be assembled on the ground and spiral bar will be tack welded with alternative main bar of the pile to form a rigid cage. Lapping of vertical reinforcement shall be tack welded as per drawing or BOQ or as directed. Binding with galvanized iron wire shall not be allowed where welding is specified. Concrete spacer blocks shall be used in adequate member to hold the the reinforcement in position and to ensure that the specified concrete cover is maintained throughout. 3.04.2.3 Welding
[11]
i
a) Electrodes: All welding electrodes shall conform to American Welding Society (AWS standards and the electrodes shall be rods of size and classification number as, recommended by their manufacturers. b) Quality: Welding of reinforcing bars shall be performed by skilled and experiences welders and the connections shall be made in accordance with the AWS stan dards. 3.04.2.4 Casings Temporary casing shall be of steel, smooth, clean, watertight and of ample strength to withstand both handling and driving stresses and the pressure of both concrete and the! surrounding earth materials. The outside diameter of casing shall not be less than the specified size of the shaft. Casings which are required to be incorporated as part of the permanent work shall conform:, to the Specification AS T M A36, Grade 36 unless otherwise specified. 3.04.3 Construction 3.04.3.1 General
The basic length of pile, its diameter and arrangement is shown in drawings. The final length and arrangement shall be decided by the Engineer -in-Charge on the basis of study of the result of preliminary load test on piles. The diameter of pile shall be not less than the specified and as shown on the drawings.
3.04.3.2 Setting Out of Piles
The contractor shall set out position of each pile at the site and agree it with the Engineer -inCharge. However, agreement of the Engineer -in-Charge shall not relieve the Contractor from his responsibility for correct setting out of the piles at the site.
3.04.3.3 Preparation
Before starting the drilling operation the Contractor shall establish levels, grades and alignment of all piles with reference to bench marks (BM) previously established at the site. The Contractor shall have all casing pipes and reinforcing bars fabircate d as per design and ready for lowering after the completion of drilling. All necessary equipment such as piling rigs, pumps, welding sets, etc. and materials for concrete work including tremie pipe shall be made available before the start of the drilling operation.
3.04.3.4 Method of Boring
The hole shall be bored by direct mud circulation method by using bentonite as drilling fluid for cast-in-situ piles or as per method submitted by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer -inCharge. The guide pipe shall be installed at the surface and thereafter boring shall be executed by means a
[12]
chisel attached at the end of drilling rods. The bore hole shall be filled with drilling slurry, which circulates through the drilling rods and the chisel at the base. Bec ause of high viscosity, (specific gravity being 1.2 to 1.3) the bentonite slurry stabilizes the side of bore hole and in addition the hydrostatic head due to higher specific gravity does not allow the bore -hole to collapse, and also the back flows of water into the bore-hole should be avoided. Further the bentonite form a thin film on the side and acts as a further protection against caving -in. For preparing the slurry only good quality bentonite shall be used and whenever the viscosity of slurry shall drop due to concentration of cuttings in the slurry, additional bentonite shall be added to maintain the requisite viscosity. The density of the bentonite solution should be about 1.12. Once the bore-hole has been drilled down to the final depth, fresh benton ite slurry from a reserve tank shall be pumped through the bore-hole for approximately 10minutes so that the previous cotaminated slurry is completely removed and the bore -hole is also throughly cleaned and all the cuttings from the base are removed. Only when the bore-hole is completely filled with fresh slurry free from all cuttings the circulation of fresh bentonite shall be stopped.
3.04.3.5 Li mit a t io n of Boring Sequence
No boring operations shall take nearer than 2.50m from any piles for which concreting operations are in progress or from any nev . ily completed pile until at least five days have elapsed from the last concreting operation on that pile. Where there are more than 4 (four) piles in a cluster, the centre pile shall be installed first. The piles in a cluster shall be of the same depth.
3.04.3.6 Samples and Boring Logs
Two soil samples shall be taken from the bottom 300mm in each borehole and shall preserved in sealed and adequately leveled glass until personally inspected by the Engineer-in-Charge that shall then issue instructions regarding the further disposal of these samples.
3.04.3.7 Tolerance for Drilling Holes
Bores shall be accurately drilled in the locations shown in the contract drawings. All p shall be drilled with a lateral tolerance o f not more than 75mm from the point specified. Pi e that deviate more than 75mm in lateral location or piles whose slope deviates from vertical by more than 2% (two percent) shall be rejected. Additional piles shall then furnished and in stalled by the Contractor in such locations as the Engineer -in-Charge ma direct. All costs of such additional piles required to suit changed pile locations shall be b o r n by the Contractor.
3.04.3.8 O b s t r u ct io n s During Drilling

[13]
When obstructions make it extremely difficult to drill certain holes in the location shown a to reach the proper bearing strata the Contractor shall take all usual methods to install : piles as required including jetting, cutting, drilling or other feasible means. If in judgement o f the Engineer-in-Charge the Contractor is unable to complete properly any by resorting to such methods the Engineer-in-Charge may order for additional pile(s) dr at another location(s) at the Contractor's expense.
3.04.3.9 Depth of Holes
The depth of holes shall be checked by the Engineer -in-Charge by lowering a suite device. Immediately after approval of the bore the reinforcement cage shall be lowered. Contractor shall have available a suitable light for inspection of each bore througho..: entire len gth.
3.04.3.10 Placing of Reinforcement
Before placing the concrete in the bore -holes, reinforcement as per design & drawing be placed. The reinforcement for each pile shall be assembled on the ground and spiral will be tack welded with alternative main bar of the pile to form a ridig cage. Lapping vertical reinforcement shall be joint welding as per drawing or as per schedule of items directed by the Engineer -in-Charge. Binding with galvanzed iron wire shall not be where welding is specified. Concrete sp acer blocks specially prepared for this purpose be securely attached to the reinforcement at a suitable spacing in such a manner as ensure that the concrete cover is maintained throughout and that the reinforcement ca:= not displaced in the caseing in the course of the subsequent concrete operations. '. particullar care shall be taken to ensure that none of these spacer blocks can swivel are to the inside of the reinforcement cage and that, in general, there are no obstructions c = kind inside the reinforcement cage due to spacer blocks or lapped reinforcement c -other reason. The entire reinforcement cage assembly shall than be carefully lifter carefully lowered into the bore hole previously made ready to receive it as desc ribed previously. When bore-holes have been thoroughly cleaned and fresh bentonite sluury circulated for approximately 10 to 50 minutes : the reinforcement eage then Wall he introduced into the bore-hole.
3.04.3.11 Placing of Concrete
No concrete shall be placed until all driving within a radius of 2.5m has been completed, not until all the shells for any one bent have been completely driven. If this cannot be done, all driving within the above limits shall be discontinued until the concrete in the last pile cast has set at least four days or in sequence approved by the Engineer -in-Charge. Accumulation of any foreign material in the bores or casings shall be removed before concrete is placed.
[14]
The concrete shall be placed by means of tremie pipe. The 203.2mm (8") dia tremie pipes shall be placed in the bore-hole so that thay are about 304.8mm (1feet) above the base of the hole. A funnel shall be fixed on the top of the tremie pipes and concrete shall be introduced into the funnel by means of concrete bucket. In this way, the concrete will flow through the funnel and the tremie pipes to the bottom of the bore-hole and from there it will rise up in the bore -hole itself flowing out of the base of the tremie pipes. It shall be ensured that that the 203.2mm (8") dia pipe s are always at least 1828.8mm to 2438.4mm (6' to 8') within the concrete, so that the fresh concrete is always added in the concrete and in this way the concrete will rise to the required surface and concreting of the pile completed.
3.04.3.12 Casings
Temporary casings shall be removed while the concrete remains workable. Generally the removal of temporary casing shall not be started until concrete placement in the shaft is at or above ground surface. Movement of the casing by rotating, exerting downward pressure and tapping to facilitate extraction with a vibratory hammer will not be permitted. Casing extraction shall be at a slow, uniform rate with the pull in line with the shaft axis.
A sufficient head of concrete shall be maintained above the bottom of the casing to overcome the hydrostatic pressure of water or drilling fluid outside of the casing.
3.04.3.13 Slurry
Slurry used in the drilling process shall be a mineral slurry. The slurry shall have both a mineral grain size that will remain in suspe nsion and sufficient viscosity and gel characteristics to transport excavated material to a suitable screening system. The percentage and specific gravity of the material used to make the suspension shall be sufficient to maintain the stability of the exca vation and to allow proper concrete placement. The level of the slurry shall be maintained at a height sufficient to prevent caving of the hole.
The mineral slurry shall be premixed thoroughly with clean fresh water and adequate time allotted for hydration prior to introduction into the shaft excavation. Adequate slurry tanks will be provided as required by the Engineer-in-Charge. No excavated slurry pits will be allowed when slurry tanks are required on the project without written permission of the Engine er-in-Charge. Adequate descending equipment will be required as directed by the Engineer -in-Charge. Steps shall be taken as necessary to prevent the slurry from "setting up" in the shaft excavation, such as, agitation. circulation, and adjusting the properties of the slurry.
Control tests using suitable apparatus shall be carried out by the Contractor on the
[15]
mineral slurry to determine density, viscosity and pH. An acceptable range of values for those physical properties is shown in the following table.
Range of Values (at 20 C)
Property (Units)
Time Slurry Time of Concerning Test Method Introduction (In Hole) Density (kg/m 3 ) 1030 to 1110 1013 to 1200 Density Balance Viscosity (Sec.) 28 to 45 28 to 45 Marsh Cone Per quarter_pH 8 to 11 8 to 11 p " paper or 3 a) Increase density values by 32 kg/m in salt water b) If descending is required: sand content shall not exceed 4 percent (by volume) at any point in the shaft excavation as determined by the American Petroleum Institute sand content test.
Tests to determine density, viscosity and p " values shall be done during the shaft excavation to establish a consistent working pattern.
Prior to placing shaft concrete, slurry samples shall be taken from the bottom and at: intervals not exceeding 3 m for the full height of slurry. Any heavily contaminated slurry that has accumulated at the bottom of the shaft shall be eliminated. The mineral slurry shall be within specification requirements immediately before shaft concrete placement.
3.04.4 Measurement and Payment
The cast-in-situ bored pile of the required size shall be paid separately for boring a n : j concreting as per contract unit price shown in the schedule of items of works and shall be the full compensation for providing all materials, labour, equipment and incidentals necessary to complete the work. Reinforcing steel & its fabrication and weldi ng shall be p a l : separately as per contract unit price of the respective item. Permanent steel casing pipe shall be paid separately only if shown as separate items in the schedule of items of work. No payment will be made for rejected pile.
3.04.5 Pile Load Test 3.04.5.1 General
[16]
This section deals with the testing of a pile by the application of an axial load or force. i) covers vertical piles tested in compression.
3.04.5.1.1 Def init io ns
a) Allowable load: The load which may be safely applied to a pile after taking into account its ultimately bearing capacity, negative friction, pile spacing, overall bearing capacity of t o ground below and allowable settlement.
b) Compression pile: A pile which is designed to resist an axial force such as would cause it to penetrel further into the ground.
c) Kentledge: The dead weight used in a loading test
d) Maintained load test: A loading test in which each increment of load is held constant either for a defined period of time or until the rate of movement (settlement or uplift) falls to a specified value.
e) Preliminary load test pile: A pile installed before the commencement of the main piling works or a specific part of the works for the purpose of establishing the suitability of the chosen type of pile and for confirming its design, dimensions and baring capacity.
f)
Proof load: A load applied to a selected pile to confirm that it is suitable for the load at the settlement specified. A proof load should not normally exceed 200% o f the working load on a working test pile. For preliminary load test pile proof load shall be 300% of working load or failure load which reaches early.
g) Reaction system: The arrangement of kentledge, piles. anchors or rafts that provides a resistance against which the pile is tested.
h) Tension pile: A pile which is designed to resist an axial force such as would cause it to be extracted from the ground. i) Test pile:
[17]
Any pile to which a test loading is or is to be applied. j) Ultimate bearing capacity: The load at which the resistance of the soil becomes fully mobilized.
k) Working load: The load which the pile is designed to carry. l) Working pile: One of the piles forming the foundation of a structure.
3 .0 4.5 .1 .2 Supervision
All test shall be carried out under the direction of an experienced and competent supervisor conversant with the test equipment and test procedure. All personnel operating the test equipment shall have been trained in its use.
3.04.5.1.3 Safety Precautions
3.04.5.1.3.1
General
When preparing for, conducting and dismantling a pile test the Contractor shall carry out the requirement of the various regulations and other statutory requirements that are applicable to the work for the provision and maintenance of safe working conditions, a nd shall in addition make such other provision as may be necessary to safeguard against any hazards that are involved in the testing or preparations for testing. 3.04.5.1.3.2 Kentledge
Where kentledge is used, the Contractor shall construct the foundatio ns for the kentledge and any crib work, beams or other supporting structure in such a manner that there will nor be differential settlement, bending or deflexion of an amount that . constitutes a hazard to safety or impairs the efficiency of the operation. The kentledge shall be adequately bonded, tied or otherwise held together to prevent it falling apart, or becoming unstable because of deflection of the supports.
The weight of kentlege shall be greater than the maximum test load and if the weight is esti mated from the density and volume of the constituent materials an adequate factor of safety against error shall be allowed. 3.04.5.1.3.3 Tension Piles and Ground Anchors
Where tension piles or ground anchors are used, the Contractor shall ensure that the load is
[18]
correctly transmitted to all the rods or bolts. The extension of rods by wielding shall not be permitted unless it is known that the steel will not be reduced in strength by welding. The bond stresses of the rods in tension shall not exceed normal permissible bond stresses for the type of steel and grade of concrete used. At any circumstances working pile shall not be allowed to use as tension pile. 3.04.5.1.3.4 Testing Equipment
In all cases the Contractor shall ensure that when the hydraulic jack and load measuring device are mounted on the pile head, the whole system shall be stable up to the maximum load to be applied. Means shall be provided to enable dial gauges to be read fr om a position clear of the kentledge stack or test frame in conditions where failure in an part of the system due to overloading, buckling, loss of hydraulic pressure and so on might constitute a hazard to personnel.
The hydraulic jack, pump, houses, pipe s, couplings and other apparatus to be operated under hydraulic pressure shall be capable of withstanding a test pressure of 1.5 tirnes the maximum working pressure without leaking. The maximum test load or test pressure expressed as a reading on the gauge in use shat, be displayed and all operators shall be aware of this limit.
3.04.5.1.4 C o n st r u ct i o n of a Pile for Preliminary Load Test
3.04.5.1.4.1
General
At lest one preliminary pile load test shall be completed before construction of any working pile. The Contractor shall allow one week after the last load test for the analysis of the load test data by the Engineer-in-Charge before specified pile tip elevations will be provided for working piles.
The location of load test piles shall be decided b y the Engineer-in-Charge. Proposal for reaction piles or kentledge and test equipments shall be submitted by the Contractor for Engineer -in-Charge approval.
The preliminary load test pile shall be subjected a load of three times the working load capacity or upto failure which ever is less. The sequence of loading will be as stipulated in Table - 1.
After testing is completed, the test piles and reaction piles (if any) shall be cut off at an elevation 900 mm below the finished ground surface. Kentledge and other assembly to be , removed and the surrounding areas to be made good to the satisfaction of the Engineer -in-Charge. The portion of the shafts cut off shall be disposed off by the Contractor.
[19]
3.04.5.1.4.2 Notice of Construction
The Contractor shall give the Engineer-in-Charge at least 48 hours notice of the commencement of construction of any preliminary load test pile.
3.04.5.1.4.3 Method of Construction
Each preliminary load test pile shall be constructed in a manner similar to that to be used fo r the construction of the working piles, and by the use of similar equipment and material. Any variation shall only be permitted with prior approval of the Engineer -in-Charge.
Extra reinforcement and concrete of increased strength shall be permitted in th e shafts of preliminary load test piles at the discretion of the Engineer -in-Charge.
3.04.5.1.4.4 B o r i n g or Driving Record
For each preliminary load test pile, a detailed record of the soils encountered during boring shall be made and submitted to the Engineer-in-Charge daily not later than noon of the next working day.
3.04.5.1.4.5 Cut Off Level The pile shaft shall terminate at the normal cut -off level or at a level required by the Engineer -inCharge.
The pile shaft shall be extended where necessary so that gauges and other apparatus to be used in the testing process are not damaged by water or falling debris. 3.04.5.1.4.6 Pile Head for Compression Tests
For a pile that is tested in compression, the pile head or cap shall be formed to give a plane surface which is normal to the axis of the pile, sufficiently large to accommodate the loading and settlement measuring equipment and adequately reinforced or projected to prevent damage from the concentrated application of load from the loading equipment.
3.04.5.1.4.7 Preparation of a Working Pile to be Tested
If a test is required on a working pile the Contractor shall cut down or otherwise prepare the pile for testing as required by the Engineer -in-Charge in accordance with the previous Clauses above.
[20]
3.04.5.1.5 Reaction Systems
3.04.5.1.5.1 Compression Tests
Compression tests shall be carried out using kentledge, tension piles or specially constru cted anchorages as proposed by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer -in-Charge.
Where kentledge is to be used, it shall be supported on cribwork . disposed around the pile head so that its centre of gravity is on the axis of the kentledge stack. kentledge shall not be carried directly on the pile head, except when directed by the Engineer -in-Charge.
3.04.5.1.5.2 Spacing
Where kentledge is used for loading vertical piles in compression, the distance from the edge of the test pile to the nearest part of the crib supporting the kentledge stack in contact with the ground shall be not be less than 2.5m.
The center to center spacing of vertical reaction piles from a test pile shalt be not less than three times the diameter of the test pile or 3.0 m, whichever is greater. 3.04.5.1.5.3 Adequate Reaction The size, length and number of the piles or anchors, or the area of rafts, shall be adequate to transrnit the maximum test load to the ground in a safe manner without excessive disturbance or influence on the test pile.
3.04.5.1.5.4 Care of Piles
The method employed in the installation of any reaction piles, anchors or rafts shall be such as to prevent damage to any test pile or working pile. 3.04.5.1.5.5Loading Arrangement The loading arrangement used shall be designed to transfer safely to the test pile the maximum load required in testing. Full details shall be submitted to the Engineer -in-Charge prior to any work related to the testing process being carried out on the site.
3.04.5.1.5.6 Equipment f or Applying Load
The equipment used for applying load shall consist of one or more hydraulic rams or jacks The total capacity of the jacks shall be at least equal to one and quarter times the requires maximum load. The jack or jacks shall be arranged in conjunction with th e reaction syster-; to deliver an
[21]
axial load to the test pile. The complete system shall be capable fen transforming the maximum load required for the test.
3.04.5.1.5.7 Measurement of Load
Suitable approved measuring devices for determining the load on the pile shat be supplied by the contractor. Certificates of calibration shall be supplied to the Engineer -in-Charge.
The type of gauges to be used and if required other details on the instrumentation shall be approved by the Engineer-in-Charge.
3.04.5.1.5.8 Adjustability of Loading Equipment
The loading equipment shall be capable of adjustment throughout the test to obtain a smooth increase of load or to maintain each load constant at the required stages of a maintained loading test.
3.04.5.1.5.9 Measuring Movement of Pile Heads
3.04.5.1.5.9.1 General
In a maintained load test movement of the pile head shall be measured by two of the methods as described below. One method for settlement measurements. the other method for control.
3.04.5.1.5.9.2 Leveling Method
An optical or any other leveling method by reference to an external datum may be used.
Where a level and staff are used, the level and scale of the staff shall be chosen to enable readings to be made to within an accuracy o f 0.5 mm. A scale attached to the pile or pile cap may be used instead of a leveling staff. At least two datum points shall be established on permanent objects or other well-founded structures, or deep datum points shall be installed. Each datum point shall be situated so that only one setting up of the level is needed.
No datum point shall be affected by the test loading or other operations on the site.
Where another method of leveling is proposed this shall be approved in writing by the Engineer in-Charge.
[22]
3.04.5.1.5.9.2 Independent Reference Frame
An independent reference frame may be set up to permit measurement of the movement of pile. The supports for the frame shall be founded in such a manner and at such a distance from test pile, kentledge support cribs, reaction pikes, anchorages and rafts that movements of ground in the vicinity of the equipment do not cause movement of the reference frame during testing.
the the the the
Check observations of any movements of the reference frame shall be made and a check shall be made of the movement of the pile head relative to an external datum during the progress of the test. In no case shall the supports be less than three test pile diameters or 3.0 m. whichever is greater, from the center of the test pile .
The measurement of pile movement shall be made by two dial gauges rigidly mounted on the reference frame that bear on surfaces normal to the pile axis fixed to the pile cap or head. Alternatively the gauges may be fixed to the pile and bear on surfaces on thereference frame. The dial gauges shall be placed in diametrically opposed positions and be equidistant from the pile axis. The dial gauges shall enable readings to he made to within an accuracy of 0.1 mm
The reference frames shall be protected from sun and wind. 3.04.5.1.5.9.3 Other Methods The Contractor may submit for approval any other method for measuring the movement c pile heads. 3.04.5.1.5.10 Protection of Testing Equipment
3.04.5.1.5.10.1 Protection from Weather
Throughout the test period all equipment for measuring load and movement shall protected from the weather.
3.04.5.1.5.10.2 Prevention of Disturbance Construction equipment and persons who are not involved in the testing process shall be kept at a sufficient distance from the test to avoid disturbance to the measuremer: ' apparatus 3.04.5.1.5.11 Supervision 3.04.5.1.5.13.1 Notice of Test
[23]
The Contractor shall give the Engineer-in-Charge at least 24 hours notice commencement of the test.
3.04.5.1.5.11.2 Records During the progress of a test, the testing equipment and all records of the test as require Clause shall be available for inspection by the Engineer -in-Charge. 3.04.5.1.5.12 Test Procedure 3.04.5.1.5.12.1Test by Maintained Load The maximum load which shall be applied in a preliminary pile load test shall be three times the working load capacity of the pile for upto failure which over is less. The maximum e i which shall be applied in a working pile load test shall be two times the working load of to pile. The loading and unloading shall be carried out in stages as shown in Table - 1 or required by the Engineer-inCharge.
Follo wing each application of an increment o f load, it shall be held for not less than the period shown in Table 3A:1 or until the rate of settlement is less than -0.25 mm/h and is slowing down. The rate of settlement shall be calculated from the slope of the curve through the points. Each stage of unloading shall proceed after the expiry of the period shown in Table - 1. For any period when the load is constant, time and settlement shall be recorded immediately on reaching the load and at approximately 15 minute in intervals for 1 h, at 30 minute intervals between 1 h and 4 h, and at 1 h interva ls between 4 h and 12 h after the application of the increment of load. The Engineer-in-Charge may require that the full loading, or any portion of the loading, be maintained on the pile for periods longer than shown in Table-1. 3.04.5.1.5.13 Presentation of Results 3.04.5.1.5.13.1 Results to be Submitted Results shall be submitted as a) A summary in writing to the Engineer-in-Charge, unless otherwise directed within 24 hours of the completion of the test, which shall give for a proof test by maintained load for each stage of loading, the period for which the load was held, the load and the maximum settlement or uplift recorded. b) The completed schedule of recorded data as in Clause below within 7 (seven) days of the completion of the test.
3.04.5.1.5.13.2 The Contractor shall provide information about the tested pile in accordance with
[24]
the following schedule where applicable. a) General Project Proposed structure Date of test b) P i l e d e t a i l s Identification (number and location of the test pile) Ground level at pile position Head level as which test load is applied Type of pile Length in ground Level of toe Details of Permanent casing (if any) c) Installation details Dates and times of boring, driving and concreting of test pile and adjacent piles. Date and time of casting concrete Driven length of pile or temporary casing at final set d) Test procedure Weight of kentledge Tension pile, ground anchor or compression pile details (if used) P lan o f test arrangement sho wing p o sitio n and d istances o f kentled ge supports, rafts, tension or compression piles and reference frame to test pile Jack capacity Method of load measurement Method(s) of penetration measurement Relevant dates and times. e) Test results In tabular form In g graphical form: loads plotted against movements and time. 3.04.5.1.5.14 Completion of a test 3.04.5.1.5.14.1 Measuring Equipment On completion of a test all equipment and measuring devices shall be dismantled, check and either stored so that they are available for use in further tests or removed from the s as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge. 3.04.5.1.5.14.2 Kentledge Kentieldge and its supporting structure shall be removed from the site pile and stored that they are available for use in further tests or removed from the site as directed
[25]
3.04.5.1.5.14.3 Temporary Piles Temporary tension piles, if used for a load test, shall be cut off below ground level, removed from the Site and the ground made good with approved material as specified. 3.04.5.1.5.14.4 Failure Criterion of Working Test Pile The Working Test Pile deemed to have failed if: i) Maximum settlement at twice the working load (proof load) exceeds 25 mm at the end of 24 hours, minimum time of holding the load. Residual settlement exceeds 6 mm at the end of I hour minimum time of holding load for the final unloading. If t he t es t p i le fa il s, fo r wh ic h t he o p i n io n o f t he E n g i ne er -i n - C h ar ge i s fi n al, t he Contractor shall not be paid for the failed pile and the load test. The Contractor shall propose remedial measure for the approval of the Engineer -in-Charge and the cost of the remedial work shall be borne by the Contractor. For each pile failure the Contr actor shall carryout two additional working pile load test at his own cost as per specification and direction of the Engineer-in-Charge. 3.04.5.1.6 3.04.5.1.6.1 Measurement and Payment Measurement
ii)
3.04.5.1.6.1.1 Working Piles Piles, complete in place, will be measured by the linear meter each size of shaft listed in the schedule of bid items. Measurement will be along the center -line of the shaft based on the tip and shaft cut-off elevations shown on the plans or ordered by the Engineer-in-Charge. 3.04.5.1.6.1.2 Test Shafts Test shafts of the specified diameter will be measured from the elevation of the ground at the time drilling begins, by the linear meter of acceptable test shaft drilled. 3.04.5.1.6.1.2 Load Test Load tests will be measured by the number of load tests performed for each designated pile load capacity. 3.04.5.1.6.2 Payment 3.04.5.1.6.2.1 Working Piles Piles will be paid for at the contract price as per schedule of items for boring, concreting, welding, reinforcement and load test separately. Such payment shall be considered to be full compensation for all costs involved with shaft excavation, disposal of excavated material, a n d t h e f u r n i s h i n g i n c l u d i n g a l l l a b o u r, ma t e r i a l s e q u i p me n t , t e mp o r a r y c a s i n g a n d incidentals necessary to complete the piles.
[26]
3.04.5.1.6.2.1 Tests Shafts Piles will be paid for at the contract price as per schedule of items for boring, concreting, welding, reinforcement and load test separately. Such payment shall be full co mpensation for excavation and concrete for backfill material including all labour, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary to complete the test shafts.
3 .0 4 .6 P il e I nt e gr i t y T es t 3.04.6.1 General Requirement T he intent of the pile integrity test (PI T) is to assess qualitatively the integrity and workmanship of the production pile - through a low strain hammer impacts made on the pile head the condition of pile shaft with respect to potential defects such as necking, honey combing, existing of cracks and voids etc, but not to substitute/ replace the routine load test on pile. It is called as Low Strain Method (since it requires the impact of only a small hand held ha mmer) and also r efer r ed to as a No n -Destructive Metho d . T he evaluatio n o f P IT records is conducted either according to the Pulse -Echo or the Transient Response Procedure. The test shall be conducted in accordance with internatio nal codes such as ASTM 5882 - -00 or "Specification for Piling" by Institution of Civil Engineers (ICE), U.K. 3.04.6.2 Description of Method In Low Strain Integrity test the impact of a small hand held hammer is applied axially on the sha ft to p and the sha ft to p mo tio n i s meas ured . Fo r the T ransient Resp o nse Metho d th e measurement of hammer force is also necessary. The motion record, more specifically the pile top velocity, must be displayed and produce on hard co p y as a functio n o f time. W here high soil frictio n fo rces are present, integratio n with exponentially increasing magnitude should be applied to the velocity signal such that the pile toe reflection is enhanced. The apparatus must have filter for wavelet analysis. The wa v e l e t a n a l ys i s i s a s p e c i a l iz e d f i l t e r t h a t e ffe c t iv e l y s t r e n g t h e n s t h e s i g n a l fr e q u e n c y c o mp o n e n t s t h a t ma t c h t h e i n p u t p u l s e a n d r e mo v e s u n d e s i r a b le fr eq u e n c y c o mp o n e n t s r e s u l t i n g fr o m n o i s e . I n g e n e r a l , s e v e r a l r e co rd s s h o u l d b e a v e r a g e d , h o we v e r , t h e *e s engi neer is r esp o n sib le f o r assur in g t hat co n siste nt reco rd s are i nclud ed i n t he avera ge The averaged, amplified velocity is the standard result of the Sonic Pulse Echo Method. in addition to the velocity record as a function of time, the amplified and averaged difference b e t we e n v e l o c i t y a n d f o r c e m a y a l s o b e d e p i c t e d . T h i s g r a p h wo u l d p r o v i d e a d d i t i o n a l information as to the quality near the pile top. The velocity vs. frequency plot and I transform may add valuable pile length and damage location information. The Transient Response Method includes as a result the ratio of velocity to force transform fo r all relevant fr eq uencies. T his curve is called Mob ility. It sho uld b e sho wn to get her wit h the related low frequency pile stiffness. These Transient Response results are only available if hammer force is measured.
3.04.5.1.6.2.1 Tests Shafts Piles will be paid for at the contract price as per schedule of items for boring, concreting, welding, reinforcement and load test separately. Such payment shall be full compensation
[27]
for excavation and concrete for backfill material including all labour, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary to complete the test shafts. 3 .0 4 .6 P il e I nt e gr i t y T es t in the field such that at least a preliminary data quality evaluation can be mad e. A timing calibration should be possible. The test equipment for the integrity testing shall, at the minimum, consists of a portable computer, signal conditioning sub -system, accelerometer, and computer controlled amplifier and connection cables. Any oth er equipment required shall also be mobilized by the agency without any obligation to the owner
3.04.6.4 Test Personnel
Non-destructive pile integrity tests shall be conducted by a specialized agency approved by the Engineer to evaluate the integrity of piles. The specialized agency shall design the instrument system and testing procedures and provide personnel and instruments for carrying out the tests and submit test report. Objective of testing is to detect pile defects, including cracks, soil intrusions, caving, bulging, voids and variation in pile diameter and length. The credentials and past experiences of the specialized agency and professional to be deputed for testing along with method statement detailing the testing procedure including equipment details, analysis, data interpretation and reporting of test results shall be submitted to the Engineer at least 28 days before commencement of tests for his approval. The Contractor shall provide all reasonable facilities to the specialized agency. The Contractor shall provide all inserts provided in detailed drawings. The actual field-testing may be performed by an experienced technician with at least two (2) years experience in dynamic pile testing. The analysis and interpretation of the records, however, requires extensive experience by a graduated engineer with at least three (3) years experience in dynamic pile testing on large diameter bored cast-in-situ piles.
3.04.6.5 Test Preparation
Pile Integrity testing shall not be performed on a pile until the concrete has cured for a minimum of seven (7) days unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. The pile head shall be free from water, dirt or other debris. The concrete at the pile top surface must be flat or level and have sufficient space for attachment of the sensing device and impact area. At the assigned site, test piles (on which initial & routine load tests wil l be conducted) shall be initially tested to enable establishment of a characteristic or reference signal which can then be used to compare the observed signals obtained for the subsequent selected piles The number, type, and locatio n o f piles for testing shall be sp ecified b y the Engineer. Additional piles may be selected for testing at the discretion of the engineer if circumstances either during or after pile installation should make a piles' integrity suspect.
[28]
Concreting of pile caps shall commence only after the piles are accepted by the Engineer.
3.04.6.6 Frequency of Tests
This testing shall be carried out on cast-in-situ piles employed for foundations of the project. At least one integrity test shall be carried out at each column locations. Engine er based on geotechnical and construction details shall select the pile location under pier/ abutment for testing. However, the Engineer at his own direction may increase the number of integrity testing.
3.04.6.7 Presentations and Interpretation of Results The testing engineer will have a minimum of forty-eight, (48) hours after performing a test to provide the final test results and integrity evaluation. As a minimum, for each pile tested, the averaged, amplified velocity vs. time record should be included in the report. Additional plots and analyses can be included as required or suggested by the testing engineer. The experienced test engineer shall discuss each record summarizing his diagnosis in a table. This diagnosis may be based on the appearance of a "typical" record. The agency shall prepare a detailed report including their engineering analysis and recommendations and identify substandard piles and also recommend remedial measures required to be followed by the owner to ensure subsequent quality piling. If any load testing is required, the same shall also be indicated & piles identified for the same from the response of piles during integrity testing. Improvements/changes required in the procedure of installation of piles, if any, will also be clearly brought out. Shafts with only insignificant reflections from locations other than the pile toe and with a clear pile toe reflection may be accepted. Where no clear toe reflection is app arent, the experienced test engineer shall state to which depth the test appears to be conclusive. Where significant reflections from locations above the pile toe are observed, a quantification of the irregularity must be attempted by the test engineer. If such reflection indicates a significant pile impedance reduction, the pile either will be rejected or any suitable remedial measure will be undertaken if deemed fit by Engineer. If the record is complex, the results may be deemed questionable. Constructio n records (concrete usage, grout pressure records, soil borings) may be valuable in results interpretation or additional numerical analysis modeling may be used to quantify the record. At the discretion of Engineer the rejected/ questionable piles may be subjected to further testing, e.g., static. If the overall test results indicate the deficiency in the integrity of the pile due to which the future performance of the pile is questionable and is not structurally adequate, the pile/ piles shall be rejected. The Contractor shall repair, replace or supplement the defective work in a manner approved by Engineer. The construction of additional drilled shaft shall be discontinued until the Contractor demonstrates the adequacy of the shaft construction method and any subsequent method changes to the satisfaction of the Engineer. The cost involves for any additional works i.e further test to reconfirm the acceptability of the pile or any remedial measures or replacement by new pile/s and subsequent changes in struc tural design etc. shall be borne by Contractor without any extra claim. 3.04.6.8 Payment The payment for this item of test shall cover all cost of mobilizing/hiring the specialized team and equipment to site including all preparatory arrangement, overhead expenses, VAT, IT and incidentals. The payment will be based on the actual number of pile s subjected to integrity testing as per the directive of the Engineer-in-charge. 3.05 BREAKING OF PILE HEAD 3.05.1 1 Description
[29]
r Breaking the head of pile upto required length by approved means and removing the dismantled materials such as concrete to a safe distance including scrapping and removing concrete from rods, bending of rod for anchorage in pile cap, carrying all sorts of handling,stacking the same properly after clearing, levelling and dressing the site etc. complete as p er drawing, specification and direction of the Engineer-in-Charge.
3.05.2 Method of Measurement T h e wo r k s h a l l b e p a id fo r o n t h e b a s i s a s n o t ed i n t h e s c h e d u l e quantities. 3.05.3 Basis of Payment The amount of completed and accepted work, measured as provided above, shall be paid at t h e contract unit price for the item which price and payment shall constitute full compensation for performing all the requirements of this item including furnishing al l labor, equipment and materials, excavating, handling of excavated materials, disposing of the debris at the place ordered by the Engineer -in-Charge inside or within 300 meters outside the site as well as all incidentals such as overhead, profit, taxes, V ATS etc. necessary to complete the work according to the applicable plans. 3.06 EARTH WORK IN EXCAVATION 3.06.1 Description The work includes setting out true lines to all foundation structures, performing excavation to the required levels and grades in any kind of soil encountered, removing the spoils to a safe distance as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge. 3.06.2 Construction requirements Before any excavation commences, the reference bench marks need to be carefully f ixed on the ground at some suitable place by putting 16mm M.S. bar protecting it by 450mm x 450mm x 600mm concrete covering around it. The bar top should be the reduced level of b ench mark. B ar top sho uld b e projected 20 mm abo ve the co ncrete top surface. T he Contractor shall take necessary measure and protect the vertical shoring in such a way that the entire excavation (including the protective measures) strictly remains with the shore protection line. If any encroachment is done or any damages occur to an y neighbouring building & plots or to Municipality lands, the Contractor shall be sole responsible for such damages and shall be bound to pay all compensation claimed by the owners of these lands. T he excavated ear th excep ting tho se req uired fo r b ack filling will b e d isp o sed b y the Contractor and he will carry it away from the site to a safe place to be arranged by him (Contractor). The site should be kept clean and no earth should be deposited in o r near the site. The depth of excavation will be as shown in the plans and as per direction of the Engineer inCharge. The Contractor will keep the excavated level in such a working condition that it will be possible for him to erect all equipment during the excavation work and remove them after the excavation of the earth is complete. Contractor should fill excess excavated level if any, to the design level by 1:3:6 concrete to the satisfaction of the Engineer -in-Charge without any extra cost.
of
it e m a n d b i l l o f
[30]
3.06.2.1 Disposal of Excavated Materials All excavated materials shall be the property of the Emp lo yer. During excavatio n, the Contractor will simultaneous remove the excavated earth at his own cost at any place where he like to disposal the earth as there is no space to damp the earth at site. The Employer shall charge a royalty per Cum for this excavated earth to the Contractor. 3.06.3 Method of Measurement All excavation shall be measured net between the vertical plans of outsides of structures and no allowance shall be made for the extra excavation for working space, etc. Any extra excavation beyond depth and dimension which is carried out through error and detrimental for the structure, must be compensated by the Contractor at his own expenses by furnishing compacted sand fill of FM 2.5 or concrete as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge. 3.06.4 Basis of Payment Payment for excavatio n will b e mad e at the co ntract unit price per cub ic meter (cum) measured as provided above, which price shall consti tute full compensation for furnishing, transporting and placing a\\ equi\pmev>t and materials, including setting out of pits and trenches, establishing and securing bench marks, excavating, handling of excavated materials, backfilling and compacting of the same, shoring, dewatering, and disposing of surplus excavated materials and debris by hauling to any distance at approved locations inside/outside the site, as well as all incidentals such as overhead, profit, taxes, VAT etc. necessary to complete the work according to the applicable plans. The Employer will deduct at a rate of T aka 9.00 per cubic meter the contractor as royalty of the excavated earth. The deducted volume of the earth will be same as excavated volume of earth. 3.07 EARTH FILLING 3.07.1 Description
The work covered by this item shall consist of filling any place or area, to make up levels, according to these Specifications and Plans with specified earth materials. 3.07.2 Construction Requirements Silty Sand or other approved materials, free from large lumps, organic or other extraneous materials, shall be used for fill. Materials from excavation on the sites may be used as ordinary fill if it is approved. The fill materials shall be deposited and spread in successive thin uniform horizontal layers of about 150mm thick and compacted by use of mechanical or other approved devices to 98% in standard Proctor in road and pavement sub-base and 95% for other area. Tests will have to be carried out at BRTC -BUET laboratory or in any recognizes laboratory to ascertain the nature of the fill material and the degree of compaction obtained for the filled material for which samples have to be taken expense and as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge
3. 0 7.3 Method of Measurement T he method of measurement will be as follows : - The ditch or filling area will be divided into small
[31]
regular sections such as square or rectangular section of 3m x 3m or 3m x 5m or any other suitable dimension. Each sectional area is then multiplied by the average of corner ordinates of that section taken from pre work contour levels and add the whole volume. This volume is termed as volume reference to (o) zero level. The square or rect angular sections at slope will be adjusted mutually to take into account the shape of the slope. Then the total sectional area is multiplied by the post work level (average level after filling) of the filled area. The difference between post work and pre work volume is the actual filled volume of ditch or filling area. Veasurement for which payment will be made for filling shall be the quantities of completed .vork in place deter mined by the method described above: The ground level elevations shown on the plan will be used as original level. The volume of foundation pits and trenches 'o be backfilled by excavated earth shall not be considered in this item. 3 .0 7 .4 B a s is o f Pa y me n t Payment for filling will be made at the contract unit price per cum measured as provided above which price shall be full compensation for materials, carrying, placing, levelling, shaping and compacting of fill materials in layers and furnishing of all equi pment, tools, incidentals such as overhead, profit, taxes, VAT etc. necessary to complete the work. 3.08 3.08.1Description The work covered by this item shall consist of filling any place or area, to make up levels, according to these Specifications and Plans with specified and approved materials. 3.08.2Material Fineness modulus of sand shall not be less than 1.2 (one point two), shall be clean and -lee from organic and other deleterious materials. 3.08.3 Construction Requirements The fill materials shall be deposited and spread in successive uniform horizontal layers of about 150mm thick and compacted by use of mechanical or other approved devices to 98% standard Proctor in road and pavement sub -base and 95% for other area. In filling /back filling against a newly constructed structure precaution must be taken so that the structure is well matured to take the thrust of filling and while filling that against a wall, the filling is done from both sides simultaneously. Tests will have to be carried out at BRTC-BUET laboratory or in any recognized laboratory designated by the Engineer -in-Charge to ascertain the nature of the fill material and the Engineer-in-Charge. 3.08.4 Method of Measurement The method of measurement will be as follows: T he d itch or filling ar ea will b e d ivid ed into s mall reg ular sectio ns s uch as sq uare o r rectangular section of 3m x 3m or 3m x 5m or any other suitable dimension. Each sectional area is then multiplied by the average of corner ordinates of that section taken from pre work contour SAND FILLING
[32]
levels and add the whole volume. This volume is termed as volume reference to zero (o) level. The square or rectangular sections at slope will be adjuste d mutually to take into account the shape of the slope. Then the total sectional area is multiplied by the post work level (average level after filling) of the filled area. The difference between post work and pre work volume is the actual filled volume of ditch or filling area. Measurement for which payment will be made for filling shall be the quantities of completed work in place deter mined b y the method described above. The ground level elevatio ns shown on the plan will be used as original level. 3.08.5 Basis of Payment Payment for filling will be made at the contract unit price per cum measured as provided above which price shall be full compensation for materials, carrying, placing, levelling, shaping and compacting of fill materials in layers and furn ishing of all labours, equipment, tools, incidentals such as overhead, profit, taxes, VAT etc. necessary to complete the work. 3.09 3.09.1Description The work covered by this item shall consist of supplying and laying bricks on top of the earth or sand bed to form a sub-base. 3.09.2Materials Bricks shall comply with requirements of First Class bricks unless otherwise required by the Engineer-inCharge. The blinding sand will have a minimum Fineness Modulus of 1.0 (one) and shall be clean, and free of any organic matters. 3.09.3 Construction Requirements The bed for BFS shall be prepared level and compacted, dewatered and cleared of all loose materials. Bricks shall be laid flat in surface to surface contact with adjoining bricks and their joints shall be filled with sand. The sand shall be brushed in until the joints are filled. Flushing in of sand with water will not be done unless permitted. Bricks shall not be laid on the floor or foundation bed until the floor or foundation bed is inspected and approved by the Engineer in-Charge representative. In case of Multi-layer Soling, care shall be taken to stagger or "break" all joints in placing subsequent courses of soling. No brick shall be laid on loose earth or earth filling which are not compacted to the desired degree. BRICK FLAT SOLING (BFS)
3.09.4 Method of Measurement Brick soling shall be measured in square meter.
[33]
3.09.5 Basis of Payment The amount of completed and accepted work, measured as provided above, will be paid for at the contract unit price per sq. which price shall be in full compensation for all material, transporting, placing, and all labor, mason, equipment, tools, and incidentals such as overhead, profit, taxes, VAT etc. necessary to complete the work.
3.10
BRICK ON END EDGING
3.10.1 Description This work consists of providing and placing five holeBull nose bricks on end edging along the road and aproan on a single layer brick flat soling and sand filling. 3.10.2 Materials Bull nose Bricks (190X9OX90mm) shall comply with requirements of local made landscaping bricks ofgood quality (equivalent to First Class brick). The blinding sand will have a minimum Fineness Modulus of 1.0 (one point zero) and shall be clean, and free of any organic matters. 3.10.3 Construction Requirements Bricks shall be laid on end edging with their longest side vertical or inclined to a certain degree with the alignment of the road and short side perpendicular to the road including necessary excavation filling and ramming to the satisfaction of the Engineer-in-Charge. The completed work shall be true to line and level and grade as indicated on the drawings. Interstices between brick edging and adjacent paving or soling shall be filled by brushing in sand until voids are filled, the edging shall be sprinkled with water. 3 .1 0.4 M ea sureme nt This item shall be measured in linear meters of completed brick on end edging. 3 .1 0 .5 Pa y me nt Payment shall be made at contract unit price mentioned in the bill of quantities. 3.11 CEMENT CONCRETE (C.C.) WORKS
3.11.1 Description The work covered by this item shall consist of constructing in foundation/floor and where necessary as per drawing with Concrete Class C14/C15 as specified in schedule of item. 3.11.2 Materials Cement shall be Ordinary Portland Cement Type -1, sand shall be 50% local sand with minimum FM 1.5, 50% sylhet sand with FM 2.5. coarse aggregate shall be either crushed stone or picked jhama brick chips as
[34]
specified in Bill of Quantities, water shall be potable water. 3.11.3 Construction Requirements The specification shall be the same as for R.C.C works excepting that. (1) (ii) No reinforcement will be used-, Strength/Proportion shall be as noted in Schedule of Items;
(iii) 20mm downgraded chips of stone shall be used as coarse aggregate or as specified in Schedule of Item; (iv) (v) The curing shall be done for 7 days minimum; Wooden or steel tempers or y ammers in lieu of vibrators may do compaction of concrete. If C.C. work is done over brick soling, it shall be sprinkled with water so that no loss of water from concrete can occur due to absorption of water by dry bricks. In case sub soil water tends to rise and wash away C.C. work in foundation, while this is being done, dewatering of foundation bed shall be done by making sumps and using pump or manual labo r. The dewatering process shall continue until the concrete has set. In order to improve bond with masonr y/co ncrete work co ming above it, if required, the surface shall be roughened before it reaches initial set, b y scouring with the help of a pointed tool or wire brush. 3.11.4 Method of Measurement This item shall be measured in the cubic meter complete in place. The amount of completed and accepted work, as mentioned above shall be paid for at the q uoted unit price and payment shall b e for full co mp ensa tio n o f all materials, labors including preparation of bed transport, hatching, mixing, pouring, compacting and curing etc. necessary to complete the item according to drawing and direction of Engineer-in-Charge. 3.12 REINFORCED CEM ENT CONCRETE (R.C.C) WORK
3.12.1 Scope of Work T he wo r k co ver ed b y t h i s i te m s h al l co n si s t o f b ut no t li mi t ed to rei n fo r ced co nc ret e construction in foundations, rafts, columns, lintels, beams, slab, wall panels, retaining walls, underground water reservoirs, water tanks etc. of the form, demension and design shown in the drawings
[35]
3.12.2 Materials 3.12.2.1 Cement P o r t l a n d C e m e n t T y p e - 1 c o n f o r m i n g t o A S T M C - r o c 2 3 2 - 1 9 9 3 ( 2 n d Revision). It shall be free from any hardened lumps and any foreign material other than the manufacturing ingredients. Cement shall have a minimum 90% o f particles b y weight, passing the 75 micron sieve. The Engineer-in-Charge Representative reserves the right to reject any cement that fails to achieve specified co ncrete strength laid do wn in the se specifications and the schedule of items
Only approved brand, grade or kind of cement shall be used in a given structure above the round level especially for fair face concrete, tiles work etc. except upon the written permission of the Engineer-inCharge where other brands may be used.
Cement bags containing clods giving indications of starting of initial setting time shall not be -d in R.C.0 work.
Only one brand of cement shall be used for a particular casting work except by written permission from the Engineer-in-Charge. Different types of cement, if approved by the Engineer-in-Charge shall be stored separately and shall not be mixed.
Use of rebagged cement shall not be allowed.
Engineer-in-Charge, at his discretion shall test cement which he feels to have deteriorated rough age, damage to bags, improper storage or for any other reason. In the event of any sample being found to be not in accordance with BIDS 232-1993 (2nd Revision) or ASTM 150 or any other standard as specified, the whole consignment from which the sample comes shall be rejected and removed from the site immediately notwithstanding any previous acceptance otherwise.
cement may be measured by weight or in a standard bag to weigh 1 cwt or 112 pounds/50kg having a volume of 0.0354 cum/1.25 cft. The Contractor shall maintain the records of deliveries of cement to the site and its use in the work.
Cement shall be stored at site in such a manner as to permit easy access for proper inspection, handling and identification of each shipment. Cement shall not be stocked higher than 6 bags. 3.12.2.2 Supply of Aggregates
Unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer-in-Charge, fine and coarse aggregates for concrete shall comply with the relevant requirements of ASTM C33.
[36]
All coarse aggregates for incorporation into concrete mixes shall consist of hard, solid, durable, uncoated angular rock fragments or angular fragments of crushed stones and shall not contain dust, mud, organic materials or other deleterious matter.
All fine aggregates for incorporation into concrete mixes shall be clean, hard, solid and durable natural sand and shall not contain harmful amounts of dust, mud, organic material or other deleterious substances. The fine aggregates shall be as far as possible pure Silica (Si02).
1)
The aggregates shall be graded and the combined gradation of aggregates used for the concreting
works shall have to be approved by the Engineer-in-Charge.
3.12.2.3 Gradation of Fine and Coarse Aggregate
The gradation of the fine aggregates shall conform to the requirements shown below.
Grading of fine aggregate
ASTM Sieve Designation 3/8 in (9.5 mm No. 4 (4.75 mm No. 8 (2.36 mm No. 16 (1.18 mm) No. 30 (600 mm) No. 50 (300 mm) No. 100 (150 mm)
Per Cent Finer by Weight 100 95-100 80-100 50-85 25-60 10-30 2-10
The gradation of coarse aggregate shall conform to the following:
Designated sizes
Percentage by weight passing US Standard sieves having square openings
38 mm 25 mm down graded 20 mm down graded 12 mm down graded 100 -
25 mm 95100 100
20 mm 90100 100
12 mm 25-60 90100
10 mm 20-55 40-70
No. 4 0-10 0-10 0-15
No. 8 0-5 0-5 0-5
[37]
3.12.2.4 Reinforcement for Concrete (i) Unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer-in-Charge, the reinforcement to be used shall be mild steel 60 Grade deformed bars having minimum yield strength of 415 Mpa (60,000 psi) and shall conform to ASTM A615. Cutting, bending, cleaning and fastening in position of reinforcing steel shall conform to the requirements of ACI 318, unless otherwise specified by Engineer-in-Charge. (iii) Prior to placing orders for reinforcing steel, the Contractor shall submit samples, Specifications and test
certificates as specified herein and as required by the Engineer-in-Charge for approval. No order shall be placed until such approval is given in writing. (iv) All consignments of reinforcing steel shall be stamped by the manufacturer to identify the Mill, Grade
of steel, and the lot number from which the consignment was made. (v') Reinforcing steel shall be stored on the ground in separate groups according to size and length in such a manner as to be readily accessible when required, and with facilities for inspection. (vi) Before being placed in position, all reinforcing steel shall be thoroughly cleaned of grease, paint, loose
rust or other coatings of any kind, which reduce bond. (vii) All reinforcing steel to be incorporated in the work shall be placed accurately in the position shown on
the drawings and shall be held firmly in position during placing and setting of concrete. (viii) The detailing of all reinforcing steel on the construction drawings shall be to therequirements of ACI
31 8-current issues. 3.12.2.5 Mixing Water Water for mixing concrete shall, unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer-in-Charge, be potable water drawn from a tubewell or obtained from a public water supply authority. The water to be used shall be clean and free from all deleterious materials that significantly affect the hydration reactions of Portland cement. iii). The Contractor shall propose the provisions to ensure a satisfactory and adequate supply of potable
water subject to the approval of the Engineer-in-Charge.
[38]
iv), V).
In no case, the Contractor shall be allowed to use surface water. Water must be free from excessive chlorides and sulphates. Water supplies shall be
Sampled and tested for chlorides and sulphates in a standard materials testing laboratory as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge. The maximum acceptance limits shall be as follows : 1000 mg/1 as S03 for sulphates 500 mg/1 as CI ion for chlorides. 3.12.2.6 Admixtures for Concrete An air-entraining admixture may be desirable because of the increased workability of concrete that can be achieved. Water-reducing or water-reducing and retarding admixtures are particularly beneficial in reducing water content to provide a cohesive yet high slump concrete. (ii) The Contractor may add water-reducing and set-controlling admixtures into concrete mixes subject to
satisfactory trial mixes and to prior written approval of the Engineer-in-Charge. Such admixtures shall comply with ASTM C494. Where admixtures are added for the purpose of entraining air they shall comply with ASTM C260. (iii) (iv) Additives containing chlorides shall not be used. Details of the type and quantities of admixtures which the Contractor wishes to usein the underwater
concreting work shall be submitted to the Engineer-in-Charge forapproval. Any admixture to be used by the Contractor must conform to therequirements outlined in ACI 212.3R. 3.12.3 Delivery and Storage of Materials
3.12.3.1 Cement The Contractor shall be responsible for the proper storage of the cement at the job site. Cement shall be stored in a weather proof shaded area having damproof floor, waterproof walls and leakproof roof. The cement stacks shall be placed at a minimum distance of 300mm from the walls. The dampproof floor shall be constructed by raising it minimum 300mm above the ground. If the cement is damaged and becomes lumpy due to defective storage, it shall be removed from the job site within 24 hours of receipt of instructions from the Engineer-in-Charge Representative.
Cement in transit and storage or stock-piled at site shall be protected from dampness or any damage by climatic conditions that would change its characteristics or usability. Cement godown shall be constructed to be fully weather proof. Batches of cement shall be used for the work in the order in which they are delivered
[39]
to the site. A register shall be maintained by the Contractor listing date of delivery and quantity of each consignment for easy identification.
3.12.3.2 Aggregates
Aggregates shall be stock-piled at least 7 days prior to their anticipated use to permit the Engineer-in-Charge to sample each stockpile to determine the acceptability of the material for the intended use.
Aggregates of different sizes or grades and from different sources of supply shall not be mixed. All aggregate shall be stored free from contact with earth and other deleterious matter.
Every precaution shall be taken during transport and stockpiling of coarse aggregate to prevent segregation.
Segregated aggregates shall not be used until they have been thoroughly remixed and the resultant pile is of uniform and acceptable grading at any point from which a representative sample is taken.
3.12.3.3 Reinforcing steel
Reinforcing steel shall be stacked with each dia type of bars stockpiling seperately under shed to avoid effect of rain and dew. Stockpiling of huge quantity of steel bar shall be avoided to save it from- rusting and deterioration through oxidation. Sufficient quantity required for single operation of casting should be collected from one approved source and stored at site prior to rod bending and binding work. Reinforcing bars shall not be stockpiled on soil. A raised platform shall be prepared by laying brick flat soling over which reinforcing bars shall be stacked in orderly manner.
Sufficient acceptable materials shall be available at the batching site to ensure continuous placement necessary for structures. The moisture content of the accepted aggregate shall remain consistent to the extent that the resultant successive batches of concrete do not vary in consistency by more than 6mm of slump. If the moisture content in the aggregate varies by more than the above tolerance, corrective measures shall be taken to bring the moisture to a constant and uniform quantity before any more concrete is placed.
Coarse aggregate shall be saturated with water at least 12 hours before use to prevent absorption of the mixing water.
3.12.3.4 Boulders
The boulders shall be supplied in sizes that can be handled manually by one person. Stock piling shall be such as to permit ready identification of the materials and shall be approved by the Engineer-in-Charge. Site
[40]
for stockpiles shall be clean prior to storing materials. The stockpiles shall be built-up in layers not to exceed 1200mm in height and each layer shall be in place before the next layer is started.
3.12.4 Composition of Mix
The strength requirement and workability shall govern the max. proportion for each class of concrete:
3.12.4.1 Trial Mixes and Mix Proportion
(i) The Contractor shall undertake the design of concrete mixes in accordance with ACI 211.1 for the designated class of concrete to be used in the works. The design of concrete mix shall be carried out in a recognized material-testing laboratory as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge. The following requirements shall be fulfilled in proportioning the ingredients and designing the concrete mix: The minimum amount of cement to be used by the Contractor shall be as per Clause 3.13.4 To produce dense impermeable concrete, water cement ratio of not more than 0.45 shall be used. Gradation of fine and coarse aggregates shall conform to the limits as Specified in Clauses 3.13.2.3 unless otherwise approved by the Engineer -in-Charge. Fine aggregates of not less than 45 per cent by volume of total aggregates shall be used. The maximum slump for different class of concrete shall be as follows: Piles: 150-200 mm Raft: 75 mm Mat Foundation: 25 to 62.5 mm Columns and Walls: 25 to 50 mm Slabs and Beams. 25 to 50 mm Required average compressive strength used as the basis for selection of concrete proportions (mix design) shall be 8.3 Mpa (1200 psi) more than the specified compressive strength of concrete. (ii) No concrete shall be placed in the works until the Engineer-in-Charge has approved the mix design. (iii) When a mix has been approved, no variations shall be made in the proportions, the sources of cement and aggregates, or in the types, size and grading of the aggregates without the approval of the Engineerin-Charge. (iv) When (after approval of a mix by the Engineer-in-Charge) the seasonal climatic conditions have
[41]
changed significantly, the Contractor shall make any necessary modifications to mix design and carry out further trials and resubmit the mix design (whether amended or not) for re-approval by the Engineer-inCharge. (v) The Contractor shall allow an adequate period for design of mixes, trials and approval before concrete is to be placed in the works. 3.12.4.2 Concrete Batching and Mixing (i) The Contractor shall provide modern and dependable batching and mixing equipment capable of supplying concrete of the approved mixes and Specification at the placement location at a continuous production rate adequate to meet the requirement of the working schedule. (ii) The Contractor shall provide, operate and maintain all necessary equipment required to determine accurately and to control the amount of each separate ingredient entering the concrete mix. (iii) The Contractor shall use weight-batch equipment for batching different ingredients of concrete. (iv) The Contractor shall use truck-mounted drum mixers for mixing different ingredients of concrete. (v) Concrete shall be batched using the cement-, fine aggregates and graded (combined) coarse aggregates in proportions used in the trial mixes prepared in connection with the mix design approved by the Engineer-inCharge. (vi) The amount of cement, fine aggregate and coarse aggregate entering each batch of concrete shall be based on weight. Where powdered admixtures are used, the amount shall be determined by weight, and where liquid admixtures are used, the amount may be determined either by weight or by volume. The Engineer-in-Charge shall approve the use and amount of admixtures to be used. vii) The weights of the fine and coarse aggregates shall be adjusted to allow for the free water contained in them. The corresponding free water content shall increase the batch weight of aggregates. The volume of water to be added to the mix shall be reduced by an amount equal to the free water contained in the aggregates. (viii) All materials used in the concrete mix shall be measured separately and not cumulatively. The
Engineer-in-Charge shall check the accuracy of the measuring devices. He shall be provided with all the necessary checking facilities by the Contractor and this accuracy shall be maintained so that the indicated measure does not vary by more than one per cent from true measure throughout their range of use. (ix) Mixing equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned before being charged with a new batch of concrete.
Mixers, which have been out of, use for more than 30 minutes shall be thoroughly cleaned before any fresh concrete is mixed.
[42]
Mixers shall not be loaded in excess of the manufacturer's rated capacity, which shall be displayed on the mixer in terms of the volume of mixed concrete. (xi) In addition to the above requirements, all aspects of batching, mixing and placing of concrete shall be
in accordance with ACI 304R and to the approval of the Engineer- in-Charge. Class of Concrete (Min Mixing proportion) 28 day cylinder crushing strength (min) 23 Mpa Raft/footing, column, wall etc. as specified in bill of quantities C23 (1:1.5:3) 23 Mpa grade beam, beam, slab, stair etc, as specified in bill of quantities C19 (1:1.5:3) 19 Mpa In cast-in-situ concrete pile as specified in bill of quantities C19 (1:1.5:3) 19 Mpa DPC, internal road 2.5 Sand 50% FM 2.5 and 50 % FM 1.2 C17 (1:2:4) 17 Mpa In lintel, sun shade, fin, false slab, railing, drop wall, parapet, boundary wall, road, patent stone, screeding, kerb stone septic tank & soak well slab etc. as per bill of quantities C15 (1:3:5) 15 Mpa Paving slab on roof Sand 50% FM 1.5 and 50 % FM 2.5 C14(1:3:6) 14 Mpa Cement concrete, apron Sand FM 1.5 20/12mm downgraded stone chips 20mm downgraded stone chips 210 kg 235 kg Sand 50% FM 2.5 and 50 % FM 1.2 2.5 Sand FM 20mm downgraded stone chips 20mm downgraded stone chips 20mm downgraded stone chips 20mm downgraded stone chips 20mm downgraded stone chips 300 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg 400 kg Fine Coarse Place of use Aggregates Min cement per cum
C23 (1:1.5:3)
Sand 50% FM 2.5 and 50 % FM 1.2 Sand FM
[43]
1:5:10
Temporary work
Sand FM 1.5
20mm downgraded stone chips 150 kg
(xii)
Standby mixing capacity shall be provided by the Contractor (sufficient to ensure continuity of
concreting in the event of breakdowns of mixing plant) and shall be maintained ready for immediate use during the course of all concrete pours. (xiii) The Contractor shall not use ready-mixed concrete made off the site by others (suppliers or
subcontractors) except with the prior written approval of the Engineer-in-Charge in each case. (xiv) The Contractor shall conduct a series of trial mixes using the batching and mixing equipment to
determine appropriate concrete mixes with regard to the consistency and strength requirements. These trial mixes shall be carried out by the Contractor on the site and be approved by the Engineer-in-Charge prior to the start of any placement of concrete. Copies giving details of all trial mix results shall be forwarded to the Engineer-in-Charge for approval. 3.12.5 Preparation before Mixing of Concrete Before mixing concrete, preparation shall include the following a) b) All equipment's for mixing and transporting concrete shall be cleaned. The platform where the concrete shall be poured from mixer machine shall be cleaned with water and
free from debris and other harmful materials. c) Containers for measuring coarse aggregates, sand, cement; water shall be checked and approved by the
Site Engineer-in-Charge. d) e) f) g) h) i) All debris shall be removed from spaces to be occupied by concrete. Forms shall be properly cleaned. Coarse aggregate shall be thoroughly watered, cleaned of all foreign materials, silt and mud. Reinforcement shall he thoroughly cleaned of deleterious coatings Concrete blocks for maintaining clear cover shall be properly placed. Water shall be removed from the place of deposit before concrete is placed.
[44]
j)
All laitance and other unsound materials shall be removed before additional concrete is placed against
hardened concrete. k) All reinforcements shall be checked to verify whether the rods of the specified number, diameter
length, shape with proper laps have been provided and necessary clearance maintained as shown in the design drawings. It shall also be checked whether the rods have been tied rigidly by wires, with the correct spacing. in between. The effective depth shall be checked to see whether it conforms to that shown in the drawings. l) No rectification works, for any part of the proposed R.C.0 work, whether it relates to bending, binding
of the reinforcement, or the correction of formworks shall be allowed to be left for the day of the casting of the concrete. All such rectification and correction shall have to be done and completed on the day before casting is taken up. m) If any casting work is done over load bearing brick wall the supporting brick wall shall be smoothened
to avoid adhesion or grip of the concrete with wail resulting in cracks in the wall due to construction and shrinkage stresses developed when setting. This may done by plastering the top surface of the wall and neat cement finishing and properly curing with water and then placing polythene sheet on the top of the wall before laying concrete. n) o) Vibrator shall be kept ready for vibrating the concrete. All scaffoldings and shuttering work shall be carefully and thoroughly checked to avoid any loose
joint, support, which might give in during casting. p) Availability of enough quantity of cement, coarse and fine aggregates shall be checked for completing
the basting q) r) Shuttering shall be properly wetted before lying of concrete. It shall be checked whether conduits, pipes and other fitting that shall remain inside the concrete have
been properly laid and placed. s) Opening for fixing 1, .1-C.pans, pipes, clamps for hooks shall be kept in the forms befom casting
concrete, so that concrete is not partially dismantled and disturbed afterwards. 3.12.6 Mixing
Concrete shall be mixed in concrete mixer of approved type and appropriate capacity. Each batch shall be thoroughly mixed for a period of not less than 1.5 minute after all materials including theare in the drum and during this period the drum shall be in the mixing position and at uniform rate of not less than 14 or more than 20 revolutionsper minute The cement sand shall be thoroughly mixed in dry condition.
[45]
The batch shall be so charged into the mixer drum that some water shall enter in advance of the cement and aggregate. The entire content shall be removed from the drum before the succeeding batch is introduced. Concrete shall be mixed in quantities required for immediate use. Concrete shall not be used which has developed initial set or which is not in place within thirty (30) minutes after the water has been added. Retempering of partially hardened concrete by remixing with or without additional materials or water, or by other means will not be permitted. The inside of the mixing drum shall be kept free of hardened concrete at all times. Mixers which have been out of use for more than 30 minutes shall be thoroughly cleaned before any fresh concrete is mixed . Unless otherwise agreed by the Engineer-in-Charge, the first batch of concrete through the mixer shall contain only two thirds of the normal quantity of coarse aggregate. Mixing plant shall be thoroughly cleaned before changing from one type of cement to another. 3.12.7 Consistency of Concrete The consistency of concrete shall be determined following evaluation of the placement conditions for each individual section of the work to be decided and approved by the Engineer-in-charge. Mix proportions & consistency will produce a dense, well compacted concrete with a minimum tendency to segregate under placing conditions, free from sand streaks, honeycomb, air pockets, exposed reinforcing steel & other forms of structural weakness & unsatisfactory appearance. 3.12.8 Transport and Placing A most thorough and careful design can be completely defeated by the improper practices in the handling of ingredients and placing of concrete. Unrestrained dropping, horizontal flow o f c o n c r e t e i s e x t r e me l y h a r m f u l a n d s h a l l n o t b e to l er a t ed . C o n c r e te s h a l l b e s o transported from the mixer and placed in the form that contamination, segregation or loss of the constituent materials does not occur. Before placing the concrete, all form w ork, space and the reinforcement contained in it shall be thoroughly cleaned of all extraneous matter. Care shall be taken to fill every part of the forms, to work the coarse aggregate back from the face so that sufficient mortar will be flushed from the mass to form a smooth surface, and to force the concrete under and around reinforcing bars without displacing them. Concrete shall be conveyed from the mixer to the place of final disposition by suitable method, which will prevent segregation or loss of ing redients or damage, by exposure to the elements The Contractor should preferably use a crane of adequate capacity and reach for transporting concrete from the mixing site or temporary storage area of fresh concrete to the final placement location. Alternatively, the Contractor ; with the approval of the Engineer -in Charge, may adopt
[46]
pumping method for transporting concrete from the mixing site to the ultimate placement location. Placing concrete by pumping methods shall conform to the requirements of ACI 304.2R. The detail procedures for transporting concrete and equipment to be used for transporting concrete by the Contractor shall comply with the requirements of ACI 304R and approved by the Engineer-inCharge. The maximum time elapsed between mixing and pla cing shall not be more than 45 (forty-five) minutes. The concrete shall be deposited vertically in the form of horizontal layers to a depth not exceeding 300mm & each shall be properly vibrated before laying the next one.
The concrete shall not be dropped freely from a height exceeding 1.8 meter nor shall it be deposited in large quantities at any point. In columns or wall structures special tremie pipe may be used for drop more than 1.8 meters. Dragging of concrete inside the forms or distribution by vibrators or allowing it to flow by gravity to the ends of the forms will not be permitted. Great lift of a simple pour encourages segregation of coarse aggregate and sed imentatio n o f the finer co nstituents o f the mixer and mo r eo ver may cause uneven displacement of the forms.
In sections where it is extremely difficult, to place concrete containing the larger sizes of the coarse aggregate, a modified mix, as approved by the Engineer -in-Charge, may be used to ensure against ho ne yco mb and sep ar atio n o f the co arse aggregate fro m t he mo rtar. Concrete shall be deposited and compacted in its final position within 30 minutes of its discharge from the mixer and shall not be subjected to vibration between 2 and 24 hour s after compaction. When insitu concrete has been in place for 4 hours no further concrete shall be placed against it for a further 20 hours. After concreting is started.it shall be carried on as a continuous operation until placing of a panel or section is completed. During pouring of concrete, the mason shall not be allowed to use his mug and water. To achieve the laying of concrete to proper thickness, two strips of concrete about 200mm wide and a little over the specified thickness shall first be placed 1800-2000mm apart, compacted and l e vel ed to t he e x ac t t h ic k ne s s. Co ncr et e i s t he n p o ur ed wi th i n t he in ter v e ni n g sp a ce b et we en t he s tr ip s ( l o c a l l y k n o wn a s 'p a y s ' ) a n d p r o p e r l y c o m p a c t e d t o the desired thickness. Care shall be taken during the concreting, the rods are not displaced and that the effective depths of slabs, beams, spacing of stirrups, and rings and the clear cover to the bars are maintained. Care shall be taken to see that the top negative rods are not displaced at all which seriouly affects the design and desired strength of the structure. Particular attention shall be given to the placing and spacing of rods in the cantilevers.
[47]
Before and during casting, the main reinforcing bars.both positive and negative shall be kept in position. Negative reinforcements shall be kept in position by steel chairs and the p o s i t i v e o n e s b y c o n c r e t e b l o c k s o f r e q u i r e d s i z e . A d e q u a t e p r e c a u t i o n s a g a i n s t displacement and depression of rods due to trampling of the workers shall be taken. Walking on recently poured concrete shall not be allowed. 3.12.9 Compaction of Concrete Concrete during & immediately after placing shall be thoroughly compacted by mechanical vibration. The vibration shall be internal unless otherwise authorized by the Engineer-in-charge. For compaction of concrete, the contractor shall conform to the requirements of ACI 309. Vibration shall be of a type and design approved b y the Engineer -in-Charge. It shall be cap able o f transmitting vibr atio n to the co ncrete at freq uencies o f no t less than 4,5 00 impulses per minute. The intensity of vibration shall be such as to visibly affect a mass of concrete of one inch slump over a radius of at least 450rnm. The contractor shall provide a sufficient number of vibrators to properly compact each batch immediately after it is placed in the forms. He also provides sufficient number of nozzles of different diameter to execute the work smoothly. Vibration shall be applied at the point of deposit and in the area of freshly deposited concrete. Vibration shall not be applied directly or through the reinforcement to sections or layers of concrete which have hardened to the degree that the concrete ceases to lie plastic under vibration. It shall not be used to make concrete flow in the forms over distances so great as to cause segregation. Vibrators shall not be used to transport concrete in the forms. Tamping on the laid concrete in slab shall be done with fairly heavy wooden straight edges (Patta) fixed with handles, by two masons at either and till the level of the finished surface is attained, proper compaction made and laitance come out on the surface. Wooden mallets shall also be used for offering a uniform compaction and for filling up depression. Concrete pouring schedules and construction joint sequences of different stages shall have to be approved well in advance by the Engineer-in-Charge. 3.12.10 Construction and Expansion Joints Expansion joints shall be constructed at the locations and to the dimensions shown on the cans. Position and detail of construction joints, not shown on the plans, shall be planned in advance by the Contractor for which approval will be necessary. The Contractor shall locate such joints conforming the general consideration for
[48]
construction joints as set out in ACI 304R and by the Engineer-in-Charge. Placement of concrete shall be in a continuous operation between consecutive joints. Where sections of the work are carried out in lifts, the line of the proposed joint on all exposed surfaces shall be made truly straight by tacking a temporary horizontal straight edge on the inside of the form with its lower edge on the line of the joint and then placing concrete 12mm higher than this edge to allow for settlement. In case of water reservoir PVC, water stopper shall be used in all construction joints with 250mm overlapping at the water stopper joints. in resuming the work, the old concrete surface shall be thoroughly, cleaned of laitance and all loose material by stiff wire brush, roughened, if deemed necessary, and washed with clean water. The surface then shall be coated with very thick cement slurry/bonding agent before fresh concrete is placed. 3.12.11 Special Casting Process for Columns and R.C.CWall Minimum of construction joints shall be allowed in beams. and Column of the structures. No construction joint in columns from below floor to bottom of beam shall be allowed. column must be cast in a lift, to avoid any construction joint below lintel level. Special shuttering with opening at middle height shall be used for the facility of casting. The opening shall be closed after casting of concrete upto that level without disturbing the green concrete. The contractor shall prepare shuttering details ahead of actual work and shop drawings are to be approved by the Engineer-in-Charge. In any case the safety and stability of form work shall -e the Contractor's responsibility. No construction joint shall be allowed between beam, web & roof slab of building. For wall & water reservoir no concrete shall be placed from a heightmore than 1.0m and the shuttering of the wall shall not be more than 1.25m in height. 3.12.12 Water Reservoir A mixture of SikaPlastocrete Super (IS 2645-1975 and IS 9103-1979) 0.2% by weight ofcement or similar product of approved quality at manufacturer's recommendation for water tank are to be used in bases and walls of R.C.C. reservoirs.
3.12.13 Concrete Temperature (i) Concrete construction on ho t weather without appropriate measures impairs the properties o f fresh as well as hard ened co ncrete. A higher temp erature o f fresh concrete results in more rapid hydration and leads, therefore, to accelerated setting and a lower strength of hardened concrete. The concrete temperature should be kept as low as practical to improve placement and structural qualities.
[49]
(ii)
The Contractor must ensure that the temperature of fresh concrete at the time of placement shall be i n the range of 60 to 90F (16 to 32C). The temperature shall be measur ed b y a i mmer s io n ther mo meter co mp l yin g with AST M 1 5 ''C t yp e o r its equivalent graduated at each 0.2 C over a range from 2C to + 80C, inserted in a sample within 2 minutes of sampling and recorded 1 minutes after reaching a stable temperature.
3 .1 2 .1 4 Fo r mw o r k a n d sca f f o ld i ng The system of formwork & props for reinforced concrete work shall be the responsibility to the contractor. All formworks shall conform to the requirements of ACI 347R. Formwork may consist of steel sheets of minimum thickness of 14 BG or wooden planks of hard wood of approved variety having a minimum thickness of 45mm with necessary battens, struts, stringers, beams, ties, In case of wooden planks the same shall be new and shall not be used more than 3 times in contact with concrete. Formwork for fair face concrete must be fabricated from best quality new marine ply having hardcore face of required thickness and ply. The contractor must prepare a shop drawing for the fair face shuttering work and obtain necessary approval from the Engineer -in-Charge before fabricating the same, well in advance to commencement of the works. All joints in boards for such formworks must be carefully designed; no repair on the fair fi nish concrete shall be accepted. Construction joints shall be positioned as instructed by the Engineer -in Charge. There must not be any visible patches, stains or efflorescence in the fair faced concrete. Only non staining from oil, release agent shall be used with due approval from the Engineer in charge. All formwork shall be of found materials constructed water -tight, true to line as per drawing and of such rigidity to present bulging or movement during the placement and curing of the concrete. Formwork for bases & walls for water reservoir shall have the chamfer of appropriate dimension as per drawing & dimension. Form lining shall be in largest practicable panel to minimize joints. Under usual conditions the following minimum periods between concreting and the removal of formwork shall be observed Vertical sides expecting beams Vertical sides of beams Soffits for span of 6m or less Soffits from span of over 6ms 3 days 7 days 18 days min 21 days
Scaffolding shall be made from strong and suita ble bamboo poles, wooden post or steel p ip es. Steel center ing frames may b e used for any height pro vided they are properly designed for
[50]
that particular height or above. For all concrete works having a crushing strength equal to or above 21 Mpa, steel shuttering and scaffolding shall be used. Tubular centering shall be thoroughly inspected before erection. Defected members shall be discarded. Adjustment screws shall be set to their approximate final adjustment after assembling the basic unit and the unit shall be leveled and plumbed. Approval of Engineer-in-Charge will be required regarding adequacy of the shuttering before placement of concrete can be started. For concreting operation ever 4.0 m height detail design and shop drawings of propping shall be submitted by the Contractor for approval of Engineer-in-Charge. The centering frame shall be braced to make a rigid and solid unit. Struts and diagonal braces shall be in proper position and secured. As erection progresses, all connecting devirs shall be in place and fastened for full stability of joint and units. The props shall be placed on timber planks, false brickwork, or steel shut covering several posts at a time so as to eliminate the possibility of any sinking of the earth below especially in the ground floor where the earth is likely to the moistened by water. The shape, strength, rigidity, water tightness and surface smoothness of reused forms shall b e maintained at all time. Any war p ed o r b ulged timb er must be resized before b eing reused. The formwork made of materials liable to absorb water shall always be sprinkled with water to p ercent water ab sorp tio n fro m co ncr ete. Water shall no t be pro fusely used and the formwork shall be in a saturated surface dry condition. Scaffolding and formwork shall b e checked to see if all the props are stiffly supported over the firm base. It any prop is found off based, wooded edges shall be inserted below the prop to obtain the required degree of rigidity, with regard to horizontal movement. No clay plaster, pocking with pieces of paper, jute, cotton waster etc. shall be allowed to make up the gaps between the centering. Concrete exposed by the removal of formwork shall be left untouched pending inspection by the Engineer-in-Charge. Cement mortar separators or block of appropriate sizes are to be used in all covering as per drawing or directed by Engineer-in-Charge. The drip course shall be constructed at the edge of roof slab etc. by means of an approved batten included in the form work before casting or after casti ng as desired by the Engineer in-Charge. 3.12.15 Embedded pipes and conduits The Contractor shall co-ordinate among all trades like civil, electrical, plumbing, mechanical etc. in
[51]
placement of pipes, conduits. equipments and other accessories and shall provide necessary opening in the slabs. Concrete shall not be poured before placement of pipe and concealed service lines. The pipes shall be so fabricated and installed that it will require minimum cutting, bending or displacement of reinforcement from its proper location. If any bending or displacement is required, the attention of the Engineer-in-Charge shall be drawn for his decision. All pipes, conduits or fixutres required to be embedded in the concrete shall be placed and secured in position before casting is commenced. Special care shall be taken in case of electric wiring, so that it is not laid in the slab below the bottom reinforcement, which shall invariably result in crackers in the slab. Placing of conduit pipes parallel to the main reinforcement shall be avoided as far as possible. Conduit pipes shall be placed diagonal to the reinforcement as far as practical to avoid cracks in slab. Conduits and pipes of aluminum shall n ot be embedded in structural concrete unless effectively coated or covered to prevent aluminum concrete reaction or electrolytic action between aluminum and steel. Conduits and pipes with their fittings, embedded within a column shall not displace more than 4% of the area of cross section on which strength is calculated. Conduits shall not be larger inoutside dimension than beam in which they are embedded. Conduits shall not be spaced closer than 3 diameters or widths on centres. 3.12.16 Surface Finish and Remedial Treatment of Surfaces Unless otherwise provided on the plans, all reasonably true and even surfaces, which are of uniform color and texture and free from stone pockets, honeycomb, depressions or projections, shall be considered as acceptable surfaces. Immediately after the removal of forms, all cavities produced by form ties and all other holes, broken corners or edges and other defects except air bubble holes, shall be cleaned and after having been kept saturated with water for a period of not less than two hours shall b e co mp le te l y fi ll ed , r a n - m o d a nd mad e go o d wi t h a mo rt ar o r co n cre te o f t he s a me proportions as used in the concrete being finished. The holes shall be completely filled by use of a pressure gun or hand rammed method as directed by Engineer-in-charges representative.
[52]
1/3rd
the overall thickness of slab, wall or
Any remedial treatment to the surface shall be agreed with the Engineer-in-charges following inspection after removing the formwork and shall be carried out without delay. Any concrete, the surface of which has been treated before being inspected by the Engineer-in-charge shall be liable to rejection. Broom finishing shall be made for all slabs to receive artificial patent stone, terrazzo flooring using wire broom after the concrete is partially set.
3.12.17 Curing & Protection Concrete shall be protected against harmful effects of weather for a period not less than 7 ( seven) days immediately following the placing of concrete. All concrete surface will be covered with two thicknesses of wet burlap which have been spot stitched, or wet jute felt or gunny bags as soon after placing of concrete as it can be one without marking the surface and kept thoroughly wet by continuously sprinkling water for a period not less than 21 days after the concrete has taken its final set. In lieu of continuous sprinkling, plastic sheeting or plastic coated burlap may be used to prevent moisture loss. The concrete shall be pre-moistened & the plastic sheeting shall be held securely in place so that positive moisture seal is provided to retain the curing moisture during the 14 days curing period. Form of perforated sheeting shall be without delay repaired or replaced with suitable material. Ponding which is most efficient method shall be used for curing slabs. For the first 18 to 24 hours, the exposed surface is covered with moist hessian or canvas. After that small bank of dykes of lean mortar are built around and along the slab, into number of rectangular ponds and filled with water. This method is suitable for floors roof, slabs etc. The method of curing shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer -in-Charge and shall conform to the requirements of ACI 308. 3.12.18 Quality Control Scheme and Testing Requirements 3.12.18.1 General Requirements (a) All materials shall be tested in the laboratories of Bangladesh University of Engineering and Technology, Dhaka or at any recognized laboratory as directed by Engineer-in-Charge. (b) (c) All tests shall be carried out in accordance with the standard procedure set herein. After the test, if the quality of a particular consignment is found to be inferior to what is specified, the material of the consignment will not be accepted and the Contractor shall remove such rejected materials from site within the time stated in writing at the time of
[53]
rejection (d) The Contractor may arrange for testing to be carried out from the approved laboratory p r io r t o d e l i v e r y o f ma t e r i a l s to s i t e . B u t t h i s s h a l l i n n o wa y r e l i e v e h i m o f h i s obligations and responsibilities of carrying out necessary tests and removing all materials not fulfilling the requirements set under this specification. (e) All sampling of m a t e r i a l s f o r t e s t i n g p u r p o s e s s h a l l b e m a d e o n a r a n d o m b a s i s f o l l o w i n g t h e g u i d e l i n e o f the Engineer-in-Charge. All test samples shall be collected in presence o f the designated representative o f the Engineer -in-Charge, who shall supervise proper sealing/securing of the sample prior to sending it to the relevant laboratory for testing. Engineer -in-Charge and the Contractor or their authorized representative shall put joint signatures on the sealed containers/bags of the sample before sending those to the recognized materials testing laboratory as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge. (f) In transporting the sample (s) to the approved testing laboratory, precautions shall be exer cised b y the Co ntr actor so as to ensure that samp les are no t harmed due to shock, impact or jerk impairing its structural soundness. (g) On co mp letio n of tests, results shall be collected b y person (s) authorized b y the Engineer-in-Charge only. (h) T he cost of all testing including all repeat tests (in case of non -fulfillment of req u ir e me n t) a nd i ncid e nt al e xp e n se s s ha ll b e b o rne b y t h e Co ntr a cto r a nd no separate payment shall be given to the Contractor for this purpose 3.12.18.2 Testing Requirements of Various Structural Materials Unless provided otherwise in the Specifications or elsewhere in the Contract Documents, any or all of the tests specified here shall be performed as may be required by the Engineer in-Charge to ascertain whether the quality of material and/or of any finished or partially finished wo rk is approp riate for the p urpose for which it is or was inte nd ed to fulfill in accordance with the Specifications. Only the major structural materials are covered in this section, the Engineer -inCharge may require tests on other materials and the Contractor shall have to comply with those requirements as well. C e me n t For cement to be used, the mechanical properties as mentioned in Technical Specifications under Clause No. 2.1 and its Sub-Clauses shall have to be satisfied. Sampling, Testing and Approval of Cement
[54]
(i)
The Engineer-in-Charge for testing shall select the sample (two bags from each brand or each consignment of supply of 25 metric tons).
(ii)
The Engineer-in-Charge shall approve or reject sources of cement on the basis of the test results shown in Table 1.
Table 1: Tests for Cement Sl no. 1 Property Compressive strength of hydraulic cement mortars using 2 or 50mm cube specimens 7days:19.3 MPa(2800psi) 28days:27.6 MPa(4000psi) 2 Initial time of setting of hydraulic cement by vicat needle 3 Final time of setting of hydraulic cement by vicat needle 4 Fineness of Portland cement by air permeability apparatus ASTM C204 Min 280m2 /Kg ASTM C191 Mot more than 375 min ASTM C191 Not less than 45 min Test method ASTM C109 Limit 3days:12.4 MPa(1800psi)
b) Fine and Coarse Aggregates All aggregates to be used in the works shall fulfill the requirements set in the Technical Specification under Clause No. 2.3, 2.4 and its Sub-Clauses. Sampling, testing & approval of fine & coarse aggregates (i) Sampling of aggregates shall be done in accorda nce with the procedure outline in ASTM D 75. (ii) For each consignment not exceeding 50m3 at least 1 (one) sample of sand shall be tested. For each consignment not exceeding 100m", at least 1 (one) sample of coarse aggregates shall be
[55]
tested. Each sample for test shall be put in a bag closed with jute rope and wrapped with a piece of paper containing signature of all the concerned parties and shall b sealed with gala. The samples shall then be sent to recognize materials testing laboratory as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge. (iii) (iv) The Contractor shall supply the results of the tests set out in Table 2. Once the soundness and resistance to abrasion of coarse aggregates are established further test will not be required on these properties as long as source and type of aggregates remain unchanged. (v) No aggregate shall be used for concrete in the works unless the Engineer -in-Charge has given his approval to The source of supply The chemical & physical properties of the aggregates.
The approval of Engineer -in-Charge will be based upon the information, samples and test results submitted by the Contractor. Table 2: Tests for Concrete Aggregates
Sl no. 1
Property Particle size distribution of fine & coarse aggregates by sieve analysis
Test method ASTM C136
Limit As specified in Tables Y, Z1 & Z2
Clay lumps & friable particles in aggregates.
ASTM C142
Maximum 3% for fineaggregates and maximum 2% for coarse
Organic impurities in fine aggregates
ASTM C40
No organic material
Absorption of fine aggregates
ASTM 0128
Maximum 2.5%
Absorption of coarse aggregates
ASTM C127
Maximum 2.5%
Unit weight & voids in fine & coarse
ASTM C 29
To be determined by Engineer-
[56]
aggregates
in-Charge from test results.
Soundness of aggregates by use of 5 cycles of magnesium Sulphate tests
ASTM C 88
Magnesium Sulphate 15% for coarse aggregates magnesium Sulphate 10% for fine aggregates Maximum 1.5%
Mica contents in fine aggregates
By physical separation
Maximum 1.5%
Materials finer than 75 mm (No. 200) sieve in fine aggregates
ASTM C 117
Maximum 1%
10
Sand equivalent value offine aggregates
ASTM D2419
Minimum 75
11
Los Angeles abrasion value of coarse aggregates
ASTM 131 (grade B samle)
Maximum 35%
Mild Steel Reinforcing Bar
The M. S. reinforcing bar to be used shall have the properties as mentioned in Technical Specifications under Clause No. 2.7 and its Sub-Clauses.
Sampling, Testing and Approval of Reinforcement (i). For each consignment not exceeding 20 metric tons of as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge at least three representative samples of each size of reinforcement shall beselected by the Engineer-in-Charge in presence of the Contractor or his authorizedr ep r es e nta ti v e a nd s ha l l b e se n t i n s eal ed co nd i tio n fo r te s ti n g i n a reco g n ized materials testing laboratory as approved by the Engineer-in-Charge.
(ii). Tests shall be performed to ascertain the performed to ascertain the mechanicalproperties set in Table 3
[57]
Table 3: Tests for Reinforcing Steel
SL. NO. 1
Property Actual Diameter Unit Weight
Test Method
Limit
2 Yield or Proof Strength 3 Ultimate Strength 4 Percent Elongation 5 Bending 6 Measurement of Deformation 7
ASTM C370 ASTM A615 As per ASTM A615
The Contractor shall submit the test results to the Engineer-in-Charge for approval. No reinforcement from a consignment or lot shall be placed in the work without approval of the Engineer-in-Charge. (d) Strength Test of Concrete Mix proportions for desired concrete strength shall be based on Clauses 3 13.4 and its sub-clauses of Technical Specifications. For sampling and strength test requirements Clauses 3.13.18.2 of the Technical Specifications shall apply. Sampling, Testing and Approval of Concrete Cast in Place Six (6) samples for strength tests of each class of concrete placed on each day shall be taken not less than i). ii). iii). once a day nor less than once for each 115 cum casting nor less than once each 465 sqm. of surface area for slabs or walls,
Three (3) cylinders shall be tested at 7 (seven) days and 3 (three) cylinders tested at 28 days for compressive strength determinations Samples for strength tests shall be taken in accordance with "Method of Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete" (ASTM C 172). Cylinders for strength tests shall be molded and laboratory-cured in accordance with C "Practice for Marking and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field" (ASTM C 31) and tested in accordance width, "Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens" (ASTM C 39).
The cylinders shall be provided with identification marks (8 characters maximum) and casting date installed with synthetic paint. The markings should be placed as soon as the concrete hardens on the top of the cylinders (about 18-24 hours after casting).
[58]
For each class of concrete (see section 3.13.4), the specified 28 days compressive strength (f'c) shall have to be achieved. Strength level of an individual class of concrete shall be considered satisfactory if both of the following requirements are met:
(i) (ii)
Arithmetic average of strength of three samples equals or exceeds f 'c.
No individual strength falls below f 'c by more than 500 psi.
T he 2 8 d a ys st r e n gt h ( a ver a ge o f t hr e e c yl i nd er s) te st s ha ll b e u sed as a b as i s fo r accep tance o f the co ncrete placed. 7 ( seven) d ays tests are made to ob tain ad vance information on the adequacy of strength development.
Investigation of Low- strength test results If any strength test of concrete sample of laboratory -cured cylinders falls below specified value of f'c by more than 500 psi, the Contractor at his own cost and under guidance of the E n g i n eer -i n - C h ar ge s ha ll arra n ge te s ts o f co r es d r il led f r o m t h e ar ea i n q ue st io n i n accordance with "Method of Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sa wed Beams of Co n cre te" ( AST M C 4 2 ) a nd th e g uid el i ne s o f AC I 3 1 8 -9 5 s ha ll al so b e ap p li cab le i n evaluation of strength of the member. Concrete in an area represented by core tests shall be considered structurally adequate if the average of three cores is equal to at least 85 percent of f 'c and if no single core is less than 75 percent of f'c. If evaluation of strength by concrete cores confirms that the structural adequacy of the portion of the structure remains in doubt, that portion will be removed by the Contractor and fresh concreting shall be made under the guidance of the Engineer -in-Charge. If, in contrary, the Engineer-in-Charge d eter mi n e s t h at t he sa id co n c rete i s lo cat ed wh e re it wi l l no t cr eat e a n in to l erab le detrimental effect on the structure and the Contractor agrees to it, a reduced payment to compensate the Employer for loss of durability and other lost benefits shall be a rranged. The Engineer-in-Charge decision in regard to the amount of compensation shall be final.
(e) Test of Bricks
The bricks to be used shall have the properties as mentioned in Technical Specifications under Clause No 2.2 and its Sub-Clauses. For each consignment not exceeding 100,000 bricks at least 6 (six) bricks shall be tested to ascertain the properties listed in Table 4.
Table 4: Test of Bricks
[59]
Sl. No. 1 2 3 4
Property Immersions and Unit Weight Compressive Strength Efflorescence Water Absorption
Test Method
Limit
3.12.18.3 Reporting Requirements
The Contractor shall keep records of all tests conducted including those which fail to meet requirements dur ing the course o f execution o f the works or approval of materials. A summary of tests conducted during each month shall be furnished enclosing all test results thereof as an annexure to the Monthly Progress Report to be submitted by the contractor.
On co mp letio n o f the W o r k, and b efo re issuance o f the Co mp letio n Certi ficate, co p ies o f all test reports shall be consolidated in a volume, three copies of which shall be submitted for record of the Employer.
3 .Applicable Specification and Standards 1 2 The following ACI Specifications shall apply to the work: . ACI 1 201.2R ACI 207.1 R ACI 211.1 8 ACID 212.3R ACI 221 R ACI 304R ACID 304.2R ACI 305R ACI 308 AC1309 . 4 ACI 311 AR A C I 3 1 5 A C I 3 4 7 ACI 318 ACI363.3R Guide to Durable Concrete Mass Concrete Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavy Weight and Mass Concrete Chemical Admixtures for Concrete Guide for Use of Normal Weight Aggregates in Concrete Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and Placing Concrete. Placing Concrete by pumping Methods Hot Weather Concreting
[60]
Standard Practice for Curing Concrete Guide for Consolidation of Concrete Guide for Concrete Inspection Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement Guide to Formwork for Concrete Building Code Requirement for Reinforced Concrete Design and Construction of Drilled Piers The following ASTM Standards shall apply to the work: Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Externally Threaded Standard Fasteners. ASTM A370 Standard Test Methods and Definitions for Mechanical Testing of Steel ASTM A563 Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts. Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet -Steel Reinforcement ASTM C29 ASTM C31 ASTM C33 Test Method for Unit Weight and Voids in Aggregate Method of Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimen in the Field Specification for Concrete Aggregates Bars for Concrete
T e s t M e t h o d f o r C o m p r e s s i v e S t r e n g t h o f C y l i n d r i c a l C o n c r e t e Specimens ASTM C40 ASTM C67 Test Method for Organic Impurities in Fine Aggregates for Concrete Test Method for Bricks
Test Method for Soundness of Aggregates by Use of Sodium Sulfate or Viagnesiurn Sulfate T est Metho d fo r Co mp r essive Str e ngt h o f H yd rau lic Ce men t Mo rtars (Using 2-in. or 50 mm Cube Specimens) Test Method for Materials Finer than 75 -mm (No. 200) Sieve in Mineral Aggregates by Washing ASTM 125 Definition of Terms Relating to Concrete and Concrete Aggregate ASTM C127 Test Method for Specific Gravity and Absorption of Coarse Aggr egates ASTM C128 Test Method for Specific Gravity and Absorption of Fine Aggregates ASTM C131 Standard Test Method for Resistance to Degradation of Small-Size Coarse Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles Machine. ASTM C136 Method for Sieve Analysis for Fine and Coarse Aggregates ASTM C142 Test Method for Clay Lumps and Friable Particles in Aggregates ASTM C143 Test Method for Slump of Portland Cement Concrete ASTM C150 Standard Specification for Portland Cement ASTM C171 Standard Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete ASTM C172 Standard Method of Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete ASTM C187 Test Method for Normal Consistency of Hydraulic Cement
[61]
ASTM C191 Test Method for Time of Setting of Hydraulic Cemen t by Vicat Needle ASTM C192 Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Laboratory AS T M C 2 0 4 T e s t M e t h o d f o r F i n e n e s s o f P o r t lan d C e me n t b y Ai r P er m e a b i l i t y Apparatus ASTM C260 Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete Standard Specific ation for Liquid Membrane -Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete ASTM C470 Specification for Moulds for Forming Concrete Test Cylinders Vertically ASTM C494 Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete ASTM C566 Test for Total Moisture Content of Aggregate by Drying ASTM C617 Standard Practice for Capping Cylindrical Concrete Specimens ASTM D75 Standard Practice for Sampling Aggregates ASTM D2419 Sand Equivalent Value of Soil and Fine Aggregate ASTM E l l Specification for Wire-Cloth Sieves for Testing Purposes
3.12.19 Method of Measurement
T his item shall b e measur ed b y the cub ic meter co mp lete in place fo r the several classes of concrete that may be involved. However measurements of particular items are indicated in Bill of quantities Measurement shall be to the neat lines of the structure shown on the plans or as ordered in writing by the Engineer-in-Charge. The volume of reinforcement, conduit pipes and fittings embedded in the concrete shall not be deducted from volume of the concrete.
3.12.20 Basis of Payment
The amount of completed and accepted work, measured as provided above, shall be paid for at the contract unit price per cubic meter or as indicated in Bill of quantities for the severa l cla s se s o f co ncr e te, wh i ch p r ic es s h al l b e fu ll c o mp e n s at io n fo r fur n i s h in g , preparing, transporting, delivering, breaking chips, screening chips as requir ed, mixing and placing all materials, including any admixtures, curing compound and curing and finishing of concrete, construction including chamfering and removal of formwork and scaffolding where required and for all labour, equipment, tools and incidentals such as overhead, profit, taxes, VAT etc. necessary to complete the item, except reinforcing steel unless otherwise noted in the Bill of quantities.
[62]
3.13 R.C.0 WITH WATER PROOFING ADMIXTURE
3.13.1
Description
This item shall be done as described in item 3.13 except that for water proofing admixture of Sika Plastocrete Super (IS: 2645-1975 and IS 9103-1979) in proportion of 0.2% by weight of cement or "SUPERBARBARA 05" of MBI International AG, NITTOPROOF of FOSR OK or equivalent, made in UK/ Switzerland/ Singapore/ Saudi Arabia in proportion recommended by the manufacturer is to be used in the concrete of the basement mat & wall, underground water reservoir and where necessary.
3.13.2 Construction Requirement
Thins approved admixture shall be put to the concrete mixture machine along with the cement. Other procedures are same as in item 3.13 including form work etc.
3 .1 3 . 3 M ea s u r e me n t
Same as mentioned in item 3.13.
3.13.4 Basis of payment
Same as mentioned in item 3.13. Waterproofing admixture will be paid separately as stated in bill of quantities.
3.14 BINDING AGENT
3 .1 4 .1
Description
[63]
This item shall be applied as a bonding agent for concrete and morter by "BARRA EMULSION 57D" or approved equivalent compound for construction joint as per manufacturer instruction, drawing, specification and direction of the Engineer-in-Charge.
This approved admixture shall be put to joints of old & new concrete and concrete & brick work as per manufactural instruction. 3 .1 4 .3 Basis of payment
Bond agent will be paid separately as stated in bill of quantities.
3.15 REINFORCING STEEL IN CONCRETE This item shall consist of furnishing and placing in concrete reinforcing steel (MKS Rod) of quality, type, size and quantity designated, all as required by these Specifications and as shown on the applicable structural drawings. 3.15.1 Description
3.15.2 Materials
Reinforcing steel shall be 60 Grade, deformed bars from billet steel as specified on the structural drawings and shall meet the following requirements:
a). Quality of reinforcement steel, its properties including strength, elongation, bending, splicing, hooking, co vering and all related events shall be in accordance with the requirements of BDS 1313-1991 and ASTM A615 M.
It should be noted that steel made from scrap iron shall not be accepted for any type of work. All reinforcement bars shall be clean and free from loose scale, dirt, paint oil, grease or other foreign substance. Bars should be placed in position as drawing/design requirement and be cleaned with a stiff wire brash if required.
[64]
3.15.3 Bending of Reinforcement
All reinforcement bars shall be bent cold to pertinent dimensions using bending appliances and method approved by the Engineer -in-Charge. All bars of slab and beam shall invariably have standard hooks at the end. All standard hook shall meet the following requirements:
a) A semicircular turn plus an extension of at least four bar diameters but not less than the free end of the bar.
62mm at
b) A 90-degree turns plus an extension of at least 12 bar diameters at the free. end of the bar.
c) For stirrup and tie anchorage only either a 90 degree or a 135 degree turn plus an extension of at least six bar diameters but not less than 75mm at the free end of the bar.
The radii of bend measured on the inside of the bar for standard hooks shall n ot be less than the values given bellow-
Bar size 10 mm, 12 mm, 16 mm 19 mm, 22 mm, 25 mm 28 mm, 32 mm, 35 mm 4 bar die
Minimum radii 2.5 bar dia 3 bar dia
Ends for stirrups and ties shall have radii on the inside of the bar not less than one bar diameter. In case of any discrepency between the drawing and specification, drawing shall prevail.
3.15.4 Placing of Reinforcement
Reinforcement shall be placed, supported and maintained in the position shown in the Contract Drawing and shall be checked and approved by the Engineer -in-Charge before placement of concrete begins. Unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer -in-Charge, all intersecting bars shall be tied together with double layer of 22G black iron wire and the ends of
[65]
wire shall be turned into the main bod y of the co ncrete. Clear co ver must be maintained to the side of reinforcement as shown on the drawing by using concrete blocks or separators.
3.15.5 Splicing of Reinforcement
No splices shall be made in the reinforcement where not shown in the drawing. Wherever it is necessar y to sp lice r einf o r cement at p o ints o ther than tho se s ho wn o n the p lans, Drawings showing the location of each splice shall be submitted to and approved by the Engineer-in-Charge before the reinforcing steel is placed.
a) Splices in reinforcement in which critical design stress is tensile: Splices at points of maximum tensile stress shall be avoided where possible, such splices where used shall be lapped or otherwise fully developed. In any case the splice shall transfer the entire co mp uted str es s fro m b ar to b a r wi tho u t e x ceed i n g t hree fo ur t hs o f t h e permissible bond values for the co ncrete. The length of lap shall be as sho wn in structural drawing.
b) Splices in reinforcement in which critical design stress is compressive: Where lapped splices are used at zones of compressive stress, it will be as sp ecified in drawing. Where longitudinal bars are offset at a splice the slope of the inclined portion of the bar with the axis of the column shall not exceed 1 in 6 and the portions of the bar above and below the offset shall be parallel to the axis of the column. Additional stirrups, ties, etc shall secure adequate horizontal support at the offset. Offset bars shall be bent before they are placed in the forms.
3.15.6 Supports
Precast concrete blocks or metal supports of adequate strength, of proper dimen sion and in sufficient number shall be used for supporting the bars in position. Blocks shall be of a shape acceptable to the Engineer-in-Charge and designed so that they will not overturn when concrete is stored. They shall be made of concrete with 10mm maximum aggregate size from same materials and of the same mix proportions as that of the oncrcte in which they are to be used. They shall be cast and properly cured for at least seven days before use and shall have wire or other device cast in the block fo r the purpose of attaching them secur el y to the reinfo rcement. W here d irected chairs mad e with 1 2 mm b ars s hall b e provided in slab for keeping the negative reinforcement in place during concreting. These chair s when used shall provide proper cover as required and the numbers shall be as decided by the Engineer-in-Charge.
[66]
3 .1 5 .7 W el di ng o f Re in f o rce me nt
Reinforcement in str uctur es shall not be welded excep t where permitted. All weld ing procedures shall be subject to the prior approval of the Engineer -in-Charge in writing. In pile reinforcement welding may be necessary and shall be done in accordance to the drawing and with the approval of the Engineer -in-Charge. Welding for connecting the damaged portion of the reinforcement shall be allowed on both sides of the Re -bar and shall be 50mm of welding length on both sides and on ends. 3 .1 5 .8 Co ncr et e pro t ect io n f o r R ei nfo r ce me nt Unless other wise sho wn in the structural drawings. the co vering of reinforcement for different types of members shall be as follows: N/lat/Footing bottom Mat/Footing side 75 mm 75 mm
Column. All sides, above FGL Below ground level 50 mm 75 mm
Beam: Side, Top and Bottom 40 mm V11,311s (Above 250n,)m except
Basement wall Exposed face Inside face 20 mm 40 mm
Slab & Stair: Bottom Top 20 mm 20 mm
[67]
Water tank: Water face Otherface 50 mm 25 mm
3.15.9
Protective Coating
All exposed reinforcing steel at construction joints shall be protected with a brush coat neat cement, mixed to a consistency of thick paint, within one week after the placing of. -- initial concrete, unless it is definitely known that the steel will be embedded within 60 Ca., This coating shall be entirely removed, by lightly tapping with a hammer or other tool, mc than one week previous to the placing of the final pour. The contractor shall notify Engineer -in-Charge or his authorised representative when the steel has been placed position for pouring concrete and no concrete shall be placed until the Engineer-in-Charge has inspected the steel and given his approval in writing. 3.15.10 Method of Measurement
Reinforcing steel bars shall be measured in M.Ton actually placed in different reinforced concrete members like mat, column, beam, slab, stair etc. With unit price, reinforcement actually in place as shown on the plans or as ordered in writing by the Engineer -in-Charge shall be considered. The weight paid for shall include splice laps o f reinforcement as approved by the Engineer-in-Charge but no allo wance will be made for the laps, clips, c h a ir, sepera to r, wires, o ver wei ght s etc. o r o ther fastening d evic es fo r ho ld ing the reinforcement in place. No measurements shall b e given for over weight, clips or other fastening devices. 3.15.11 Basis of Payment
The amount of completed and accepted material, measured as provided above, shall be paid for at the contract unit price per Metric Ton for "Reinforcing Steel", which prices shall be full compensation for furnishing, fabricating, transporting, delivering, erecting, and placing all materials, and for all labour equipment, tools, including all chairs, seperator, overweight, overhead, profit, taxes, VAT etc. and incidentals necessary to co mplete the work. The weight shall be considered as per BDS 131191 3.16 WATER PROOFING POLYTHENE SHEET 3.16.1 Description
The work covered under this item shall consist of supplying and laying in place two layers of 0.075mm thick polythene sheets over brick flat soling in floor of buildings and where needed in accordance with the applicable Plans, Schedules and Specification.
[68]
The sheets shall be laid within the building covering the entire inside floor area. Before laying the sheets the brick surface shall be cleaned with a duster to give the surface a free of extraneous particles. The sheets shall be free of darnage tear or other imperfection and shall be laid such that there is a minimum of 225mm overlap between adjacent strips. The second layer shall be laid over the first in the same direction but with a stagger of half the strip width. 3.16.3 Method of Measurement
Measurement for payment shall be made in square meter of area covered by the sheet. No allowance will be made for overlaps.
3.16.4 Basis of Payment The amount of completed and accepted work measured as provided above shall be made on the contract unit price per square meter which payment shall constitute full compensation for furnishing all materials, equipment and labor including storage, handling and transport of materials, cleaning, preparing, cutting, laying, fixing overhead, profit, taxes, VAT etc. as well as all incidentals necessary to complete the work. 3.17 PVC WATER STOPPER 3.17.1 Description
This item shall be done by approved type of PVC Water Stopper having 250mm width and minimum 6mm thickness for horizontal and vertical construction joint, length to be provided on site as per drawing or as per instruction of the Engineer-in-Charge. 3.17.2 Workmanship The PVC Water Stopper sheet will be fixed vertically in the vertical construction joints and horizontally in the horizontal construction joints in such a way that half o f its width will be embedded in the 1st stage of the casting at construction joints. The fixing should be such that its position and alignment shall not be changed due to concreting or any other activity. Before 2nd stage of construction, the PVC water stopper surface along with the old concrete surface should be cleaned; cleaned properly. Care should be taken. so that PVC water stopper is not de-bonded with the old concrete any way. The strip should be continuous. In the basement, wall it should be continuous close circuit. Any joint of the PVC water stopper should be of water tight and should be done as per manufacturer's instructions. 3.17.3 Method of Measurement Water stopper shall be measured in linear meter in accordance with the drawing and Bill of Quantities
[69]
3.17.4 Basis of Payment The rates shall cover the full compensation for providing the materials. fixing in position including all splicing, -joints, testing as required, covering all labour incidental etc.
3.18 WATER PROOF MEMBRANE WORK ON WALL AND FLOOR
3.18.1. Description This item of work shall be of approved type of reinforced petroleum asphalt sheet (proofex GP or Jiffy seal or approved Equivalent) of minimum 1.40mm thickness for the area under basement raft, side of raft, outside surface of the vertical wall as per drawing and instruction of the Engineer-in-Charge. 3.18.2 Construction Requirement Before applying the sheet, the surface on wh i ch sheet to be applied need to be improve for even and smooth and should be clean from dust. dirt, mud or any type of loose material. After approved type of primer and a coal of black bituminous paint should be applied and then reinforced petroleum asphalt sheet should be fixed on this treated surface as per manufacturer's instruction. The joint of the sheet should be done by overlapping each other by at least 75mm and should be 100% watertight No loose fixing will be accepted. Joints should be sealed as per manufacturer's instruction. Double layer to be provided as per drawings in same procedure. 3 . 1 8 . 3 M e t h o d o f M e a su r e me n t The unit price shall be in square meter complete in place of the built up area i.e. completion of the all the processes shall be measured double layer alo ne unit. No measurement shall be given for overlapping. 3.18.4 Basis of payment Payment shall be made at the contract unit price per Sqm of completed and accepted work which price shall constitute full compensation for furnishing, storing, transporting, prepa ring, laying of all materials and for all materials, labour tools and equipment, overhead, profit, taxes, VAT and all incidental necessary to complete the item.
3.19 BRICK
WORK 250mm THICK AND ABOVE
3.19.1
Description
This item shall consist of constructing brick masonry work in 1:6 cement mortar in such thickness and at such heights as required by the plans.
[70]
319.2
Materials
All materials shall meet the requirement of the re Specifications.
a) Bricks shall be 1st class well-burnt bricks of uni with sharp corners conforming to BDS 208:1980.
b) Cement shall be Ordinary Portland Cement 232:1993 (2"d Revision)
c) Sand shall be clean well-graded natural sand having a minimum FM of 1.5 as per BNBC 6-95.
Cement and sand shall be mixed dry in the specified proportions on a clean board or platform until the colour of the mixture is uniform. Water shall then be a d d e d s p a r i n g l y , o n l y t h e m i n i m u m n e c e s s a r y b e i n g u s e d t o p r o d u c e a workable mixture of normal cons istency, The water cement ratio in no case shall exceed 0.50 by weight, or as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge.
The mixing shall be done on a clean hard platform with watertight joints to avoid leakage. The mixture should be covered with polythene sheet or other means so that dust or other foreign materials cannot be , deposited. At the close of each day's work, the mixing trough and the pans shall be thoroughly I'cleaned and washed.
Mo rtar s h al l b e mi x ed i n q u a nti ti e s r eq u ired fo r i m med ia te u se wi t hi n 3 0 minutes of mixing. Mortar, which has taken its initial set, shall, on no account be used on the work, nor shall it be remixed with or without additional materials or re tempered by other means. 3.19.3 Construction requirements If necessary, bricks shall be scrubbed clean by steel brush and washed. W a t e r i n s o a k i n g v a t s h a l l b e r e p l a c e d a t r e g u l a r i n t e r v a l s t o a v o i d concentration of salt and dirt. VAT for the soaking of brick shall be constructed above the ground with a height of about 1 metre and size enough to soak sufficient for a days work. For clearing the drity water a hole shall be kept at the bottem of one side. The vat shall have two chambers, one for soaking brick and one for clean water to be used for mixing mortar. After the days work, the vat shall be cleaned, filled with fresh water and sufficient number of bricks shall be submerged in the vat for overnight soaking. Brickwork shall be built in plumb and shall be carried up regularly throughout the entire length of the structure. Unless otherwise specified, bricks shall be laid in English Bond with frog mark on top and each brick being set with mortar in bed and vertical joints. All bricks shall be whole except where necessary for closers and where expressly authorised. All horizontal joints shall be parallel
[71]
and level. Vertical joints in alter nate co urses shall co me directly o ver one another. Joint thickness should be uniform and shall be 6mm for pointing brick work and shall in no case exceed 10mm for other brick works. Exposed joints shall be raked and flush-pointed unless otherwise specified and the face of the work shall be kept clean as work proceeds. Pouring of water in the joints at the time of laying the brick shall be strictly prohibited. If the brick work is to be plastered, at the end of the days work the vertical and horizontal joints be raked to a depth of 12mm with a bent iron rod. so as to ensure good adhesion to the plaster to be done subsequently. The joints of brickwork that shall remain below and in contact with ground shall be made flushed with mortar by trowels at the time o f br ick wo rk. At freq uent intervals, the wall surface shall be checked with the straight edge (patta) and the plumb bob to see that the wall is in correct vertical plane and that t;-)ere is no depression on the surface any where. T he straight ed ge shall b e p ut at vario us angles to ensur e corr ect surface of brickwork. All masonary shall be true to plumb within the tolerance prescribed below :
a) Deviation from vertical within a storey shall riot exceed 6mm per 3m
b) Relative d isplacement between load bearing walls in adjacent stories intended to be in vertical alignment shall not exceed 6mm.
Any pipe or conduit may pass vertically or horizontally through any masonry by means of a sleeve at least long enough to pass any hub or coupling on the pipe line. Such sleeves shall not be placed closer than three diamaters centre to centre nor shall they unduly impair the strength of construction.
Chases, recesses and holes shall be permitted within the tolerances preseribed below:
c) Vertical chases shall be preferred instead of horizontal chase.
d) Vertical chases shall not be closer than 2m in any stretch of wall and shall not lbw located within 350mm of an opening or within 250mm of a cross wall that serves as a stiffening wall for stability.
e) Horizontal chases shall be located in the upper or lower middle third height of a wall. When brickwork in any section can not be carried up in level courses, the work is to be racked back in regular steps of one course each. The height of day's work shall be limited to 1.25 meter unless otherwise permitted. In exposed situations the day's work shall be protected against harmful effect of weather during and for a period immediately following construction until the mortar has sufficiently hardened. All brick work shall be thoroughly cured for a period of at least 7 days . Fixture in masonry such as anchors, clamps, brackets, pipes, etc. shall be built-in during construction at no additional cost to the Contract.
[72]
3.19.4 Method of Measurement This item shall be measured in net cubic meter of brickwork built in place to the neat lines of the structures shown on the plans with 250mm width for one brick and 375mm for one and half brick length. No deduction shall be made for flues, storm drainage, sewerage, electric conduit and other utility pipe holes for payment of work. Necessary scaffolding shall be done at the expense of the contractor for proper execution of work. The rate shall include the cost of erection and removal of scaffolding. 3.19.5 Basis of Payment Payment shall be made at the Contract unit price per cum of completed and accepted work measured as provided above which price shall constitute full compensation for furnishing, storing, transporting, preparing, laying, and curing all materials and for all labour, scaffolding, tools and equipment, overhead, profit, taxes, VAT etc. and for all incidentals necessary to complete the item. 3.20 3.20.1 125mm THICK BRICK WORK Description
The work covered by this item shall consists in constructing 125mm thick wall with 1st class bricks in 1:4 cement mortar at any heights as required by the plans.
3.20.2
Construction Requirement and Materials
Materials and method of construction shall be as stated in item 3.20 except that the mortar shall consist of 1 part of cement and 4 parts of sand.
3.20.3
Method of Measurement
125mm thick brick walls shall be measured in square meter actually built wall deducting all openings and incorporated foreign structures, such as lintels, columns, beams, etc., provided that the area to be deducted exceeds 0.1 square meter.
3.20.4
Basis of Payment
Payment shall be made at the contract unit price per square meter of completed and accepted work measured as provided above which price shall constitute full compensation for furnishing, storing, transporting, preparing, l a yi n g a nd c u ri n g al l ma te rial s a nd fo r a ll lab o u r, sca ffo ld i n gs , to o l s a nd equipment, overhead, profit, taxes, VAT etc. and for all incidentals necessary to complete the item.
3 .2 1
6 2 m m T H I C K F A C E B R I CK W O RK
3.21.1
Description
The work covered by this item shall consists in constructing 25 mm thick facing b r i c k w o r k o n t h e e x t e r n a l s i d e o f 2 5 0 m m b r i c k w a l l a n d c o l u m n , d r o p w a l l e t c with hard pressed clinker Facing Bricks (200 x 62 x 25 mm size, CT -5 of Mirpur Cera mi c o r eq uivalent) o f ap p ro ved q uality, p r essed with 1 0 /2 0 mm t hic k cement mortar (1:3) at any heights as required by the
[73]
plans.
3.21.2
Construction Require ment and Materials
This item will provide brick work for 200 x 62 x25 mm facing brick work in superstructure. Materials and method of construction is mostly same as item 3.19. It 'is suggested that, 10days after of the completion of 250 mm brick wall fa c i n g b r i c k - wo r k m a y s t a r t w i t h t h e r a c k i n g o u t j o i n t s o f b a c k wa l l a n d application of a 5mm rough plaster. The bricks need to be cut to required sizes with electric machines wherever necess ary. Br i ck work needs to be washed with clean water and a piece of foam within short intervals after the completion every 2-3 feet of brick work so that cement can not adhere to the finished surface. Final wash of after every day work is suggested with a strong wire brush with care. High quality Groove pointing to brick wall with cement having (conforming to BIDS 232) pointing salt cement (mixed filth Black Oxide) and raking out the joints. Finally a layer of Water-soluble Silicon coating should be applied with proper brush within 5-10 days of the completion of whole work.
3 .2 0 .3
M et ho d o f M ea s ure me nt
45-50 mm thick brick walls shall be measured in square meter actually built wall deducting all openings and 'incorporated foreign structures, such as lintels co lumns, b eams, etc., p ro vided that the area to b e d ed ucted exceed s 0 .1 sq uare meters.
3 .2 0 . 4
B a s i s o f Pa y me n t
P a y m e n t s h a l l b e m a d e a t t h e c o n t r a c t u n i t p r i c e p e r s q u a r e m e t e r completed and accepted work measured as provided above which price s constitute full compensation for furnishing, storing, transport c o m p e n s a t i o n f o r f u r n i s h i n g , s t o r i n g , t r a n s p o r t i n g , p r e p a r e la yi n g and c uri n g al l ma ter ia l s and fo r a ll lab o ur, s ca ffo ld i n g s, to o l s equipment, overhead, profit, taxes. VAT etc. and for all incidentals necessary to complete the item
3.22 3.22.1
DAMP-PROOF COURSE (DPC) Description
The work covered by this item shall consist of constructing, on top of foundation walls or elsewhere, 75 mm thick artificial stone with Concrete Class C19 having water proofing admixture of Sika Plastocrete Super or equivalent 0.2% by weight of cement or eq uivalent admixture of approved quality and then hessian-bitumen sand including two water tight layers of bitumen as per instruction of the Engineer-in-Charge.
3.22.2
Materials
Coarse aggregate shall consist of crushed stone chips graded from 12 mm to 6mm, fine aggregate shall be Sylhet sand of FM. 2.5 minimum. Cement shall be Ordinary Portland Cement Type-1, water shall be potable water.
[74]
3.22.3
Construction Requirements
The surface over which the DPC is to be lad shall be thoroughly scrapped to remove mud, dirt etc. and washed clean with clean water and allowed to dry. Shuttering shall be done on both sides of the wall where DPC is layed over walls. The shuttering shall be strong and so fixed that it does not give in or gets disturbed during compaction and the concrete slurry does not leak out. The concrete prepared by mixing the ingredients shall be laid and tempered thoroughly to make a dense mass. The top surface of DPC in walls shall be in the same level of floor finish and shall no t be carried across the doorways or other openings. The upper layer of cement concrete floors shall be continued over such openings and shall be laid at the same time as floor. The base of the DPC shall be even. Uneven base shall cause retention of air void between the base and the DPC, which is not desirable. Damp-proof course shall extend the full width of the plinth walls unless otherwise required by the plans and shall be laid only after the levels of the plinth have been checked. The concrete of Class C19 shall be cast with admixture of Sika Plastocrete Super or equivalent and shall be cured for at least 5 (five) days after placement and shall then be allowed to dry for 24 hours before applying bitumen. The bitumen shall be heated to between 350-375 0 F and applied on the concrete in two layers in an even coat using 160 kg of bitumen per 100 sqm of the damp-proof course and then one layer of hessain and bitumen (140 kg/100 sqm) and another layer of hessian over it use another layer of bitumen (150 kg/sqm) and sand. The last layer shall be sanded immediately after it is applied. The bitumen shall be of grade 80-100 penetration.
3.22.4
Damp-proof course shall be measured by square meter in place. 3.22.5 Basis of Payment
The amount of completed and accepted work, measured as provided above, shall be paid for at the contract unit price of sqm which payment shall constitute full compensation for furnishing all materials, labors, tools and equipment in mixing, placing and curing concrete, application of bituminous, coats and sand blinding and for all incidentals such as over profit, taxes, VAT etc. necessary to complete the work according to the applicable plans.
3.23 3.23.1
PLASTER ON R.C.C. SURFACES Description
This item shall consist of providing 6 mm to 10 mm thick 1:4 cement -sand plaster R.C.0 members in accordance with these Specification.
[75]
3.23.2
Materials
Materials shall be same as plaster on brick surface. 3.23.3 Construction Requirement
When a flat smooth concrete surface such as ceiling, column or beam shall be plastered the surface shall be roughened beforehand by picking thoroughly with a suitable picking tool and then watered. Plaster shall consist of 1 part cement and 4 parts sand a -have thickness of 6mm and shall be applied in a single coat. Where plaster on concrete surface is required 12mm thick, it shall consist of two coats, under and finish. The coat shall consist of a grout application and shall have minimum thickness of 6mm and shall be leveled with straight edge and scratched for key. The finish coat shall be toweled over with care and leveled with straight edge to obtain a flat smooth surface. The under and finish coats shall be applied with an interval to permit the under coat to set. All edges and corners unless otherwise shown on the plans, shall be rounded or chamfered as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge. All mouldings shall be neat, clean and true to template. The use of `Usha' in the ceiling plaster is very important as this is the only way ho w the plaster concrete can be conveniently made smooth and even. Lack of attention on this point shall give a poor finish on surfaces like ceiling, which speaks s eriously on the aesthetic look and finish of the room.
3.23.4
The work shall be measured in Square meter of actually plastered surface. 3.23.5 Basis of Payment
Payment shall be made for the amo unt o f co mp leted and accep ted wo rk measures provided above at the contract unit price per Square meter of plaster which price shall, constitute full compensation for furnishing all materials, mixing of mortar, plastering su rface to be plastered, watering and protecting the plaster after completion, provision, erection removal of scaffoldings including overhead, profit, taxes. VAT etc as well as incidentals necessary to complete the work according to the applicable plans. 3.24 PLASTER ON BRICK MASONRY
3.24.1
Description
This item shall consist of providing 12mm to 20mm thick (1:4)/ (1:6) on walls, and where necessary in accordance with these Specifications & direction of Engineer-in-Charge. 3.24.2 Materials Materials shall meet requirements specified below and in the relevant section of Material Specifications.
a). b).
Cement shall be Ordinary Portland Cement Type-I ASTM C-150 or BDS 232:1993 (2" Revision) unless stated otherwise. Sand shall be clean well grade natural sand having a fineness modulus of 1.5. Sand shall be washed carefully in water to get rid of the trouble of U altpeter action in plaster and dampness to the wall due to efflorescence. A 100-mesh wire netting sieve shall screen Sand.
c).
Water shall be potable and clean and contain no salt or organic materials
[76]
d).
Admixture shall be mixed with the cement mortar of approved quantity where item in BOQ is specifically mentioned. Cement and sand shall be mixed dry in the specified proportion until the mixture is uniform in colour. Only enough water shall be added to provide plasticity. Mortar shall be mixed only in quantities for immediate use. Mortar, which has taken initial set, shall not be used on the work with or without addition of fresh material. Mixing of mortar on a finished floor must not be allowed. 3.24.3 Surface preparation
Before application of plaster, the joints in brickwalls shall be adequately raked out where necessary and smooth concrete surfaces shall be roughened to provide key. The surfaces shall be scrubbed clean of loose materials and soaked with water and kept damped for 24 hours in case of brick masonry. 3.24.4 Construction requirements
All concealed utility servi ce lines, conduits, pipes, clamps, door/windows frames and other inserts must be in position before plastering commences. Chiselling and patch repairing of piaster shall not be permitted. Application Method : Cement and sand properly mixed with water in the proportion as specified shall be laid on clean walls to a thickness of 12mm. Thicker plaster on an average upto 20mm may be necessary for the uneven face of the 250mm wall. Guide bands of plaster called the 'Paya' first be laid on the wall at suitable distance and their verticality and their being in the same plane shall be checked by a wooden straight edge (Patta) and plumb bob. Then the space in between shall be made even by laying the plastering materials and finishing the surface evenly between guide bunds. The surface and level of plaster should be checked by placing the straight edge horizontally, vertically and at different angles. Laid plaster shall be finished by straight edge and trowel. Adequately long straight edge shall be used to bring the surface t o true plane and level. After finishing the plaster with trowels and after some time steel trowel (USHA) shall be used to make the plaster smooth. Care should be taken to see that usha is not used just after laying of the plaster when it is too soft.
Neither should it be used after it has completely hardened up. It should be use: just after the plaster has commened to set, so that there is no mark of usha in the plaster for obtaining a perfectly smooth surface having no undulation. Plaster which co nsists of two coats, under and finish, when applied over masonry, the under and finish coats shall be applied with an interval to perm undercoat to set. Water proofing admixture of specified quantity shall be r with cement mortar as per manufacturers instruction. Plaster shall be kept moist by watering and protected from weather for at lee days immediately following completion. If any cracks appear in the plaster or any part sounds hollow when tapped found to b e so ft or o therwise defective after the p laster has dri ed, it XA co n sid ered as d e fe ct an d t he d e fe ct s ha ll b e mad e go o d b y c ut ti n g o ut a nd replastering at the Contractor's own cost. 3.24.5 Method of Measurement
The work shall be measured in square meter of actually plastered surface.
3.24.6
Basis of Pay ment

[77]
Payment shall be made for the amount of completed and accepted work measured as provided above at the contract unit price per square meter of plaster which price shall constitute full compensation for furnishing all materials, mixing of mor tar p lasterin g sur fa ce to be p lastered , water ing a nd p r o tecting the p laster after completion, provision, erection and removal of scaffoldings including overhead p ro fit, taxes, VAT etc. as well as incidentals necessary to co mp lete the wo r k according to the applicable plans. 3 .2 5 3 .2 5 .1 N EA T - C EM E NT (SKIRTING/DADO) Description
T h i s i t e m S h u l l c o n s i s t o f p r o v i d i n g 6 m n 1 t o 1 2 m r n m a t c e m e n t with black/redoxide finished ( 1:2 ) cement- sand Skirting/ Dado on a ( 1:4 ) cement-sand mortar plaster of 12mm thick underbed on walls or where necessary in according with these specifications. 3 .2 5 .2 Materials
Materials shall meet requirement as stated in item in 3.24.2.
3.25.3
Construction requirements
Wall plaster, if any, shall be removed along the floor to the required height and the surface shall be thoroughly scrubbed and wetted before applying the underbid the second undercoat shall have a nominal thickness of 6mm and the total built-up thickness will be same as that of the plaster on the wall. A3mm deep and 3mm wide groove shall be formed where skirting/Dado meets wall plaster.
The skirting/ Dado shall be installed flush with the finished wall surface. The intersection with the floor shall be a right angle and the top of the skirting/ Dado shall be straight and sharp.
The underbid shall be laid as uniformly as possible and allowed to become firm before scratching for key and subsequently allowed to become thoroughly dry before applying the second undercoat. A neat cement paste 3mm thick shall be spread evenly over the second coat and shall be steel trowelled under firm pressure to produce a dense uniform smooth surface free from trowel marks. The work shall be cured and protected from weather for a t least 10 days immediately following the installation.
3.25.4
The work shall be measured in square meter of actually plastered surface. 3.25.5 Basis of Payment
Payment shall be made for the amount of completed and accepted work measured as provided above at the contract unit price per Square meter of plaster which price shall constitute full compensation for
[78]
furnishing all materials, mixing of mortar, plastering surface to be plastered, watering and protecting the plaster after completion, provision, erection and removal of scaffoldings including overhead, profit, taxes, VAT etc. as well as incidentals necessary to complete the work according to the applicable plans.
3.26 3.26.1
PLINTH PROTECTION Description
Plinth protection work around the building by 20mm cement plaster with neat cement finish at top 3.26.2 Construction Requirement
Plaster 20mm thick with ( 1:4 ) cement sand mortar according to specification no 1.5 and neat cement finish at top. 3.26.3 Method of Measurement
Plinth protection shall be measured in square meter actually built area from top of the apron or finished ground level to the plinth level or otherwise specified. 3.26.4 Basis of Payment
Payment shall be made at the contract unit price per square meter of completed & accepted work measured as provided above which price shall constitute full compensation for plastering with neat cement finishing including supply of all materials labor, equipment, curing etc. complete.
3.27 3.27.1
PLASTER WITH WATER PROOFING ADMIXTURE Description
This item consists of providing 20mm thick 1:4 cement mortar plaster with water proofing admixture of Sika Plastocrate Super in proportion of 0.2% by weight of cement or approved similar quality o f ad mixture in proportion of manufacturer recommendation. This plaster shall be used on R.C.C, surface or Brick wall as or directed by Engineer-in-Charge. 3.27.2 Construction Requirement
P l a s t e r s h a l l c o n s i s t o f 1 p a r t o f p o r t l a n d c e m e n t a n d 4 p a r t s o f s a n d w i t h recommended quantity of approved water proofing admixture. However the whole procedure of this work shall be done according to the directio n of Engineer -in-Charge. Method of Measurement: Same as sated in 3.24. 3.27.3 Basis of payment
Same as stated in 3.24 except admixture. The quantity of admixture will be paid it separate.
3.28
DRIP COURSE
[79]
3.28.1
Description
The work co vered b y this item shall co nsists of providing drip course /nosing / throating at the edge of sunshade or cornice with cement mortar (1:2) including scaffolding, curing at least for 7 days etc. all complete in all floor as per drawing and direction of the Engineer-in-Charge. 3.28.2 Method of Measurement
Measurement shall be on running meter for completed and acceptable works. 3.28.3 Basis of Payment
P a yme n t s ha ll b e gi v e n as p er u ni t co n tra ct p r ic e a s me n tio n ed i n t he b i ll o f quantities. This payment will constitute full compensation for labor, materials, and equipment, taxes, VATS etc. and incidental charges necessary to complete work.
3.29 3.29.1
MAKING GROOVE ON WALL SURFACE Description
The work covered by this item shall consists of making groove of 50mm, wide & 25mm deep and to be provided on all types of wall surface as per drawing and direction of Engineer-in-charge. The faces of the groove must be straight, smooth and well finished as per approved sample. Z 3.29.2 Construction Requirement
Groove shall be marked during plaster. Care shall be taken for pointing. In case of any damage the contractor shall make good to the damage at his own cost. 3.29.3 Method of Measurement
Measurement shall be on running meter for completed and acceptable works. 3.29.4 Basis of Payment.
Payment shall be given as per unit contract price as mentioned in the bill of quantities. This payment will constitute full compensation for labor, materials, equipment, taxes, VATS etc. and incidental charges necessary to complete the work.
3.30 3.30.1
NEAT CEMENT FINISHING Description
The work shall consist of applying neat cement finishing over green plaster/ concrete surface using cement slurry, rubbing smooth with steel trowel curing for 7 days etc. complete in all floor or where necessary as per requirements and direction of the Engineer-in-Charge. 3.30.2 Measurement
[80]
Measurements for payment shall be made in square meter of area covered by the neat cement finishing. 3.30.3 Basis of Payment
Payment for completed and accepted work, shall be made at contract unit price mentioned in the bill of quantities per square meter which payment include supply of all materials, labors, equipment etc. complete.
3.31
CEMENT CONCRETE IN FLOOR Description
3.31.1
The work covered by this item shall consist of constructing i n floor or elsewhere, 75150mm thick cement concrete with Concrete Class C141C17 as specificed in Schedule of Item.
3.31.2
Materials
Same as in Article 3.12.2. 3.31.3 Construction Requirements
Construction shall be done as per requirements of drawing and the method shall be same as decribed in 3.12. 3.31.4 Method of Measurement
Ce me nt co ncr ete in flo o r at p linths level s hall b e mea sured in sq uare met er in p lace provided the thickness of C .C. is mentioned in the Bill of Quantities or the measurement shall be in cum. 3.31.5 Basis of Payment
The amount of completed and accepted work, measured as provided above. shall be paid for at the contract unit price per sqm which payment shall con stitute full compensation for furnishing all materials, labour, mason, tools and equipment in mixing, placing and curing concrete, application of bituminous coats and sand blinding and for all incidentals such as overhead, profit, taxes, VAT etc. necessary to complete the work according to the applicable plans. 3.32 PATENT STONE FLOORING
3.32.1 Description The item shall consist of constructing 38mm thick concrete with 12mm downgraded stone, sand and cement in specified panels of floor slab and elsewhere in accordance with these Sp ecificatio ns. Use ap p ro xi matel y 2 5 kg o f c e ment p er 1 0 m 2 fo r neat ce ment fini sh a nd finish with steel trowel up to the satisfaction of Engineer-in-Charge or as directed.
3 .3 2 .2
M a t er ia l s
Cement: Ordinary PortIand Cement Type-1. Sand: Sand shall be as specified in the Bill of Quantities. C o a r se a g g r eg a t e: C o a r s e a g g r e g a t e s h a l l b e 1 2 m m d o wn g r a d e d cr u s h e d s t o n e. Crushed stone and sand shall be properly washed and approved by the Engineer-in-charge.
[81]
3.32.3 Construction Requirements
Materials and construction shall be in accordance with the requirements of item 3.13. here of for Concrete Class C17. The flooring shall be laid preferably not later than 24 hours after the floor slab is poured. When flooring is to be laid on an older concrete slab, the base surface shall be thoroughly cleaned of all loose materials by stiff wire brush, roughened seemed necessary and washed and so aked with clean water. Surp lus water shall b e removed and a dense cement grouting is applied to the surface before flooring is placed. The floor shall be divided into panels of specified sizes, which shall not be more than 1 sqm by means of wooden battens. The top of the ba t tens shall be at the level of the finished floor surface. The mixture shall be spread evenly between the battens in alternate panels and shall uniformly consolidated and leveled by a strike -off. When the moisture has disappeared from the surface, the surface shall be steel -toweled under firm pressure to produce a dense uniform smooth surface free from trowel marks. If any depression has to be filled, a small quantity of the finer materials in the proportions specified may be used but his should t_ avoided as far as possible. Minimum 1.5nim thick, neat cement finishing shall be done using cement powder strained through fine cloth and paste of cement shall be rubbed in surface with the help of small steel trowels working on the surface carefully and repeat using at least 4 passes over the entire area till the neat cement finish is smooth, polls -plane and hard.
The dividing battens shall be removed carefully after 16 hrs. and the remaining panels shall be completed in the aforesaid manner. Joints would be marked with thin ropes to allow cracks, if any, to form along straight line and providing neat appearance. The work shall be cured and protected from weather for at least 10 days immediately following the laying. Curing shall be done by banding with cement sand very lean mortar or by only sand. Under no circumstances mud band shall be allowed which shall keep a permanent stain mark on the floor. 3.32.4 Method of Measurement Measurement for payment shall be made in square meter of visible finished floor surface, additions being made for thresholds and deduction for columns or other constructions and openings in the floor. 3.32.5 Basis of Payment The amount of complete and accepted work measured as provided above shall be paid for at the contract unit price per square meter which payment shall constitute full compensation for furnishing all materials, equipment and labour, including transport, storage and handling of all materials, hatching, mixing, pouring, rolling and curing of concrete including overhead, profit, taxes, VAT etc. as well as all incidentals necessary to complete the work according to applicable plans.
3.33 PARKING FLOORING 3.33.1 Description
Cement concrete 50mm thick on parking floor slab in ground floor and where necessary with screed finish top with Concrete Class C19 in a maximum section 3m x 4m and filling the 12mm thick expansion joints with premixed sand bitumen filler including preparing sub-grade, centering, shuttering, pouring concrete, breaking stone chips, screening, mixing, compacting, leveling, curing and finishing etc all complete including the supply of all materials and labor as per drawings, specifications and direction of the Engineer-in-Charge. 3.33.2 Measurement and Payment
[82]
Measurement shall be made in square meter and paid at contract unit price mentioned in the bill of quantities. 3.34 TERRAZO IN SITU FLOOR
3.34.1
Description
The work covered by this item shall consist of providing 10/12mm thick in -situ terrazzo topping on concrete Class C17 under-bed on floor slabs, stairs and where necessary in accordance with these specification. 3.34.2 Materials Gray cement shall be Ordinary Portland Cement Type-1, white cement shall be Japanese origin or as specified in the schedule of work. Marble chips if not otherwise specified shall be white in color and of required size and proportion and of Italian/Pakistani or equivalent origin or as stated in the Bill of Quantities. Sand shall he clean well-graded natural sand of fineness modules not less than 2.5. Stone chips shall be 12mm downgraded and in all other respect meet the requirements of coarse aggregate of item 3.13. 3.34.3 Construction Requirements Base shall be thoroughly scrubbed with steel brush and clean water and surplus water shall be removed. An under -bed of patent stone co mpo sed of Class C17 shall be prepared and placed in accordance with requirements of item 3.33. The bed shall be screed to uniform level and specified thickness as per applicable plans a - -_ shall be cured for two days before placing topping. Sample terrazzo work shall be approved by the Engineerin-Charge before full scale execution of the work started. The designed floor lay out shall be as per plan and instruction of the Engineer-in-Charge or the Architect The marble chips shall be washed thoroughly in clean water taking small qu antities in - bamboo basket and dip washing it in clean water. After washing properly, dead and defective marble chips shall be taken out and the chips shall be properly dried before mixing with cement.
Terrazzo topping shall be of 1 part of marble chips to 1 part of a cement mixture composed of 90% white cement and 10% gray cement or as specified in BOQ. First the chips and cement mixture shall separately be well mixed dry and then the whole thoroughly mixed.
The floor shall be divided into panels not exceeding (600x600)mm by inserting glass, brass or aluminum as required into the under bed while it is still semi -plastic divider strips shall be 5mm thick and 40mm deep and shall be installed with the t -3 finished floor level. Thickness of terrazzo topping shall be specified in the BOQ. But not be less than 10mm. Terrazzo topping shall be spread between the dividing consolidated and hand-trawled under firm pressure to an even surface exposing the dividing strips. Rolling and trawling shall be minimum and hard so as not to draw to surface. Special care shall be taken so that no void remains on the edge of the
[83]
strip. Marble chips shall constitute at least 70 percent of finished terrazzo surface.
The fill shall be well press with a trowel and allowed to stand a little above the remainder of the floor. The marble chips and cement must be laid on the concrete setting bed while it is green so that the two bonds and hardens together and acts as one slab. After a day of curing, all surplus grout shall be removed by regrinding in water using stones of finer grain. If there are still faulty patches, these shall be filled and a final shall be mode not later than 72 hours with # 60 grit followed by fine -grained Immidiately after the final grinding the floor shall be rubbed and cleaned.
After drying, the floor shall be waxed and buffed, The floor shall be washed and waxed in this way every week for a month after finishing.
3.34.4 Method of Measurement Measurement for payment shall made in square meter of finished visible floor surface, addition being made for thresholds and deduction for columns or other constructions and openings on the floor. No measurement for under-bed patent stone shall be given, in otherwords, the rate is inclusive of preparation of minimum 25mm thick patent stone flooring under-bed. 3.34.5 Basis of Payment The amount of completed and accepted work measured as provided above shall be paid for at the contract unit price which payment shall constitute full compensation for furnishing all materials, equipment and labor, including preparing bed, transport, storage and handling of materials, hatching, mixing, pouring, compacting and curing of patent stone and terrazzo, providing divider strips where required, grinding, polishing of terrazzo as well as all incidentals necessary to complete the work according to the applicable plans. Payment shall include cost of under-bed. 3.35 TERRAZO SKIRTING, DADO IN WALL 3.35.1 Description
This item shall consist of providing 10mm thick in-situ terrazzo skirting or dado on a 12mm thick 1:4 cement-sand mortar under bed on walls or where necessary in accordance with these specifications. 3.35.2 Materials
Composition and materials for cast-in-situ terrazzo wall, skirting or dado shall be same as cast-in-situ terrazzo flooring. 3.35.3 Construction Requirements Marble chips if not otherwise specified shall be white in color and of required size and proportion and of Italian/ Pakistani or equivalent origin as specified in the BOQ. The wall on which the situ mosaic would be applied shall have to be cured for 6 hours. The surface shall be scrubbed with steel brush using clean water generously and the surface shall be brought to a spark-clean condition. In case of brickwork, mortar joints shall be raked at least 10mm deep the wall shall be saturated with water and kept moist continuously for 8 hours before the work to begin. Instead of 25mm patent stone setting bed, 10mm thick cement plaster (1:4) shall be used as setting bed. If the thickness of the setting bed exceeds 12mm, it shall be applied in multiple layers, the previous layer shall be treated as scratch layer and the surface shall be left sufficiently youth for good bonding with the next layer. Subsequent layer shall not be applied before the previous layer has hardened. In any case the final layer shall be left sufficiently rough for good adherence of the topping. The setting bed shall be applied in such a manner that it provides a true surface and plumb which will be scratched with broom and allowed to cure for at least 24 hours. Next a
[84]
coat of bonding paste of neat cement (Portland cement) shall be trowelled on the setting. The setting bed shall be moistened before application of bonding slurry in such a way that it is damp only and not glistening wet. The terrazzo topping layer shall then be well trowelled in 10mm thickness over paste. A f t e r i n s t a l l a t i o n , t h e t o p p i n g s h a l l b e c u r e d fo r 3 d a y s , a n d t h e n h a n d - g r i n d wi t h carb o r u nd u m sto n e s, wa s hed , g r o uted , re gr i nd a nd p o li s hed i n a cco rd a n ce wi t h t he provisions of item 3.35. 3.35.4 Method of Measurement Measurement for payment shall be in square meter of skirting, wall in place. 3.35.5 Basis of Payment The amount of completed and accepted work measured as provided above shall be paid at the contract unit price per square meter which payment shall constitute full compensation for furnishing all materials, equipment and labour, including transport, storage and handling of materials, mixing, placing, co mp acting, curing, grind ing, po lishing a nd all incid entals necessary to complete the works. Payment shall include cost of under-bed. 3.36 GLAZED CERAMIC TILES 3.36.1 Description
The work covered under this item shall consist of supplying ands fixing glazed ceramic tiles. 36.2 Materials Glazed tiles shall be either local or foreign made as specified in the schedule of works - Glazed ceramic tiles unle ss o the r wise sp ecified . shall b e stand ard Grad e 16 00 mm x 1600mm (for floor) 800mm x 1200mm (for wall) white/colored interior wall tiles free fr o m warpage, blemishes and dimensional defects and as per instruction of the Engineer -in Charge. Mortar for installation shall consist of 1 part cement to 3 parts sand (FM 1.5) for wall and 1:2 for floors.specified grout for tile joints shall be made of white cement colored as and where specified with in pigments. 3.36.3 Construction requirements Preparation of wall surface and application of mortar bed shall comply with the provisions item 3.23 & 3.24. If the surface needs leveling a scratch coat of plaster shall be tiles applied leveled and scratched for key and allowed to dry for 12 hours before installing tiles. The setting mortar shall be applied evenly and a neat -cement paste to a thickness of 1.5mm shall be trawled to the back of tile and the tile set o n fir mly tapped into place ensure full contact. The joints shall be in specified pattern and shall not exceed 1.5mm width. For walls, top of the glazed tiles shall be i n the same line with full tile at the top. No cut tiles shall be laid at the top. For maintaining levels in the bathrooms, a slope is proved towards outlets of water, as such bottom lines of the four walls shall be at different levels First a line shall be drawn on the four walls of the bathroom near the bottom in such a way that the height of the tiles up to which the tiles shall be laid shall be a multiple of the height of the approved tiles so that no cut piece tiles is required to be laid above this selected bottom line. Area below the selected bottom line shall be fitted with cut price tiles of different heights according to the slope of the floor. If must be remember that floor tiles shall be laid only
[85]
after laying the wall tiles. If the floor is made of terrazzo tiles, areas below the bottom selected line may be made of cast-in-situ terrazzo wall. If there is a false ceiling in bathroom or other rooms, where tiles are to be fitted upto the bottom of the false ceiling then the ceiling plaster of the false ceiling shall be done after laying the wall tiles to maintain perfect horizontal line between the junction of top level of the tiles and the plastered bottom of the false ceiling. The mortar bed shall be minimum 6mm thick and shall be cut through horizontally and vertically every 400mm to 600mm. The tiles shall be soaked in water for at least 6 hours before setting. Installation shall be controlled by strings, pegs, spacers, levels or other suitable methods to ensure correct layout and uniform leveled joints. The joints shall be grouted, cleaned and damp-cured for at least 7 days. 3.36.4 Method of Measurement Measurement for payment shall be made in square meter of finished tiled surface. No allowance will be made for cutting. 3.36.5 Basis of Payment The amount of completed and accepted work measured as provided above shall be made on the contract unit price per square meter which payment shall constitute full compensation for furnishing all materials, equipment and labor including storage, handling and transport of materials, cleaning, preparing and laying bed and cutting, fixing, grouting and curing tiles as well as all incidentals necessary to complete the work. Payment shall include cost of underbed. 3.37 MARBLEIGRANITE TILE FLOOR/WALL/SKIRT/ COUNTER 3.37.1 Description The work covered by this item shall consist of providing and laying marble g , - ite tile in floor, lift wall and where necessary with 25/20/18/12mm thick marble laid on cement -sand mortar (1:2) in accordance with these specifications. 3.37.2 Materials Marble/granite tiles shall be of Italian/Pakistani origin polished and having approved texture, color, and size. Before laying sample marble/granite shall have to be approval by the Engineer-in-Charge. 3.37.3 Construction Requirements The tiles shall be soaked in water for at least 2 hours before laying. The tiles shall be laid evenly with slight pressure to ensure close contact with bedding mortar. The mortar shall consist of 1 part of cement lime to 2 parts of sand (F.M 1.5). A thin neat-cement paste shall be trawled over the cement-sand bed immediately before laying the tiles. Constant checks shall be made with reference to previously established levels controlling the finished wall surface. Best contiguity between the tiles shall be attempted and the joints shall be thinnest possible and filled with white cement grout. After installing, the tiles shall be left undisturbed and protected by suitably cordoning off the area for at least 15 days. 3.37.4 Method of Measurement Measurement shall be made in sq.meter.
[86]
The amount of completed and accepted work measured as provide above shall be paid at the contract unit price which payment shall constitute full compensation for furnishing materials, equipment and labor including transport, storage, handling and mixing of cement sand and preparing bed, setting, tiles as well as all incidentals necessary to complete the work according to the applicable plans 3 .3 8 L IM E T ER R AC IN G 3.38.1 Description T he i te m s ha ll co n si st o f co ns tr uc ti n g a l a yer o f li me co nc ret e 2 :2 :7 o n ro o f s lab s accordance with these Specifications. 3.38.2 Materials Lime concrete shall consist of a mixture of 2 parts lime to 2 parts surki and 7 parts chips. Lime shall be unslaked lime and shall be mixed by weight. Lime weight shall be measured at Unslaked Condition and one cubic meter of lime terracing work require 4.60 (172.16 kg) of lime. Slaked lime shall be screened through 3.35mm sieves and the result shall be rejected. The lime stone should be brought to site and slaked in the ground working place. Surki shall be made from 1st class (well-burnt but not vitrified) bricks crushed or ground pass through a 2mm sq mesh. Surki made from underburned or third class brick shall not be used. Brick chips (khoa) shall consist of 20mm down -graded angular fragments of broken crushed 1st class bricks. 3.38.3 Mixing The mixing shall be done on a clean pla tform but not on roof. Lime and surki in the specified quantities shall first be mixed dry till the mixture is of uniform color. Then the mixture shall be screened. Specified quantity of previously wetted khoa shall be added and the whole turned over once without adding water and twice by gradually adding small quantities water for tempering. The mix shall then be allowed to age for at least 7 days. During period the mixture shall be turned by spading twice a day and further lime water adde d if needed to prevent drying up. Care should be taken to keep it under cover to protect from r a i n . I f m u s t b e c o n f i r m e d t h a t t h e m i x t u r e h a s a t t a i n e d d e s i r e d c o n s i s t e n c y a n d l i m e h a s fully been slaked before carried to the roof. Concrete shall be considered adequate if it forms lump and does not disintegrate when attempt is made to form a lump.
3.38.4 Installation The mixture shall then be laid evenly on the roof slab to proper slope and in thickness 30% more than that shown on the plans and thoroughly beaten for 7 days with wooden mallets to the finished thickness and proper slope. Before beating a lime slurry shall be laid on the top and allowed to soak well. The lime water mixed with molasses shall be continually sprinkled on the concrete to keep it wet while being beaten. Beating should not be stopped until the metallic sound is obtained. The mortar which comes t o the surface during the beating is to be rendered smooth and finished off with lime rubbing. The terracing shall be kept wet after completion for a period of not less than one week. The soundness of the lime terrace roof should be tested by cutting a small portion of the materials 75mm square and 50mm deep in few representative areas and filling the holes with water and observing for half an hour. If the water level does not go down in any of the holes the compaction of the L.C. will be considered to have been adequate. If not, the L.0 shall have to be done again.
[87]
When lime concrete roofing con not be done in one day, each days work shall be terminated on a straight line with 1:2 side slope. Joining of the new work of the previous days work shall be accomplished by applying a bonding grouting of lime suck mortar 1:1 to the slope before placing the new lime concrete. The junction of roof and wall is to be provided with a triangular bank of lime concrete well beaten commonly known as "Gundi". The size of the "Gundi" will be 75mm x 75mm on the roof and parapet junction. For passage of rain water gaps should be kept in lime terracing for connecting spout or rain water pipe. 3.38.5 Method of Measurement Measurement for payment shall be made in square meter of area actually covered including ghundi if the average thickness is mentioned in the Bill of Quantities. 3.33.6 Basis of Payment The amount of completed and accepted work as measured above shall be paid for at the contract unit price per sqm, which payment shall constitute full compensation for furnishing all materials, equipment and labour including storage. handling. transport. mixing, laying and consolidating including ghundi and vertical portion on the parapet and for all incidentals necessary to complete the work in accordance with the applicable plans.
3.39 SCREEDING ON ROOF 3.39.1 Description
Average 50mm thick screeding with concrete C-17 on top of roof slab with ce - , sand (FM 2.5) & 12mm down graded stone chips. Concrete is to be laid in slope as per drawing and direction of the Engineer-in-Charge. 3.39.2 Method of Measurement Measurement shall be given as per the finished work in square meter of the completed work. All the operations described above shall be considered as single finished area for measurement. 3.39.3 Payment Payment shall be made as per contract unit price mentioned in the bill of quantities. This payment will constitute full compensation for labour, materials, equipment, taxes, VATS etc. and incidental charges necessary to complete the work. 3.40 PAVING WITH HOLLOW BLOCKS ON ROOF TERRACE 3.40.1 Description The work covered by this item shall consist of constructing and laying ceramic hollow blocks with wire mesh reinforcement on the roof of the building.
3.40.2
Material
Ceramic Hollow Block (240x155X100), Cement shall be Ordinary Portland Cement Type -1,
[88]
sand shall be Sylhet sand of number F.M. 2.5, coarse aggregate shall be 12mm down. - graded stone chips. 3.40.3 Construction Requirement Hollow Blocks of 50mm thick shall be clay blocks of 240x155X100 mm having clear gaps 6mm between the blocks. The laying of blocks shall be done in two operations. At first the screening of roof slab to hold the hollow block, laying the blocks with 6mm gap. Then wire mesh made of 14 BWG wires having laid on the hollow blocks as per des i gn. Finally laver of 38/50mm concrete is to be cast on the top of the wire mesh and finished with neat cement finish. The 6mm gap between the blocks shall be filled up by mortar. The process shall be repeated vertically at least 50mm with the parapet wall incl uding corners of parapet roof. Again the corners between parapet and concrete should be sealed bitumen mastic. The work should be done strictly by engaging expert and as per direction of the Engineer-in-Charge. 3.40.4 Method of Measurement Measurement shall be given as per the finished work in square meter of the completed work. All the operations described above shall be considered a single finished area for measurement. However the measurement of the work on the parapet wall shall be given. 3 .40 .5 Pa y ment Payment shall be made as per contract unit price mentioned in the bill of quantities. This payment will constitute full compensation for labor, materials, equipment, taxes, VAT etc and incidental charges necessary to complete the work. 3.41 TIMBER WORKS 3.41.1 Descriptions
The item shall consist of supplying and fixing timber for doors. windows fitted with hardware and finished in accordance with the applicable plans, schedules and these Specificat 3.41.2 Construction Requirements for Timber Doors Timber for shutters, trims and frames shall be Silkorai/Teak/Chapalish or as specified in the Bill of Quantity. Grounds, studs and blocking shall be in sound Jam or other approved wood. All timber shall be free from sap, shakes, large or loose knots and defects affecting the appearance, strength and durability of construction and shall be well seasoned, dries moisture content of 6% by weight and treated with non-swelling, non-staining water repo printable wood preservative. Glue shall be waterproof approved product consisting of synthetic resin (phenolic, amino plastic or polyvinyl acetate) emulsion adhesives for wood or any other approved materials conforming BS-1204. Knotting shall consist of a uniform dispersion of 25% flake shellac in 75% methylated spirit or other approved natural or synthetic resin in a suitable solvent and conform to BS-1336. Stopping shall be made from white or red lead and sufficient linseed oil to produce a stiff paste and conform to BS-544. Hardware shall be of approved material, finish, type and make and shall be complete with necessary screws, hinges, trims and all other accessories required for proper installation. All screws and accessories shall be of suitable size and type and shall match with the pigment as to material and finish. All hinges and fixture should be of union (U.K.) or equivalent of the specified in U.S. Federal specification FFH-1064.
[89]
Joinery workmanship shall be of the highest quality. All joints shall be well made, cleanly matched and tight. Verticals shall be plumb. Joints shall be put together with waterproof glue and if necessary further secured with finishing nails of softwood or with screws of hardwood. Surface shall be finished smooth free from disfiguring defaces such as raised grain, stain, evidence of poor and uneven planing and sanding, tool marks, gouges and scratch. All edges of woodwork shall be carefully trimmed and the arises eased by rounding to a radius 1.0mm. Door frames in masonry walls shall be installed only after the walls are in place and have been cured. Styles and rails shall be accurately cut and glued together with close fitting mortise and tenon joints which shall be further pinned with corrosion resisting metal pins of diameter not less than 5mm or with hardwood pins of diameter not less than 7mm. The joinings shall be such as to ensure complete rigidity of framing throughout. Panels shall be tongued-and-grooved unless otherwise shown on the plans. Wide flat surfaces shall be made of several narrow strips glued, dowelled, splined or dovetai led together as required. All faces of frame buried or hidden in masonry shall be painted with 2 coats of tar paint before erection. The frames shall be installed plumb and fixed to brick, masonry with flat iron hold fasts (175 x 38 x 6)mm tongued and turned at the ends and to concrete with No. 12- 90mm long screws with suitable expansion-shields or fiber-lugs. The hold fasts and fixing screws shall be spaced not over 1 meter apart. The screw heads shall be countersunk at least 12mm below the surface and plugged. Butt hinges shall be set flush. All hardware shall be installed carefully in correct position strict conformity with the manufacturer's instructions. All hardware, fitting must have previous approval of the Engineer-in-Charge before using into work. Application of surface finishes shall conform to British Standard Code of practice CP-231. After erection and before any finish is applied, all woodwork shall be hand -sanded using a cession of grit sizes each removing in turn all the coarser grooves created by ng grit. Knots and resinous streaks shall be treated with 2-3 coats of knotting applied evenly and thinly. Nail holes, cracks and cavities shall be filled i n with stopping pressed well home with a stopping knife. Large holes or knots shall be plugged in with a mixture of red lead and enamel glue in equal quantities laid hot. Knotting and stopping shall extend slightly cavity on to the adjacent surface beyond the resinous area or cavity. I The final preparation shall be by rubbing down with fine abrasive paper and dusting off with air jet. The sanding shall always follow the line of grain. No cross -grain sanding marks shall be admissible for any finish system on veneered or solid w ood members. All wood surfaces p a i n t i n g specification item no. 3.50. If normal finishing procedure. Painting shall be done as per specifi c ation varnishing is required the following specification shall be followed. Oiling shall be done with linseed oil, eit her raw or boiled according to whether a flat c glazed surface is required. Unless otherwise specified a mixture of raw and boiled oil sha be used. The oil shall be rubbed into the wood till the surface is dry. The oil shall be applied sparingly and excess removed to avoid a sticky surface. Lacquer varnish shall consist of a colorless finish of shellac diluted in alcohol. A washcoat of sealer consisting of 1/4 kg cut of shellac shall be applied first and when dry sanded lightly. For internal works, 2 coats of lacquer consisting of 1 kg cut of shellac shall be applied from a we l l c h a r g e d c l e a n b r u s h wh i c h s h a l l b e wo r k e d o n t h e s u r fa c e n o l o n g e r t h a n i s necessary to ensure even spreading. For external works 4 coats shall be applied. Each coat of varnish shall be lightly rubbed down with fine steel wool or abrasive paper and dusted before applying the next.
[90]
3.41.4 Basis of Payment The amount of completed and accepted work measured a as provided above sha ll be paid for at the contract unit price which payment s hall constitute full compensation for furnishing materials including hold fasts, hinge, hardware, glazing and gaskets, and all equipment a -: labour in joinry, ironmongry, fixing, fitting, finishing, oiling, painting, varnishing as well as incidentals necessary to complete the work according to the applicable plans. 3.42 HOLD FAST FOR DOORS & WINDOWS Hold fast for doors and windows shall be of mild steel bars. The size of hold fast for does shall not be less than 175mm x 38mm x 6mm or 150mm x 38mr -n x 6mm and for windows not less then 150mm x 30mm x 6mm One end of the hold fast shall be split and bent. The hold fast shall be embedded in cer, concrete 1:2:4 for the full length, and the width of the wall. The depth of embedding shall be 150mm. Payment will be made as per item of bill of quantities. 3.43 DOOR/WINDOWS/ HARDWARES The item shall consist of supply and fitting of best quality approved size and q L hardware of doors windows or where necessary.
Before placing the hardware the sample of the same must be submitted by the contract well ahead of time to get approval of the Engineer -in-Charge. Door and window hardware included in the item of doors/ windows in the BOQ it will not be paid separately but if it is not included payment shall be given as per unit contract price mention in the bill of quantities. Door lock. Door lock shall be approved quality cylindrical silver/golden or approved colour mortise lock with round knob (Japan made or equivalent) all complete as per drawing and direction of the Engineer-in-Charge. Hydraulic door closer: Hydraulic door closer shall be approved quality "King brand " (made in Japan)/ equivalent hydraulic door closer (big size) etc. all complete as per dra wing and direction of the Engineer-in-Charge. Door shock absorber: Door shock absorber shall be of best quality magnetic door shock absorber as per direction of the Engineer-in-Charge. Hasp bolt: This item shall consist of supplying, fitting and fixing app roved quality heavy type 19mm dia to 300mm long brass hasp bolt including cutting grooves in door shutter & frames etc. all complete as per drawing, specification and direction of the Engineer -in-Charge. 3.44 SINGLE LEAF FLUSH DOOR
3.44.1 Description The work covered under this item shall consist of supplying and fitting, fixing single leaf flush door in accordance with applicable plan or as per direction of the Engineer -in-Charge. 3.44.2 Materials
[91]
Mechanically seasoned Chittagong teak wood/Burma Teak of finished 36 mm thick. 3.44.3 Construction Requirement of single leaf flush door The single leaf flush door of approved size of best quality Bangladesh made (as approved) shall be BFIDC or equivalent standard. Before going for large scale production, specimen of door shall be approved by the Engineer-in-Charge. 3.44.4 Method of Measurement Measurement for payment shall be in square meter of the broad surface of the leaf. 3.44.5 Basis of Payment Payment shall be made in square meter for each door installed h finished with supply of necessary fittings, french polishing etc. at contract unit price mentioned in the bill of quantities. 3.45 METAL WORKS 3.45.1 Description The item shall consist of providing, installing and finishing in place steel door s & windows with grill, rolling shutters, louvers, ventilators, gates, boundary grill, hand rails or any other items, including frames made of plain steel structural shapes, plates, angles, pipes rods, wire mesh, steel sheet etc. where necessary in accordance with the applicable plans, schedule and these Specifications.
3.45.2 Construction Requirements Mild steel pipe shall be of specified size conforming to the requirements of ASTM A -53. Structural steel shall conform to the requirement of ASTM A -36 and shall include plain structural shapes and plates cut to length or fabricated. Glazing shall be provided with 3mm thick transparent acrilic panes (sheet).
All components of every item of work shall be accurately cut, formed, cast, fitted, welded and finished true to form and dimensions as indicated on the plans and drawings. Unless otherwise specified all welding shall be fillet welding.
All steel surface shall receive 2 coats of hard -gloss paint of approved colour over a coat of approved anti-corrosive primer unless otherwise specified. Prior to painting, the surface shall be cleaned of mill scale, rust, oil grease and dirt. Surface not painted to the Engineer ing-Charge satisfaction shall be repainted at Contractor ' s own cost.
3.45.3 Method of Measurement
The works under this item shall be measured on the basis of opening area in square meter. 3.45.4 Basis of Payment
[92]
The amount of completed and accepted work measured as provided above shall be paid fe at the contract unit price stated in BOQ which payment shall constitute full compensation Furnishing all materials including hold fasts, hardware, glazing and gaskets, and a equipment and labour in assembly, fixing, fitting, glaring, finishing painting as well as a incidentals necessary to complete the work according to the applicable. 3.46 STEEL DOOR ANGLE FRAME 3.46.1 Material and Construction Requirements The work covered under this item shall consist of supplying and fabricating M.S angle frame (38 x 38 x 6)mm size fitted with brick masonry/ R.C.0 structur e by tutting grooves for clam: & mending good to the damages and shutter made of 18 BWG steel sheet as per draw - including supply of all materials, welding, fabrication, hinges, locking arrangement, haft -bolt, tower bolt etc. complete. 3.46.2 Method of Measurement Measurement f o r p a y m e n t s h a l l b e made i n R m fo r fr a m e along outline o f t h e fr a m e a n d shutter shall be in Sqm. 3.46.3 Basis of Payment Payment shall be made at contract unit price mentioned in the bill of quantities. 3.47 FIRE RATED DOOR 3.47.1 D e s c ri p t io n This item shall consist of manufacturing, fitting and fixing fire rated steel door. 3.47.2 Construction Requirement Steel doors shall be paneled doors with panels having frame in fire escape as per required size for 3 to 4 hour fire rating with 16 gauge face sheets, formed, welded with internal reinforcing channels in full height of door and horizontal stiffeners welded to face sheets at top and bottom the annular space completely filled with small cell phenolic resin impregnated honey comb core bonded to the face sheets in 16 gauge hollow metal frames including vertical members, threshold, mullion etc. true to line, dimension and position, smooth finished, including supply of component parts of the panel and the frame factory finished, phosphatized, primed and finished with the one coat of silicon alkyd enamel paint, and the coats of backed enamel, their fabrication and assembly, and supplying, fitting and fixing appropriate panic hardware and automatic closing devices, packing and back -up materials, jambs, lock sets, hinges, closures. push/ pull bars, operators, rowel plugs, bolts and nuts, washers, springs, cleats, buffer blocks, caulking sealant, weather strips, conforming to standard fire rated doors for necessary smoke proofing, etc. complete with all essential fittings and accessories. 3.47.3 Basis of Measurement The works under this item shall be measured on the basis of opening area in square meter.
[93]
The amount of completed and accepted work measured as provided above shall be paid for at the contract unit price stated in BOQ3.48 M. S. GRILL FOR DOOR, WINDOW AND PARTITION 3.48.1 Description The M.S. grill shall be made of steel frame of mild steel with grill as per drawing, design and as specified in the bill of quantities. This is to be fitted at any places as per drawing and direction of the Engineer-in-Charge. 3.48.2 Construction Requirement The mild steel shall conform with the requirements of ASTM A -53. The structural steel shall conform with the requirement of ASTM A-36. These flat and angle M.S. sections are to be cut to sizes, fabricated, welded (continuous) and to the shape and siz es of the frame as per drawing. This frame shall have two coats of synthetic enamel paint over a coat of approved anticorrosive primer. The enamel paint should be of approved colour. Each frame must have as per design. A frame should be prepared and deposited with the Engineer-in-Charge for his approval. Only after approval the manufacturing should start. 3.48.3 Basis of Measurement The measurement shall be in square meter of the gap where the frame is to be fitted. No separate measurement for 3 coats of painting shall be given. No separate measurement will be considered for grill on boundary wall. 3.48.4 Payment
Payment shall be in unit rate mentioned in the bill of quantities inclusive of M.S. sections, electrode, labour, carrying, fitting, fixing, 3 coats of painting and all other insidentals etc. complete. 3.49 S. S. MAIN ENTRY GATE 3.49.1 Description The Main Entry Gates shall be made of Stainless steel frame all around and grill inside as per drawing and design. This is to be fitted over the boundary walls and in between the columns as per design and direction of the Engineer -in-Charge. 3.49.2 C o n s t r u c t i o n Requirement Supplying, fitting, fixing and installation of folding Stainless steel main gates (vehicular and pedesrtian) with 3 mm thick 50 x50 mm SS square box outer frame with two 3mm thick. 50x5mm SS vertical solid box and two 25 mm dia SS horizontal pipe @ 750 mm cic.ar.: one 50x50X6 mm Sq. SS horizontal box with three 223 mm long vretical 50x5 mm SS sol i : bar each panel including wheel lo cking arrangements on 3 mm thick S.S. plate pro vid ir: heavy type clamps fitted and fixed with the outer frame of the main gate, the clamp b e l r : embedded in R. C. C. o r R. C. co r e pillar wi t h c e me n t co ncr et e ( 1 :2 :4 ) i n ma so nr y i n/ c c u t e ; holes and mending good the damages, finishing, curing etc. in/c, bearing, fabricate:. welding and riveting all complete as and where necessary, all complete as per d r a w .
[94]
design and direction of the engineer -in-charge. A frame with SS should be prepared and deposited with the Engineer -in-Charge foOnly after approval the manufacturing should start. 3.49.3 Basis of Measurement The measurement shall be in square reefer of the gun where the frame s to be fitter separate measurement for polishing sh all be given. 3.49.4 Payment Payment shall be in unit rate mentioned in the bill of quantities inclusive of M.S. sections, electrode, labor, carrying, fitting, fixing. 3 coats of painting etc. complete. 3.50 STAIR CASE RAILING WITH M.S. PIPE SQUARE BOX AND PIPE HANDLE 3.50.1 D e s cr i p t io n T he wo r k p r o vid ed i n t h is it e m co n s is t s o f co n s t ruc ti n g sat as p er specification and direction of the Engineer -in-Charge. 3.50.2 C o n s t r u c t i o n Requirement Manufacturing, supplying, fitting and fixing MS stair railing of stan dard height with a of 50mm dia 5mm thick M.S round pipe welded with 38mm dia 5mm thick M.S. post vertically @ 1 nos. in every third step, embedded in floor with 75mm x 75mm x 5 mm MS base plate welded at bottom, and horizontally 4 nos of 5mm thick 20mm M.S sq bar @100mm c/c, paking the post with 1:2:4 cement concrete. mending good all damages, finishing etc. applying 1st class polish to hand rail, 2 (two) coats of synthetic enamel paint approved quality over a prime coats of synthetic. enamel paint of approved quality over a prime coat etc. finished in all respect for all floors as per drawing, specification and direction of the Engineer-in-charge. (Exposed area of railing will be considered for measurement.) 3.50.3 Method of Measurement Measurement shall be in square area from top of step slab to the top hand rail shall be the basis of measurement. (Width of railing will be the minimum height from perpendicular on railing to top corner of stair tread.) 3.50.4 Basis of Payment The amount of completed & accepted work measured as provided above shall be paid at unit contract price mentioned in the bill of quantities. This payment shall constitute full compensation for furnishing all materials, requirement, labors eta, all taxes, VAT a ; well as incidental change s necessary to complete the work. 3.51. STAIR RAILING WITH M.S. PIPE approval.
3.51.1 Description
[95]
The work provided in, this item consists of constructing stair drawing, specification and direction of the Engineer-in-Charge. 3.51.2 Construction Requirement M.S. Grab Bar in stair/ verandah/roof of 50mm dia 5 mm thick M.S round pipe welded with 38mm dia 5 mm thick M.S. bends fitted horizontally @ 5nos. in one flight , embeded by screws to wall with a 75mm x 75mm x 5mm M.S. base plate, manding good all damages, finishing etc. applying 1st class polish to hand rail, 2 (two) coats of synthetic enamel paint of approved quality over a prime coats of synthetic enamel paint of approved quality over a prime coat etc. finished in all respect for all floors as per drawing. specification and direction of the Engineer-in-charge. (Exposed area of railing will be considered for measurement.) 3.51.3 Method of Measurement Measurement shall be in square area from top of step slab to the top hand rail shall be the basis of measurement. (Width of railing will be the minimum height from perpendicular on railing to top corner of stair tread.) 3.51.4 Basis of Payment The amount of completed & accepted work measured as provided above shall be paid at unit contract price mentioned in the bill of quantities. This payment shall constitute full compensation for furnishing all materials, equipment, labors etc, all taxes, VAT as well as incidental changes necessary to complete the work. 3.52 STAIR RAILING WITH STAINLESS STEEL PIPE, SQUARE BOX AND ROUND PIPE HANDLE 3.52.1 Description Manufacturing, supplying, fitting and fixing SS railing for Verandah/ Double heigh space/ lobby of standard height with a hand rail of 50mm dia 3mm thick S.S round pipe welded with 38mm dia 3mm thick S.S. posts fitted vertically @ 750mm. embedded in floor with 75mm x 75mm x 5mm S.S. base plate welded at bottom, and horizontally 4 nos of 2 , mm. thick 20mm S.S square box @ 100mm c/c; paking the post with 1:2:4 cement concrete. mending good all damages, finishing etc.applying 1st class polish to hand rail, finished in all respect for all floors as per drawing, specification and direction of the Engineer -in-charge. (Exposed area of railing will be considered for measurement.) 3.52.2 Method of Measurement Measurement will be given only exposed area of railing as per schedule of itmes in Sqm. 3.52.3 Basis of Payment The amount of completed & accepted work measured as provided above shall be paid a: unit contract price mentioned in the bill of quantities. This payment shall constitute f t compensation for furnishing all materials; equipment labours etc.. all taxes, VAT as well as incidental charge necessary to complete the work.
3.53 STAIR RAILING WITH STAINLESS STEEL PIPE

[96]
3.53.1 D e s c ri p t io n The work consists of supplying, fitting and fixing railing I with stainless steel pipe - veranda or elsewhere-including cost of all materials, labors, fabrication, welding etc. a complete as per drawing, specifications and direction of the Engineer -in-Charge. 3.53.2 C o n s t r u c t i o n Requirement Stainless steel Grab Bar in stair of 50mm dia 3mm thick S.S round pipe welded with 38r -dia 3 mm thick S.S. bends fitted horizontally @ 5 nos. in one flight. embedded by screws wall with a 75mm x 75mm x 5mm S.S. base plate; mending good all damages , finish etc applying 1st class polish to hand rail, finished in all respect for all floors as per drawn specification and direction of the Engineer-in-charge. (Exposed area of railing will considered for measurement.) 3.53.3 Method of Measurement Measurement shall be made in square meter as mentioned in the bill o 3.53.4 Basis of Payment The amount of completed & accepted work measured as provided above shall be pa unit contract price mentioned in the bill of quantities. This payment shall constitute compe nsation for furnishing all materials. equipment. labors etc. all taxes. VAT as vie. incidental changes necessary to complete the work. 3.54 RAIL ALONG WALL/TOP OF PARAPET 3.54.1 D e s c ri p t io n The work consists of supplying, fitting and fixing Stainless steel pipe/square box railing roof along parapet including cost of all materials. labors. fabrication, welding etc complete as per drawing, specifications and direction of the Engineer -in-Charge. 3.54.2 C o n s t r u c t i o n Requirement Stainless steel pipe railing of any design as per drawings fitted on wall & RCC post. railing shall be fixed and fitted true to alignment. height & elevation and the groove. base be filled with concrete (1:2:4) & cured for at least 7 days. Care shall be taken so that the railing pipes are not disturbed before they are fully settled. 3.54.3 Method of Measurement Measurement shall be made in square meter as mentioned In the bill of quantities. 3.54.4 Basis of Payment The amount of completed & accepted work measured as provided above shall be paid at unit contract price mentioned in the bill of quantities. This payment shall constitute full compensation for furnishing all materials, equipment, labors etc, all taxes, VAT as well as incidental changes necessary to complete the work. 3.55 ALUMINIUM DOOR, WINDOW, CURTAIN RAIL, ETC. 3.55.1 Description The works under this item shall consists of supplying and fixing of aluminum products of various types such as doors, windows, curtain walls, curtain rails, cladding/ flushing of sills, etc. fitted with
[97]
necessary hardware and finished in accordance with applicable drawings and specification. 3.55.2 Construction Requirements Materials and Products: Doors. windows, curtain walls etc. shall be of approved standard conforming to the U.S. Architectural Aluminum Manufacturers Association (AAMA) or BTA specifications. The frames and sash members shall be of extruded shape made of 6063 -T5 high quality aluminum alloy having a minimum section thickness of 2mm unless otherwise shown on the drawings or indicated in the schedule of items and shall conform to AAMA or BTA standard. Fasteners, Hardware and anchors: Fasteners, hardware and anchors shall be of aluminum or non magnetic, non-corrosive material compatible with aluminum. All windows shall be provid ed with non-jamming latches of rocker type designed to be locked from inside. Window locks shall be flush type as manufactured by the Adams Rite Manufacturing Company of Gleudale, California or approved equivalent. The doors shall be provided with cylindrical locks and suitable built-in non jumping latches and bolts. Security locks shall be pin type mortice lock, 6 or 7 pins and adaptable to Master, Grand master and Great Grand Master keys. Sliding windows and doors shall be fitted with adjustable sealed be aring sheaves of durable hydrated nylon or approved equivalent. Closers, Push/pull and kick plates shall have to match with the frames Any other hardware to be incorporated in the work shall also snatch with the frame Assembly and installation screws shall be of stainless steel. Doors, Windows, curtain walls etc. shall be installed with Teflon injected expanding bolts, Sills shall contain adequate provisions for drainage. Head sills and jamb members shall be of one piece construction. Aluminum to aluminum contact between hardware parts or moving members shall not be permitted. Such contacts shall be properly insulated. Glass Pane: Glass for all glazing work shall be of the best of imported sheet/float galsr (Japan or Equivalent) whether are clear tinted. frosted/figured and /or reflective as shown or the drawing or as indicated in the schedule of items and direction of the Engineer -in-Charge Glass shall be free from bubbles, distortion and flaws Glazing Beads: Glazing beads shall be aluminum shape -in interchangeable type. Glazing Strips: Glazing s t r ip s o r channels sh a l l be o f formed n eo p r en e o f acceptable quality. Weather Stripping: Wea th er stripping shall be o f neoprene o r s il ico n treated wo v en wood or approved equal. Joints: jo in t s sh a l l b e m ech a n ica ll y d o n e sq u a r e (t el es co p i c ) joints. No mit r ed Jo in t s shall be accepted. No forced fitting shall be accepted All units shall be fabricated at the factory to accurate dimensions. It shall be rigid and designed to permit complete weather stripping. In principle, the parts should be put together by self tapping screws. Surface Finish: All exposed surfaces of aluminum members shall be factory finish and of substantially uniform appearance conforming to "Architectural" standard. All exposed surfaces shall be given a natural Anodic Oxide hardcore coating of 15 micron in thickness arrd a density of 25mg. per square inch and a uniform color tone conforming to the U.S. Aluminum Association or equivalent standard. The color spectrum shall be natural silver/approved shade of bronze or all exposed surfaces of the Aluminum frames shall be electro statically painted with VV resistance hard resin powder with minimum coating thickness of 40 micron of approved color shade. Finish of hardware shall match closely with the door/window/curtain wall finish. Accessories: Accessories necessary for proper fixing and preparation such as anchors. clips, fins, sub-frames, metal sills, mullion, covers. casing, other trim, cleaning anchors. glazing beads,
[98]
weathering and glazing strips, hardware and mechanical operators shall be supplied ready to set in place with the door, window, curtain wall units.
Steel or wood sub frames shall be painted with Zinc-chromatic primer in case of steel alu with wood preservative in case of wood. Steel anchor shall be properly insulated from aluminum frame. Sealant: S ealant shall be on e p art ela stic co mpo und of "Arch itectu ral" g rad e cau lk and sh a be in matching color or as approved by the Engineer -in-Charge. Shop D r a w i n g s : The Contractor shall prepare detailed design of all work involved in line with the Consultants design and prepare Shop Drawings for the total work and submit to the Engineerin-Charge for approval before factory fabrication. All exterior doors, windows a' -: curtain walls shall be designed to withstand a wind pressure of 301b/sft. Installation: All units shall be assembled at site under proper conditions, erected, fix ed glazed in place in strict conformity with manufacturers instruction. All cut -out operations hardware preparation shall be made accurately and reinforced as required. All doors, windows, curtain walls etc. shall be set plumb. square, level and in exact alignment with surrounding works and shall be securely anchored ready for operation. joints between the masonry openings and frames hall be caulked and sealed installation of the frames. All installation works shall be done and finished in such a we, to ensure a free and smooth operation. Abrasion or other injury to finished surfaces shall be carefully avoided. Cleaning should accomplished with plain water or a petroleum t ype cleaning agent or with the manufacture recommended cleaning reagent. No corrosive reagent shall be used. 3.55.3 Method of Measurement Measurement for payment shall be made in the basis of BOO of each type installed and finished as shown on the plans. 3.55.4 Basis of Payment The amount of completed and accepted work measured as provided above shall be paid for at the contract unit price as mentioned in BOQ which payment shall constitute full compensation for furnishing all materials including holdfasts, hardware. glazing and gaskets. and all equipment and labor in assembly, fixing, fitting. glazing, locking, finishing, painting as well as all incidentals necessary to complete the work according to the applicable plans. Payment for glass shall be made as per BOQ items. 3.56 GLASS/GLAZING WORK 3.56.1 Description The work covered under this item shall consist of supplying all glass and glazing works in Aluminum doors, windows. curtain wall, louvers, partitions. sky-lights etc. o any size & thickness including cost of fitting & fixing in position with all necessary accessories etc., complete in all respect as per drawing, manufacturer's specification and direction of the Engineer -in-Charge. 3.56.2 Materials
[99]
Glass for all glazing work shall be of the best of imported sheet/float glass whether they arr clean tinted/ frosted/figured or reflected as shown on the drawing or specified in th( Schedule of Items. Glass shall be free from bubbles, distortion and flaws of every kind. Thi thickness of glass will be as per schedule of items. 3.56.3 Execution All glass shall be properly cut to fit and to leave a uniform space of 2mm all around th' panes between the edge of the glass and rivets. The glass shall be installed and secured properly with approved sealant in a goo w orkmanship and manner as per details shown on the drawings or specified by th manufacturer. Proper care shall be taken to protect glass from scratches breaking, damage etc. during installation and during subsequent construction operation near the location of the installation. Watertight installation of each piece of exterior glass shall be so installed with rivet( sealant, packing materials, weep holes, tolerances etc. to ensure that it withstands norm -_ temperature changes, loading and impact loading without failure of any kind.
3.56.4 Cleaning and finishing No glazing shall be considered complete until and unless paints and other stains have bee removed from the surface of the glass. Glass shall be cleaned with mentholated spirit/glass cleaning solution. The Contractor shall make good at his own cost all glas s broken by h workmen while cleaning or carrying cut other operations. On completion of the Project, the Contractor shall clean all glazing works. replace the damaged glazing and leave the premises clean and tidy and fit for occupation and in all respects and to the satisfaction of the Engineer -in-Charge. 3.56.5 Method of Measurement Measurement for payment shall be made in square meter. 3.56.6 Basis of Payment The amount of completed and accepted work as measured as provided above shall be paid for at the contract unit price which shall constitute full compensation for furnishing all materials, labor as well as incidentals necessary to complete the works as per direction of Engineer -in-Charge. 3.57 FALSE CEILING WORK, PARTITION WALL 3.57.1 Description and C o n s t r u c t i o n Requirements The work covered by this item shall consist of supplying. fitting, fixing false ceiling/ partition wall by using hard board/ partex board/ ply wood/ fibre glass/combustable mineral board (like aluminim strip) having specified thickness over wooden/ steel frame/ aluminium as per design or drawing including, supply, fabrication of fittings, fixing frame with hanging arrangement, supply of M.S. clamp, french polishing on timber, painting on steel frame etc. complete. 3.57.2 Method of Measurement Measurement for payment shall be in square meter including frame area all be measured a l o n g o u t l i n e o f t h e f r a m e . M e a s u r e m e n t s h a l l b e i n s q u a r e b o a r s u r f a c e i n c l u d i n g fitting fixing with out frame. 3.57.3 Basis of Payment
[100]
Payment for all these item shall be according to the contract unit price mentioned in the bi of quantities. 3.58 FALSE CEILING WITH ALUMINIUM SECTIONS AND GYPSUM BOARD 3.58.1 D e s c ri p t io n The work covered under this item shall consist of supplying. fabricating, fitting & aluminum Tee & Angle section frame and gypsum board false ceiling, including a a c c e s s o r i e s a n d f i n i s h e d i n a c c o r d a n c e w i t h t h e applicable plans. d r a w i n g a n d t h e i r s specifications. 3.58.2 C o n s t r u c t i o n Requirement This item shall consist of supplying, fitting and fixing of 12mm thick gypsum board lamina -e: by mechanical hot press with a milk white PVC membrane with aluminium T -bar frame - natural anodized finish at 600mm x 600mm in grid. suspended from ceiling by 12 double ply G.I. wire fixed to the ceiling by rowel plug, screws, hooks, nails, etc., maintain straight lines and desired finished level at bottom face with vertical wood en strut as regularity including making holes in slabs. or beams by electric drill machine and mending goon damages, if any, during the execution of the work including cost of all mate' a accessories, scaffoldings, labor for installation, screws, nail, etc. all complete as drawing, design, specification and direction of the Engineer -in-Charge. 3.58.3 Method of Measurement
Measurement for payment shall be in square meter of finished ceiling surface. 3.58.4 Basis of Payment
Payment shall be according to the contract unit price of finished area of accepted work, which will cover cost of all material, labor, transport, profit, tax, VAT and all other incidentals. 3.59 3.59.1 FALSE CEILING WITH ALUMINIUM SHEET/ STRIPS Description
The work covered under this item shall consist of supplying, fabricating, fitting & fixing aluminum Tee & Angle section frame and aluminum sheet/strip ceiling, including all accessories and finished in accordance with the applicable plans, drawing and these specifications. 3.59.2 Construction Requirement
This item shall consists of supplying, fitting and fixing of suspended ceiling as per design and drawing with necessary anodized aluminum suspension Tee (25mm x 25mm) and cross bars and edging, adjustable hangers. clips etc. The suspension grid will be hanged from the floor/roof slab by means of rowel bolts into the slab and flexible metal wire, all of approved quality according to manufacturers' specification and standard procedure and design, including supply of all materials, labour, tools, plant etc. complete as per drawing, specification and direction of the Engineer-in-Charge as per design. 3.59.3 Method of Measurement
Measurement for payment shall be in square meter of finished ceiling surface. 3.59.4 Basis of Payment
[101]
Payment shall be according to the contract unit price of finished area of accepted work, which will cover cost of all material, labour, transport: profit, tax, VAT and all other incidentals. 3.60 3.60.1 STAINLESS STEEL FRAMED BOUNDARY WALL Materials and Construction Requirements
Supplying, fitting, fixing and installation of stainless steel Boundary wall with 3 mm thick 50x50 mm SS square box outer frame with two 3mm thick 50x5mm SS vertical solid box and two 25 mm dia SS horizontal pipe @ 750 mm c/c. and one 50x50X6 mm Sq. SS horizontal box with three 223 mm long vertical 50x5 mm SS solid bar each panel including wheel locking arrangements on 3 mm thick S.S. plate providing heavy type clamps fitted and fixed with the outer frame of the main gate, the clamp being embedded in R.C.C. or R.C. core pillar with cement concrete (1:2:4) in masonry in/c cutting holes and mending good the damages, finishing, curing etc. in/c, bearing, fabricating, welding and riveting all complete as and where necessary, all complete as per drawing, design and direction of the Engineer-in-charge. 3.60.2 Basis of Measurement Measurement shall be made in square meter as mentioned in the bill of quantities. 3.60.3 Payment Payment shall be made as per unit price mentioned in the Bill of quantities. 3.61 ROILING SHUTTER
3.61.1 Materials and Construction Requirements The work covered under this item shall consist of supplying, fitting and fixing of rolling shutter of any design & shape made of 10mm shape rod locked together properly to form rolling shutter, top of the shutter to be fitted with circular spring box made of 22 BWG sheet, containing best quality spring made in China, nutted with 38 mm G.I. pipe at one end and the other end nutted to shutter in/c fitting the G.I pipe again with 375 x 300 x 6 mm pankha at ends w/ L25x25x4 frame with side guide channel (side channel consist of 100 x25x5 mm M.S. plate) fixed to wall or column with clamps embedded in R.C.C. part by cement concrete (112.4) in/c cutting holes (minimum 3 x 25 mm x6 mm) mending the damages, finishing, curing, bottom end of shutter fitted to folded G.P. sheet (min 125, mm width in two layers), which is again fitted to 25 x 25 x 3 mm angle. providing handle (with F.I. bar 25 x 6 mm riveted) and locking arrangement in both sides, painting two coats with approved color and brand of synthetic enamel paint over e coat of priming etc. complete in all respect as per drawing design. Rolling shutter must be riveted at sides with G.P. sheet and patty) 3.61.2 Basis of Measurement Measurement for payment shall be in square meter of the area along outline of the frame. 3.61.3 Payment Payment shall be made as per contract unit price mentioned in the bill of quantities. 3.62 M.S. LADDER
3.62.1 Materials and Construction Requirements The work covered under this item shall consist of supplying, fitting and fixing of MS ladde r 750 mm wide of any height of 50x50x6 mm angle stringer wl10mm dia rung @ 300 mm C/C welded with angle fixing ladder with 4 nos 18 mm dia HILTI Kwik expansion anchor minimum 125 mm embed with wall/floor as per design and drawing 3.62.2 Basis of Measurement Measurement for payment shall be in square meter of the area along outline of the frame. 3.62.3 Payment Payment shall be made as per contract unit price mentioned in the bill of quantities. 3.63 SYNTHETC POLYVINYL DISTEMPERING (SPD)
[102]
3.63.1 Description The item shall consist of applying 2 coat of synthetic polyvinyl distemper of approved colour over a coat of priming on plastered wall or ceiling surfaces where necessary in accordance with this specification. This is exclusively for interior decoration and the distempered surface is non-washable. 3.63.2 Materials High quality SPD from Berger/ Elite of Bangladesh, shell lime, whiting, putty, sealer, clean water. 3.63.3 Application Method The surface to be distempered shall be dry, well cleaned and free from efflorescence, dirt and stain of grease. The surface shall be given a thorough rub down to remove all loose materials and all cracks and surface irregularities shall be repaired with patching plaster and filler to obtain a smooth and even surface. After the surface has been properly prepared, the wall shall be washed over twice with a solution, made from equal proportion of whiting and best shell lime. The mixing of distemper shall be carried out in accordance with the instruction issued by the manufacturer of the particular brand of distemper that is to be used. Before starting work distemper shall be mixed in such way that one room can be finished with the same mix. Distemper is to be applied quickly. The brush to be dipped and stroked cross wise on the surface. No patchy overlaps will be tolerated under any circumstances. Distemper shall only be applied with proper distemper brushes as supplied or recommended by the manufacturer. A sample area must be prepared first and got inspected and approved by the Engineer-in-Charge before the full scale work commences. The distempers shall be used till such time as it gives a uniform texture. Whatever scaffolding is necessary, it shall be free standing or of the type so as not to damage or scratch the painted surface. Adequate precautionary measures shall be taken so as not to damage or stain the floors or any other work while applying distemper. 3.63.4 Method of Measurement Measurement for payment shall be made in square meter of the actually completed surface. 3.63.5 Basis of Payment The amount of completed and accepted work measured as provided above shall be paid for at the contract unit price per which payment shall constitute full compensation for furnishing all materials, equipment and labour including storage, transport, preparing, mixing and applying putty, primer and paint and providing scaffoldings as well as all incidentals necessary to complete the work. 3.64 PLASTIC PAINT
3.64.1 Description The work covered under this item shall consist of applying 2 (two) coat of plastic paint of approved color over a coat of priming on plastered wall or ceiling surface where necessary in accordance with these specifications. The painted surface shall he easily washable by soft soap and water. 3.64.2 Materials The plastic paint should be Robialac (Berger)/or equivalent and must be approved by the Engineer-in-Charge. The priming consists of appropriate type as specified for the paint by the manufacturer, and shall be applied accordingly. 3.64.3 Application Method The surface to be plastic painted shall be dry. well cleaned and free from efflorescence dirt and stain of grease. The surface shall be given a Through rub down to remove all loose materials and all cracks and surface irregularities shall be repaired with patching plaster and filler to obtain a smooth and even surface. The mixing of plastic paint shall be carried out in accordance with the instruction issued by the manufacturer of the particular brand of plastic paint that is to be used. Before starting work plastic paint shall be mixed in such way that one room can be finished with same mix. Plastic paint is to be applied with proper brushes as supplied or recommended by the manufacturer. A sample area must be prepared first and get inspected and approved by the Engineer-in-Charge before the full scale work commences. The paint work shall not be considered as complete till a surface of perfect uniformity in color, shade and texture is achieved.
[103]
3.64.4 Method of Measurement Measurement for payment shall be made in square meter of the actually completed surface. 3.64.5 Basis of Payment The amount of completed and accepted work measured as provided above shall be paid for at the contract unit price per sqm which payment shall constitute full compensation for furnishing all materials, equipment and labour including storage. transport, preparing, mixing and applying putty, primer and paint and providing scaffolding as well as all incidentals necessary to complete the work. 3.65 WATER REPELLENT COATING
3.65.1 Description The item shall consist of applying 2 coats of clear silicone water repellent on exposed brick or concrete surfaces and cement plaster on wall, ceiling and elsewhere in accordance with these Specifications. 3.65.2 Materials Silicone water repellent shall consist of sodium silicate or other alkaline silicates based clear approved product supplied in original sealed containers bearing the manufacturer's trademark. 3.65.3 Application Method The application of water repellent coat shall strictly comply with the manufacturer's instruction. The application shall preferably be carried out after a period of dry weather and before application the surface shall be thoroughly clean and dry. A heavy coat shall be applied evenly direct from the container by flooding the surface with a wide brush so that at least 6mm penetration is achieved. A second coat, applied as above, shall follow after 24 hours subjected dry & clean weather. 3.65.4 Method of Measurement Measurement for payment shall be made in sqm of painted surface. 3.65.5 Basis of Payment The amount of completed and accepted work measured as provided above shall be paid for at the contract unit price per sqm which payment shall constitute full compensation for furnishing all materials, equipment and labour including storage, transport, preparing, mixing and applying putty, primer and paint and providing scaffoldings as well as all incidentals necessary to complete the work. 3.66 WEATHER COATING
3.66.1 Description The item shall consist of applying 3 coats of weather coating paint of approved colour and Brand over a coat of priming on concrete plastered surfaces and cement render on exterior surface and elsewhere in accordance with these specifications. 3.66.2 Material High quality material from approved manufacturer as stated in the schedule of works or as per direction of the Engineer-in-Charge. The materials shall be delivered to site in unopened original container bearing approved manufactures label. 3.66.3 Application Method Weather coating shall be of approved colour. The application of weather coating shall strictly comply with the manufacturer's instruction. The application shall preferably be carried out after a period of dry weather. Before application, the surface shall be thoroughly clean and dry. For mixing paint manufacturer's instruction details shall be followed. Prime coat shall be prepared according to the manufacturer's instruction and direction of the Engineer-in-Charge. The surface to be painted shall be thoroughly cleaned of all foreign matter by using stiff wire brush, sand papering or other approved means A sample area most he prepared first and got inspected and approved by Engineer-in-Charge before full scale work commences.
[104]
3.66.4 Method of Measurement Measurement for payment shall be made in square meter of actually completed acceptable coated surface. 3.66.5 Basis of Payment The amount of completed and accepted work measured as provided above shall be paid for at the contract unit price per sqm which payment shall constitute full compensation for furnishing all materials, equipment and labour including storage, transport, preparing, mixing and applying putty, primer and paint and providing scaffoldings as well as all incidentals necessary to complete the work. 3.67 3.67.1 ENAMEL PAINT Description
The work covered under this item shall consist of applying 2 (two) coat of synthetic enamel paint of approved color over a coat of priming on timber or metal surface or elsewhere as per direction of the Engineer -inCharge. 3.67.2 Materials 1. 2. 3. High quality Synthetic enamel paint of approved brand Sand paper Putty made of 2 parts of whiting. one part of white lead mixed together in linsed oil kneaded with wooden mallets until thoroughly incorporated. After kneading it in left for 12 hours when it is kneaded again to give smooth workable paste. Desired pigment may be added if coloured putty is needed. Thinner: Spirit of tarpentine is the most commonly used thinner. It is inflammable, evaporates rapidly. Use of thinner in excess in paint reduces the protection value of coating, flattens the colour and lessens the gloss of the linsed. At the most 5 to percent thinner may be used. When shaken vigorously. it should not porth, or evaporation it should not leave any residue and pape r coated with tarpentine and led to dry should remain unstained. Thinner shall be used of the same Brand as of the Brand of paint.
4.
3.67.3 Surface Preparation Whole success of painting operation depends upon satisfactory preparation of the surface to be painted and great majority of defects which occur are due to faulty preparation. Wood work shall not be painted unless it is absolutely dry. If shall also not be done during monsoon months. Knots and holes, it any, shall be filled using filler made with a mixture of red lead.: and glue in equal quantities called knotting. Dry wood work shall be brought to a smooth s : even surface by rubbing it with sand paper of different grades from coarser to finer ones. While dealing with painting in iron and steel work. a perfectly clean and even surface is great importance. Any paint coat applied on greasy or oily steel surface will lack proper adhesion and will lead to failure of the paint film. Removal of mill scale and rust is more difficult but of equal importance. A good all purpose degreaser is mineral turpentine oil. Before painting, rust scales and dirts should be removed by means of iron brushing. Special attention shall be given to the cleaning of corners, reentrant angles, weld spatters. Iron and steel work must be thoroughly dry before being painted. 3.67.4 Application Method
The timber surface shall he painted with two coats of synthetic enamel ready mixed paint of best quality and approved color over a coat of priming. The paint shall be app appropriate primer, after the surface has been finished with filler/pully, etc. No work done under conditions which are unsuitable fo r the prod uctio n of go od result. No exter ior painting shall be done in rainy, damp weather. After the wood surface is prepared, the paint shall be applied with brush and spread as evenly and smoothly as possible. As soon as the whole or a convenient area is covered, the brush shall be passed over the paint in
[105]
one direction contrary to that in which it is finally to be laid off, which is known as crossing. After crossing. it should be laid off softly, carefully in a direction contrary to the crossing but along the. rain of wood taking care that none of the brush marks to be left visible. All natural finished wood work, and painted wood work painted metal shall be slightly sand papered between coats using zero paper. All steel surfaces shall receive 2 coats of hard-gloss paint of approved color over a coat of anticorrosive paint. The correct timing of application of primer coat is a very important factor. Particularly when humidity is high or dew settles on surfaces in the evening : - Roughly speaking, painting of steel work can approximately be started at about 10 AM which is generally the time whe n all dew has evaporated. The enamel paint should be Robialac (Berger)/or equivalent and must be approved by Engineer -in-Charge. Manufacturer's instructions for application of paint must be followed The color of the palm should be according to the direction of the Engineer-in-Charge. A sample area must be prepared first and got inspected and approved by the Engineer -in-Charge before the full scale work commences. The paint must not be allowed to settle in the cans. To prevent this, each painter will have in his can of paint a stirring stick with which he must use to stir up the paint occasionally. After completion of painting work, the contractor shall remove any paint spots and stains caused by this work in floor, walls, glass, hardware, equipment and other surfaces leaving these surfaces in perfect condition. 3.67.5 Method of Measurement Measurement for payment shall be made in sqm of actually completed acceptable painted surface. 3.67.6 Basis of Payment The amount of completed and accepted work measured as provided above shall be paid for at the contract unit price per square meter which payment shall constitute full compensation for furnishing all materials, equipment and labour including storage, transport. preparing, mixing and applying putty, pri mer and paint and providing scaffoldings as well as all incidentals necessary to complete the work. 3.68 SILICON COATING
3.68.1 Description The work covered by this item shall consist of providing Water reperrent Silicon coating work to face brick surface as per direction of the Engineer-in-Charge. 3.68.2 Materials Water soluble Silicon Coating of transparent in colour will he used. Coverin g capacity should be normally 4.5 - 5.sq.m/Itr on the porosity of the brick. 3.68.3 Application Method Water soluble Silicon Coating should be directly used on Face Brick surface without thinning. This solution is applied directly on surface with a standard size brash. Apply repeatedly to a condition so that it runs down around 150 mm. Avoid dry spray. Use T-6 for cleaning. Keep flame away from the container and application area. Do not inhale spray dust. 3.68.4 Method of Measurement Measurement for payment shall be made in square meter of actually completed acceptable silicon coating surface. 3.68.5 Basis of Payment
The amount of completed and accepted work measured as provided above shall be paid for at the contract unit price per sqm which payment shall constitute full compensation for furnishing all materials, equipment and
[106]
labor including storage transport preparing mixing and applying putty, primer, polishing and providing scaffoldings as well as all incidentals necessary to complete the work. 3.69 SURFACE DRAIN
3.69.1
Description
The item shall consist of constructing 200 - 250mm clear width and depth from 300mm to 450mm Brick drain with 125 mm thick brick work and covered by MS. gutter fitted and 38-50mm dia boulders placed as per design and in accordance with the specifications. 3.69.2 Materials
Bricks chips, cement, sand, boulders, MS flat bars and all other materials shall conform to the requirement of respective materials specified in the relevant sections of materials specifications. 3.69.3 Construction Requirement
The surface drain shall be constructed in true line and level as per drawing and direction of the Engineer-inCharge Representative. 450mm (average) deep drains shall have 200- 250mm clear width with 125mm thick brick work base over single layer of 75 mm concrete and 75 mm brick flat soling and 150mm sand filling. The exposed surface will have 15mm thick cement plaster (1:4) with neat cement finishing and curing at least for 7 days must be done. 3.69.4 Method of Measurement
Measurements for payment shall be made in linear meter. 3.69.5 Basis of Payment
The amount of completed and accepted work measured as provided above shall be paid for at the contract unit price which payment shall constitute full compensation for furnishing all materials required for excavation, C.C, B.F.S. plaster and N.C.F and all equipment and labour as well as all incidentals necessary to complete the works according to the applicable plans. 3.70 3.70.1 APRON Description
The item shall consist of construction 50mm thick cement concrete blocks (50 mm gap without morat joints) over a layer of Brick flat soling and sand filling, compacted earth around the structure in accordance to this specifications. 3.70.2 Materials Cement Concrete of class C14 with neat cement finishing. Brick flat soling by first class bricks unless otherwise specified. Sand shall be clean well graded natural sand with FM as stated in BOQ. Water shall be same as required for concrete.
3.70.3
Construction Requirement
The area specified for construction of apron shall be thoroughly cleaned, leveled & compacted to proper slope & level. Brick flat soling shall be laid over compacted earth according to specification no. 3.9, then cement concrete of class C14 as per specification no. 3.12 shall be placed over BFS with maintaining proper level &
[107]
slope towards drain, Simultaneously neat cement finish shall be applied on top surface curing for a period of at least 7 days as prescribed in item no. 3.31 complete as per drawing & direction of the Engineer-in-Charge. 3.70.4 Method of Measurement
The completed and accepted work shall be measured in square meter of the finished surface. 3.70.5 Basis of Payment
The amount of accepted work shall be paid for at the contract unit price per sq.m which payment shall include leveling and dressing compaction of earth, BFS, cement concrete with neat cement finish etc. including supply of all materials, labour, equipment, as well as all incidental necessary to complete the work according to applicable plan. 3.71 3.71.1 C.C/R.C.C PAVEMENT Description
The item shall consist of constructing 100mm R.C.C pavement on a 225mm thick base course of water bound macadam laid over a 50mm thick sand filling in accordance with the specification. 3.71.2 Materials Materials shall be same as that specified for R.C.C work. 3.71.3 Construction Requirement
Formation bed shall be prepared by excavating filling and compacting to the required level and profile in accordance with the provision of items 3.6 and 3.7. All soft and yielding materials and other portions of the subgrade which will not compact readily when rolled or tampered shall be removed and all depressions made by removal of such materials shall be filled with sand of F.M. 0.80 and compacted and the whole formation brought to correct profile and level as per drawing. An insulation course of sand with a minimum fineness modulus of 0.80 shall be spread uniformly over the prepared sub-grade and brought to the specified thickness. After spreading, the sand shall be sprinkled lightly with an amount of water and compacted sufficiently to secure a dense surface of compacted thickness which will support the base course of water bound macadam. Base course shall he constructed in layers of not over 75mm compacted thickness. Compaction shall immediately follow spreading of aggregate by rolling with 10-ton flat steel rollers. Rolling shall proceed from outer edges towards the crown of the road or from the low side to the high side over lapping the compression roll by one half its widths on each successive pass. Water in the amount that is necessary for compaction shall be sprinkled during rolling and blinding material consisting of fine particles of brick dust or medium sand shall be spread in each layer. unless the base course is constructed in box cutting, the edges shall be backed up with compacted earth berm to the height of the course to prevent lateral movement under action of rollers. Any irregularities that develop in the surface of the course during rolling shall be corrected by loosening the surface, adding or removing material, and recompacting until the surface presents a smooth and regular appearance and is in conformity with plan requirements in profile and section. The finished base course shall not be used for through. traffic. Prior to placement of surface course, any ruts and damage by traffic shall be repaired at the expense of the Contractor by loosening, reshaping and recompacting, use of necessary water and the addition of more aggregate material. The base course shall be sprinkled with water prior to the placing of concrete so that it will be sufficiently moist (but not muddy or have free water standing on surface) when the concrete is deposited thereon and will not absorb moisture from the concrete.
[108]
Surface course shall be in concrete Class C17 prepared and placed in accordance with the provisions of item 3.13. The concrete shall be deposited on the brick flat soling or compacted sand in successive batches for the full width between the both sides of the road or as per drawing. The amount of material deposited shall be sufficiently in excess of that required to form the pavement and to provide a small roll of concrete ahead of the screed for its full length. After being spread the concrete shall be consolidated and screeded to the required thickness and profile. The strike-off shall be passed over the entire surface at least twice. A uniform roll or rid ge of concrete at least 25mm above the finished pavement and 200mm in depth shall be maintained ahead of the strike -off for its entire length during the first trip. Excessive tampering resulting in bringing on excess of mortar to the surface will not be permitted. Proper slope of the pavement shall be maintained throughout the operation. Reinforcement in pavement shall be placed and secured as shown on the plans in accordance with the requirements of item 3.13. Construction and expansion joints shall be constructed exactly' in accordance with the details shown on plans and with best workmanship and as per direction of the Engineer-in-Charge representative. Extreme care shall be exercised in placing, compacting and finishing concrete at the joints to prevent displacement of the joints and to avoid the formation of honeycombs and voids. The concrete along the joints shall be thoroughly consolidated by the use of vibrators. As soon as the concrete is sufficiently hardened, the edges of the pavement, the longitudinal joints, the construction, and expansion joints shall be carefully executed as per drawing and direction and finished with an edging tool so that the radius shown on the plans is obtained. curing and protection shall start as soon as ne wl y laid pavement is sufficiently, hardened and shall be continued for e pe ri od of at least day After hardening of concrete the joints shall be cleaned and filled with sand bituminous mastic as per instruction of the Engineer-in-Charge in any ease providing C.C., R.C.C on existing BFS/HBB pavement. The BFS/HBB shall be cleaned of concrete, dirt, grass etc. and washed with clean water before pouring concrete. 3.71.4 Method of measurement Measurements for payment shall be made as per items of bill of quantities 3.71.5 Basis of Payment The amount of completed and accepted works measured for at the contract unit price as per bill of quantities which payment shall constitute lull compensation for furnishing, excavating, transporting, preparing, mixing, placing, compacting, finishing, curing all materials including making joints. joints filler, dowels, load transfer device, labors, supply of mastic, sand, bitumen , partex or spongy hoard during construction for joints, reinforcement, equipment and incidentals necessary to complete the works as per applicable plans.
3.72 EXPANSION & ISOLATION JOINTS COVER WORK
[109]
3.72.1 Description The item shall consist of providing expansion and isolation joints in roofs, walls, columns floors and elsewhere in accordance with applicable plans. and as per instruction of the Engineer-in-Charge. 3.72.2 Construction Requirements of Joints Cover Work Wall and floor expansion joint shall be provided with two strands of bitumen impregnated coir rope lightly wedged into place and covered on the exposed Mice with aluminum cover with snap -in clip as per drawing. Roof expansion joint Shall be provided with sand bituminous mastic. Clean coarse snad (FM 2.5) shall be thoroughly mixed with hot bitumen in the ratio of 30kg of bitumen with 1 Cum of sand and the resulting mastic, whicle still hot, shall he carefully poured and rammed into the full depth of the expansion joint as shown in in drawing. The works shall be done when the contact surface is dry. When inserting mastic into placle care shall be taken not to foul areas not designated for such application In the event of fouling/damage the Contractor shall remove all traces of bitumen and repair all damages at his own expense and to the statist faction of the Engineer. 3.72.3 Method of Measurement Joints shall be measured by the linear meter in place. 3.72.4 Basis of Payment The completed and accepted work, measured as provided above, shall be paid for at the contract unit prices per linear meter which price shall be full compensation for all materials, all labor, tool and incidentals necessary to complete the work. 3.73 CLINKER/PAVERS PAVEMENT 3.73.1 De scr ip t io n
The work covered by this item shall consist of laying clinker tiles of approved quality and size with cement mortar (1:3) in floor/pavement in accordance with the specification. 3.73.2 C o n st r u ct i o n Requirements Materials shall meet requirements specified below and in the relevant sections of materials specifications. Pattern with 25 mm thick 200X100 mm High Load Bearing Pavers (CT -6 of Mirpur Ceramic Works ltd or equivalent) on all sides of patent stone blocks on Pedestrian entry/ walkway. Apron and Special pattern on Pedestrian Entry area, on 20 mm cement mortar 1:3, laying the bricks in proper way and finishing with care etc. all complete as per design an d engineer-incharge. 3.73.3 Method of Measurement
[110]
The work shall be measured in square meter of finished pavement as per bill of quantities. 3.73.4 Basis of Payment The amount of completed and accepted work measured as provided above shall be paid for at the contract until price per sq. meter which payment shal l constitute full compensation for furnishing all materials, equipment, transport, handling, storage, preparing, mixing, curing and all incidentals necessary to complete the work as per applicable plans. 3.74 ANTI TERMITE WORK 374.1 D e s c r i p t io n its
The work covered by this item consists of protecting the building along surroundings from the attack of termites. 3.74.2 Materials
Government registered chemicals popularly known as the infamous "Dirty Dozen", includes widely used material like Dieldrin. Heptachlor are quite effective for anti -termite treatment. By use of Dieldrin, complete protection works for more than 30 years have been achieved in USA. But dieldrin is highly toxic and is responsible for environmental pollution. 3.74.3 A p p l i ca t io n Method A. Site clearance
There should be proper drainage of water in the site and any condition leading to the maintenance of high soil moisture around the building should be removed. The removal of all forms of wood, roots, stumps, logs and other debris should be done. B. Preparing Heptachlor/ Dieldrin Mixture for Treatment Add I kg. of powdered Heptachlor 40 W.P in 79 liters of pure water or 1 liters of dieldrin E.C. in 39 liters of pure water and mix thoroughly with a stick. For other equivalent registered product, mix according to the manufacturer's instruction. C. Termite Mound Treatment The termite mound found in the plinth area should be destroyed by pouring into the mounds at several places, after breaking open the earthen structure, and making holes with crowbars, at the rate of approximately 4 liters of emulsion per cubic meter of mound. The concentration by weight percent for Heptachlor, Chlordane is 0.5. D. Disturbance Once formed, treated soil barriers shall not be disturbed. If, by chance, treated soil b arriers are disturbed or required to be disturbed, those should again be treated with similar dose before foundation wall or floor is laid.
[111]
E. Overall Foundation Treatment Step - 1: After the foundation has been properly excavated & dressed and when the soi l is fairly dry, apply the prepared mixture of chemicals to the sides and bottom of the foundation trenches at the rate of 5 liters per sqm. Treatment should not be carried out when it is raining or when the soil is wet with raw of subsoil water. Lying of mass concrete should start when the chemical emulsion has been absorbed by the soil and the surface is quite dry. Step - 2: Anti termite chemical mixed water should be used in brick works in foundation. In this process, instead of using plain mixing water, use poisoned water (anti termite chemical mixed water as described in B of Application Method) only while preparing cement sand mortar for building foundation wall below the ground level and up to plinth level. Step - 3: After the column foundation, wall foundations and retaining walls of the basement come up, the back fill in immediate contact with the foundation structure shall be treated at the rate of 15 liters per sqm of the vertical surface of the sub -structure for each side. If water is used for ramming the earth-fill, the chemical treatment shall be carried out after ramming operation is done by rodding the earth at 150mm centers close to the wall surface and spraying the chemical with the above doze. As earth is returned in layers. the treatment shall be carried out in similar sta g es. The chemical emulsion shall be directed towards the concrete or masonry surfaces of the columns and walls so that the earth in contact with these surfaces is well treated with the chemical. In the case of R.C.0 framed structures with columns and plinth beams and R.C.0 basements, the treatment shall start at the depth of 500mm below ground level. From this depth the back-fill around the columns, beams and R.C.C basement walls shall be treated at the rate of 15 litres per sq. meter of the vertical surface. The other details of treatment shall be decorated as above. Step - 4: The hard-core or other sub-foundation materials should also be treated at the rate of 5 liters per sqm before the floor is laid. If the filled earth has been well rammed and the surface does not allow the emulsion to seep through, holes up to 50 to 75mm deep at 150mm centers both ways may be ma with crow bars on the surface to facilitate saturation of the soil with crow bars on the surface to facilitate saturation of the soil with the chemical emulsion. Special care shall be taken to establish continuity after vertical chemical barrier or inner wall surfaces from ground level up to the level of the filled earth/ sand surfaces. Where water pipes, drains and other services emerge from the soil, the surrounding soil should be well soaked with emulsified mixture. Electricity cable should be enclosed in metal or PVC conduit and this should be surrounded b. emulsion treated concrete or sand cement. Where pipes penetrate through wall or floors, the gap between the pipe and the structure should be sealed with emulsion treated Sand -Cement -Mortar. The fitting of Termite shields to pipes is useful especially in preventing the Termites using popes as bridges to gain entry.
Safety Measures When using anti termite chemical, keep all children and animals away from the area where treatment is to be carried out. In handling concentrated emulsions or liquid, take care to avoid splashing t h e liquid on to the skin or clothing. Try to use face shield and PVC gloves possible.
If accidentally splashed, wash the skin well with soap and water immediately. DO NOT SCRUB. Change clothing if necessary and wash soiled clothing with soap. Eves affected by splashing.
[112]
should be immediately well washed with water for at least 15 minutes and consult a doctor immediately. Wash well with soap and water after using the chemicals, especially be f ore eating, smoking or drinking. Use clean clothing and PVC footwear. and change them whenever contaminated. Where the chemical is being used, never eat or drink near by. Either remove foodstuffs away from the place that is being treated or makes certain that chemical do not come in contract with food or drinking water. Never store chemicals or the emulsions in bottles in such a way that they can be drunk accidentally. After use, wash all equipment including spade, korai, karni etc. and lock as a unused material. All used containers and empty cans should also be washed. Flush away any washing from drains or troughs with plenty of water - - prevent animals drinking contaminated water. DO NOT suck or blow through a pipe containing the chemical.
3.74.4 Method of measurement The unit price shall be in square meter complete in place. 3.74.5 Basis of payment Payment shall be made at the contract unit price per square meter of completed and accepted work which price shall constitute full compensation for furnishing, transporting, preparing spraying, labor, tools and equipment, overhead, profit, taxes and all incidental necessary to complete the item. 3.75 ROOF TRUSS 3.75.1 Description The work under this item shall consist of supplying and fabrication of Mild steel sections, as per design and drawing for roof truss including hoisting, fitting & fixing in position with bolts and nuts or rivets or welded and providing two coats of anticorrosive paint over a prime coat of red oxide paint, including using anchor bolts with nut embedded in structure. scaffolding etc. all complete per drawing and direction of the Engineer-in-Charge. 3.75.2 Method of Measurement This item shall be measured in metric tonne for solid steel section only. 3.75.3 Basis of Payment Payment shall be made of completed & accepted works in metric ton including supply of all materials, labor and equipment, scaffolding etc. complete at contract unit price mentioned in the bill of quantities. 3.76 C.I SHEET ROOFING 3.76.1 Description The work covered under this item shall consist of supplying & fitting fixing 26 BWG galvanized iron corrugated sheet roofing on wooden/steel frame with auxiliary fitting such as galvanized screw/J-hook
[113]
with nut, G.l Perlins limpet & bitumen washers, putty etc. complete as per direction, at all height. 3.76.2 Method of Measurement Measurement for payment shall be made in square meter. 3.76.3 Basis of Payment Payment shall be made of completed & accepted works in square meter actually covered surface including supply of all materials, labour, equipment, tools etc. complete at contract unit price mentioned in the bill of quantities. 3.77 CLEARING AFTER COMPLETION The contractor shall thoroughly clean all work upon completion. Clean off all strains, marks, spots, and disfigurements from all works, touch up as required. clean all windows panes, remove all rubbish and debris from building and site and leave premises clean and tidy and fit for occupation in all respects and to the entire satisfaction of the Engineer -in-Charge. 3.78 AS BUILT DRAWINGS The Contractor shall prepare as-built drawings for entire project after completion of construction, installation and all tests, and obtain approval from Owner/Consultant, and shall submit 3 (three) set of such as-built drawing to the Owner for keeping record. Minimum one computer soft -copy shall be accompanied with the as-built drawings. 3.79 TESTS TO BE PERFORMED The Contractor at his own cost shall perform the following tests for the construction materials. 1. SAND
At least two samples shall be tested for each consignment but not exceeding 275 cubic meters. a). b). c). d). e). 2. FM Percentage of clay lump Mica Content Organic Impurities Material fiber than # 200 BRICK At least 6 bricks to be tested for each consignment not exceeding 50,000 of brick. Unit weight Compressive strength Water absorption Dimensions (size and shap e) Efflorescence, if necessary (10 bricks)
a). b). c). d). e).
3.
REINFORCEMENT
[114]
Each set of - sample shall consist of 3 (three) representation standard places Deformed bar for each size for each consignment or as directed and shall be tested for the following properties: a). b). c). d). e). f). Yield or 0.2% Proof strength test Ultimate tensile strength test Elongation Bend test Cross' section area Unit Weight/meter
4.
STONE CHIPS At least two samples shall be tested for each consignment but not 600cum. a). b). c). d). e). 5. Gradation Unit weight Specific Gravity Los Angeles Abrasion Test. Water absorption
CEMENT At least 3 samples of cement shall be tested for each consi g n m ent but not exceeding 100 tons. a). Fineness b). Setting times c). Compressive strength d). 3,7, 28 days CONCRETE
6.
For all concrete work at least 3 (three) sets of 3 (three) samples cylinder/cubes and for each days casting or for each 150 cum of concrete shall be preserved and tested to for 7 days and 28 days crushing strength. 7. WATER Sulphate and chloride content
8. PLACE OF TESTING
All tests shall be performed in the BRTC-BUET or in any recognized laboratory approved by the Engineer-in-Charge. 9. COST OF TESTS The cost of making any test shall be borne by the Contractor if such test is clearly intended by or provided for in the specifications or Bill of quantities and is required to ascertain whether the design of and /or quality of any finished or partially finished work is appropriate for the purposes which it was intended to fulfill and conforms to specifications.
[115]
Section 9. Drawings
[116]

Museum of Human Evolution and Research Center, Dhaka.: Technical Specifications Material, Page No. 1

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Museum of Human Evolution and Research Center, Dhaka.: Technical Specifications Material, Page No. 1

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Technical Specifications Material, Page No.

Museum of Human evolution and Research Center, Dhaka.

Office of the executive engineer, Dhaka.

Office of the executive engineer, Dhaka.

Technical Specifications Material, Page No. 2

Md. Mamunur Rahman Executive Engineer,

Technical Specifications Material, Page No. 3

Instructions to BIDDERS ................................................................6

Tender Document ........................................................................................... 8

Evaluation and Qualification Criteria .............................................................. 9

Tender Preparation ...................................................................................... 11

Tender Submission ....................................................................................... 15

Tender Opening and Evaluation .................................................................... 16

Technical Specifications Material, Page No. 4

51. 52. 53. 54. 55. 56. 57.

Tender Data Sheet ........................................................................22 General Conditions of Contract ...................................................28

Section 3. Project Brief .....................................................................................27

Time Control ................................................................................................ 37

Quality Control ............................................................................................ 39

Technical Specifications Material, Page No. 5

51. 52. 53. 54. 55. 56.

Cost Control ................................................................................................. 40

Completion of the Contract ........................................................................... 45

Termination and Settlement of Disputes ........................................................ 45

Particular Conditions of Contract ..............................................50 Bill of Quantities ..........................................................................54

Section 7. General Specification ......................................................................67

SECTION 8: PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS ...................................................2 Section 9. Drawings .........................................................................................116

Technical Specifications Material, Page No. 6

(a) (b) (c)

Corrupt, Fraudulent, Collusive or Coercive Practices

In pursuance of this requirement, the Employer shall :

Technical Specifications Material, Page No. 7

Technical Specifications Material, Page No. 8

4.5 4.6 4.7 4.8

Eligible Materials, Equipment and Services

Tender Document Tender Document: Sections

Technical Specifications Material, Page No. 9

Section 7 General Specifications Section 8 Particular Specifications Section 9 Drawings

Tender Document: Clarification

Tender Document: PreTender Meeting

Evaluation and Qualification Criteria

11. Evaluation Criteria

Technical Specifications Material, Page No. 10

(a) (b) 12. Experience Criteria

(b) the minimum Tender capacity as specified in the TDS.

Technical Specifications Material, Page No. 11

Tender Preparation Only

17. Tender: one

18. Tender: Preparation Costs 19. Tender: Language

21. Tender: Submission Sheet and Bill of Quantities

Technical Specifications Material, Page No. 12

Technical Specifications Material, Page No. 13

Technical Specifications Material, Page No. 14

29. Tenderer: Disqualification

31.4 Unsuccessful Tenderers Tender Security will be discharged or returned within

31.5 The Tender Security may be forfeited:

Technical Specifications Material, Page No. 15

32. Tender: Format and Signing

33. Tender: Sealing and Marking

33.2 The inner and outer envelopes shall:

Technical Specifications Material, Page No. 16

unopened to the Tenderer. 36. Tender: Modification, Substitution or Withdrawal

Tender Opening and Evaluation